Sunteți pe pagina 1din 342

SYSTEM VERSION 6.

ABB Ability™ System 800xA


Upgrade
5.1 to 6.1 Upgrade
SYSTEM VERSION 6.1

ABB Ability™ System 800xA


Upgrade
5.1 to 6.1 Upgrade

Document Number: 2PAA111694-610


Document Revision: A
Release: February 2019

Trace back information Main Publication:


Tool version: 5.2.025
Build date: 2019-02-01 at 09:52:29
Domain: ABBPA
Workspace, version, checked in: 800xA Main, a207, 2019-01-29
Master: ix-358771-5.1 to 6.x Upgrade.xml
Recipe: ix-363993-6.1_5.1 to 6.1 Upgrade.rcp
PDF stylesheet: ix-315381-PDF-Stylesheet.xml
Customer stylesheet: ix-315380-CustomerStylesheet.xml
Notice
This document contains information about one or more ABB products and may include a description of or a reference
to one or more standards that may be generally relevant to the ABB products. The presence of any such description of
a standard or reference to a standard is not a representation that all of the ABB products referenced in this document
support all of the features of the described or referenced standard. In order to determine the specific features supported
by a particular ABB product, the reader should consult the product specifications for the particular ABB product.

ABB may have one or more patents or pending patent applications protecting the intellectual property in the ABB
products described in this document.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment
by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.

Products described or referenced in this document are designed to be connected, and to communicate information and
data via a secure network. It is the sole responsibility of the system/product owner to provide and continuously ensure
a secure connection between the product and the system network and/or any other networks that may be connected.

The system/product owners must establish and maintain appropriate measures, including, but not limited to, the
installation of firewalls, application of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of antivirus programs,
and so on, to protect the system, its products and networks, against security breaches, unauthorized access, interference,
intrusion, leakage, and/or theft of data or information.

ABB Ltd and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to such security breaches, any unauthorized
access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information.

ABB verifies the function of released products and updates. However system/product owners are ultimately responsible
to ensure that any system update (including but not limited to code changes, configuration file changes, third-party
software updates or patches, hardware change out, and so on) is compatible with the security measures implemented.
The system/product owners must verify that the system and associated products function as expected in the environment
they are deployed.

In no event shall ABB be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages of any nature or kind
arising from the use of this document, nor shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use
of any software or hardware described in this document.

This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written permission from ABB, and the
contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party nor used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used, copied, or disclosed
only in accordance with the terms of such license. This product meets the requirements specified in EMC Directive
2014/30/EU and in Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU.

Trademarks
All rights to copyrights, registered trademarks, and trademarks reside with their respective owners.

Copyright © 2019 by ABB.


All rights reserved.
Table of Contents

Table of Contents

About this User Manual


User Manual Conventions ................................................................................. 13
Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip Icons ...................................... 14
Terminology ....................................................................................................... 15
Released User Manuals and Release Notes .................................................... 15

1 Introduction
1.1 Virus Scanning Configuration During Installation and Post Installation ........... 18
1.2 Planning for the Upgrade .................................................................................. 18
1.3 Supported Operating Systems ......................................................................... 20
1.4 Disaster Recorvery ............................................................................................ 21
1.5 System Language Package .............................................................................. 21
1.6 Footprint Reduction during Upgrade ................................................................. 22
1.7 Online Upgrade ................................................................................................. 22

2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow


2.1 Considerations .................................................................................................. 25
2.2 Upgrade ............................................................................................................ 27
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow ........................................................................................ 28
2.3.1 Preparing the System 800xA 5.1 ......................................................... 29
2.3.2 Preparing and Setting Up the System 800xA 6.1 (Online Upgrade) .... 30
2.4 Offline Upgrade Flow ........................................................................................ 53
2.4.1 Preparing the System 800xA 5.1 ......................................................... 54
2.4.2 Preparing the 800xA 6.1 System (Offline Upgrade) ............................ 55
2.4.3 Setting Up the 800xA 6.1 System ........................................................ 59

3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.1 Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps .......................................................................... 69

2PAA111694-610 A 5
Table of Contents

3.2 System-wide Pre-Upgrade Procedures ............................................................. 69


3.2.1 Network including RNRP ..................................................................... 70
3.2.2 Configure IPSec ................................................................................ 70
3.2.3 Consistency Check .............................................................................. 71
3.2.4 Migrating Visual Basic Process Graphics Aspects to Process Graphics
Aspects ................................................................................................ 74
3.2.5 Faceplates ........................................................................................... 75
3.2.6 Record the Number of Aspects and Objects ....................................... 75
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup ..................................... 77
3.3.1 Batch Management .............................................................................. 78
3.3.2 Time Server Client Configuration ......................................................... 78
3.3.3 Customized Alarm Priority Mapping Aspects ....................................... 79
3.3.4 800xA for AC 800M .............................................................................. 80
3.3.5 Engineering Studio .............................................................................. 81
3.3.6 Device Types in System 800xA ........................................................... 83
3.3.7 Device Management FOUNDATION Fieldbus ..................................... 83
3.3.8 800xA for Advant Master and 800xA for Safeguard ........................... 83
3.3.9 800xA for AC 100 ................................................................................. 85
3.3.10 800xA for DCI ...................................................................................... 86
3.3.11 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony .................................................... 88
3.3.12 800xA for AC 870P/Melody ................................................................ 89
3.3.13 800xA for MOD 300 ............................................................................. 90
3.3.14 IEC 61850 Connect .............................................................................. 91
3.3.15 Freelance Connect (800xA for Freelance) ........................................... 92
3.3.16 PLC Connect ........................................................................................ 92
3.3.17 Asset Optimization ............................................................................... 92
3.3.18 PC, Network and Software Monitoring ................................................. 97
3.3.19 PC, Network and Software Monitoring Device Library ......................... 98
3.3.20 SMS and e-mail Messaging ................................................................. 98
3.3.21 Information Management ..................................................................... 99
3.3.22 Application Scheduler and Calculation Server ....................................102
3.3.23 800xA History .......................................................................................103
3.3.24 Process Engineering Tool Integration .................................................. 105

2PAA111694-610 A 6
Table of Contents

3.3.25 Multisystem Integration ....................................................................... 106


3.4 System 800xA Maintenance Backup ................................................................ 108
3.5 Pre-upgrade Procedures for Local Data Backup .............................................. 109
3.5.1 800xA for AC 800M ..............................................................................109
3.5.2 Gain Schedule Settings in PidAdvancedCC ........................................ 110
3.5.3 Information Management ..................................................................... 116
3.5.4 Application Change Management ........................................................120
3.5.5 Basic History Service Data .................................................................. 122
3.5.6 800xA History .......................................................................................122

4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.1 Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps ........................................................................ 125
4.2 Verify the Network and RNRP ........................................................................... 127
4.3 Removal of VB Graphics and Obsolete System Extensions ............................. 127
4.4 Compare the Number of Aspects and Objects ..................................................130
4.5 Reconfigure Aspects Created By System Extensions ...................................... 132
4.6 Configure Hot key for the New Find Tool .......................................................... 133
4.7 Correct Alarm and Lock Indication in Faceplates ............................................. 133
4.8 IEC 61850 Connect .......................................................................................... 134
4.9 Time Server Client Configuration ...................................................................... 136
4.10 Customized Alarm Priority Mapping Aspects .................................................... 137
4.11 Reconfigure Group Displays ............................................................................. 137
4.12 VideONet ...........................................................................................................137
4.12.1 Upgrade VideONet Videoserver .......................................................... 137
4.12.2 Upgrade VideONet Connect Database ................................................ 138
4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses ................................................................ 138
4.13.1 Restore Device Types ..........................................................................139
4.13.2 Device Management PROFIBUS & HART ......................................... 146
4.13.3 License Count Tool .............................................................................. 149
4.13.4 Device Management FOUNDATION Fieldbus ................................... 151
4.14 800xA for Advant Master and 800xA for Safeguard ........................................ 155
4.14.1 Copy the Advant Master Controller Licenses.txt .................................. 155
4.14.2 Update the Configuration Files ............................................................ 155

2PAA111694-610 A 7
Table of Contents

4.14.3 Copy the DATHR Files ......................................................................... 156


4.14.4 Reconfigure RTA Board Control Aspect Settings ............................... 156
4.15 800xA for AC 100 .............................................................................................. 157
4.15.1 Configuration and Operation ................................................................157
4.15.2 Time Synchronization and Daylight Saving Time ................................ 158
4.15.3 Installation Verification (Optional) ........................................................ 159
4.15.4 Product Verification .............................................................................. 162
4.16 800xA for DCI ....................................................................................................164
4.16.1 Deleting Additional Control Network .................................................... 164
4.16.2 Configure a Single NIC Interface to the DCU .................................... 165
4.16.3 Enable DCI OPC AE Service Group(s) ................................................ 166
4.17 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony ................................................................. 167
4.17.1 Harmony API Configuration ................................................................. 167
4.17.2 Harmony Configuration Server Information ......................................... 168
4.17.3 Restart Connectivity Server ................................................................. 170
4.17.4 Remove Harmony Configuration Server .............................................. 171
4.17.5 Remove Harmony Server Monitor ....................................................... 171
4.18 800xA for AC 870P/Melody ............................................................................... 172
4.18.1 Restore 800xA for AC 870P/Melody Information ................................. 172
4.18.2 Additional 800xA for AC 870P/Melody Configuration Steps ................ 173
4.19 800xA for MOD 300 .......................................................................................... 174
4.20 PLC Connect ..................................................................................................... 174
4.20.1 Restoring the Pretreat dll ..................................................................... 175
4.20.2 Update the Sattbus Configuration ........................................................175
4.20.3 Redeploy the PLC Connect Configuration ........................................... 175
4.21 Freelance Connect ............................................................................................ 176
4.22 Asset Optimization ............................................................................................ 177
4.23 PC, Network and Software Monitoring .............................................................. 180
4.23.1 Configure the Service Provider and Service Group ............................. 181
4.23.2 Migrate the IT Asset Monitors .............................................................. 182
4.24 PC, Network and Software Monitoring Device Library ...................................... 182
4.24.1 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony/Melody Connectivity Server Node
Update ................................................................................................. 182

2PAA111694-610 A 8
Table of Contents

4.24.2 Restarting the Event Collector Service ................................................ 184


4.24.3 Additional Post Upgrade Steps ............................................................ 185
4.25 SMS and e-mail Messaging .............................................................................. 185
4.26 Batch Management .......................................................................................... 186
4.26.1 Activate Batch Redundancy .................................................................186
4.26.2 Batch Management Post Installations ................................................ 186
4.26.3 Shutdown Script ...................................................................................186
4.26.4 Batch Management Toolbar ................................................................. 187
4.26.5 Set Date and Time for Batch Servers .................................................. 187
4.27 Basic History Service ........................................................................................ 188
4.28 Information Management .................................................................................. 189
4.28.1 Reconfiguring the IM Log Configuration ............................................. 189
4.28.2 Information Management History Backup/Restore Utility .................... 190
4.28.3 Restoring Other Information Management Related Files .................... 195
4.28.4 Starting PAS .........................................................................................196
4.28.5 Updating Archive Logs .........................................................................197
4.28.6 Information Management Maintenance ............................................... 197
4.28.7 Running hsDBMaint -stagger ...............................................................199
4.29 Desktop Trends ................................................................................................. 199
4.30 Calculations Service ..........................................................................................200
4.31 Scheduling Service (Application Scheduler) ..................................................... 200
4.32 800xA for AC 800M ........................................................................................... 201
4.33 Control Builder M Projects ................................................................................ 201
4.33.1 AC 800M Fingerprint Tool .................................................................... 202
4.33.2 Start Values Analyzer Tool ................................................................... 202
4.34 Engineering Studio ............................................................................................ 203
4.34.1 Function Designer Diagram Upgrade .................................................. 203
4.34.2 Conversion of Global Variables (Diagram Variables) into
Communication Variables .................................................................... 205
4.35 Bulk Data Manager ........................................................................................... 206
4.36 Process Engineering Tool Integration ............................................................... 208
4.37 Add Autostart Shortcut ...................................................................................... 209
4.38 Multisystem Integration ..................................................................................... 209

2PAA111694-610 A 9
Table of Contents

4.39 Load System Extensions ...................................................................................210


4.40 Changing Aspect Precedence List .................................................................... 210
4.41 System Backup ................................................................................................. 211
4.42 800xA History .................................................................................................... 212
4.42.1 800xA History Server / 800xA History Data Collector .......................... 212
4.42.2 800xA History Archiving .......................................................................212
4.43 Application Change Management ..................................................................... 212
4.43.1 ACM Server Upgrade Procedure ......................................................... 213
4.43.2 Accessing the ACM Server .................................................................. 221
4.44 Consistency Check ........................................................................................... 223

Appendix A Migrate Redundant Domain Controllers


A.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 227
A.2 Preparation ........................................................................................................228
A.2.1 Preparing a Domain for Windows Server 2016 ................................... 228
A.3 Removing the Redundant Domain Controller ................................................... 229
A.4 Installing an Additional Windows Server 2016 Domain Controller ................... 230
A.5 Transferring the FSMO Roles to the Secondary Domain Controller ................. 232
A.5.1 Transferring the Schema Master Role ................................................. 233
A.5.2 Transferring the Domain Naming Master Role .................................... 235
A.5.3 Transferring the RID Master, PDC Emulator, and Infrastructure Master
Roles ....................................................................................................236
A.6 Removing the Remaining Windows Server 2008 Domain Controller ............... 237
A.7 Installing an Additional Windows Server 2016 Domain Controller .................... 238
A.8 Required 800xA Software ................................................................................. 238

Appendix B Troubleshooting
B.1 Errors and Warnings during Upgrade ............................................................... 239
B.1.1 Failed to Serialize Aspect .................................................................... 239
B.1.2 ASO Object Class xxxx ........................................................................ 239
B.1.3 UnplacedObjects.afw ........................................................................... 240
B.1.4 The System Cannot Find the Path Specified ....................................... 240
B.1.5 System Extension ´xxxx´ with ID ´Guid` is not Installed on this Node ..241

2PAA111694-610 A 10
Table of Contents

B.1.6 Timeout by External Service ................................................................ 241


B.1.7 Graphic Aspect = xxx Cannot be Imported .......................................... 242
B.1.8 Too Many Aspects of Category ............................................................ 242
B.1.9 Aspect Category is Missing ................................................................. 242
B.1.10 Unknown Transaction Error ................................................................. 243
B.1.11 Import/Export Error .............................................................................. 244
B.2 Troubleshooting during Deploy ......................................................................... 245

Appendix C Control Builder M Compatibility Check


C.1 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Compatibility Issues .................................................... 251

Appendix D Online Upgrade Controller Level


D.1 Online Upgrade Controller Level ....................................................................... 261
D.2 Flowchart for Upgrading Controller Level ..........................................................262
D.3 Flowchart for Extending Controller Level .......................................................... 264

Appendix E 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Online Upgrade


E.1 Prerequisites .................................................................................................... 267
E.2 Node Order ...................................................................................................... 267
E.3 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Upgrade Procedure ................................. 268

Appendix F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider


Names
F.1 ABB 800xA for MOD 300 .................................................................................. 278
F.1.1 800xA for MOD 300 Batch .................................................................. 281
F.1.2 Renaming MOD 300 AE Service Group and Service Provider Names 283 .
F.2 ABB 800xA for DCI ........................................................................................... 284
F.3 800xA for AC 800M ........................................................................................... 290
F.4 ABB Asset Optimization .................................................................................... 292
F.5 ABB PC, Network and Software Monitoring ...................................................... 292

Appendix G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions


G.1 Collecting Data from Existing System 800xA 5.1 .............................................. 293
G.2 Node Functions and System Functions ............................................................ 296

2PAA111694-610 A 11
Table of Contents

G.3 Definitions ........................................................................................................ 297


G.3.1 System Functions ................................................................................ 297
G.3.2 Node Types ..........................................................................................297
G.3.3 Node Functions ....................................................................................297
G.3.4 Options .................................................................................................297
G.4 Identifying System Functions ............................................................................ 298
G.4.1 Planning System Functions ................................................................. 304
G.5 Identifying Node Functions ................................................................................306
G.5.1 Planning Node Functions .....................................................................314

Appendix H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade


H.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 315
H.2 Example ............................................................................................................ 315
H.3 Considerations ................................................................................................. 316
H.4 Source System Workflow .................................................................................. 316
H.4.1 Preparing the 800xA 5.1 System ......................................................... 317
H.5 Target System Workflow ................................................................................... 318
H.6 Node Function Configuration ............................................................................ 329
H.6.1 OPC Server for AC 800M ................................................................... 329
H.6.2 PLC Connect and Softpoint ................................................................. 330
H.6.3 PROFIBUS and HART ......................................................................... 331
H.6.4 Asset Optimization ............................................................................... 331
H.6.5 PC, Network and Software Monitoring ................................................. 332
H.6.6 IEC 61850 Connect ..............................................................................333
H.6.7 FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connectivity services .................................... 334
H.6.8 Advant Master Connectivity Services .................................................. 334
H.6.9 SMS and E-mail Messaging ................................................................ 335
H.7 Remove Nodes ................................................................................................. 336
H.8 Post Upgrade Procedures ................................................................................. 336

Revision History ..................................................................................................... 337

Index .......................................................................................................................... 339

2PAA111694-610 A 12
About this User Manual
User Manual Conventions

About this User Manual

The System 800xA Safety AC 800M High Integrity Safety Manual (3BNP004865*)
must be read completely by users of 800xA High Integrity. The recommendations
and requirements found in the safety manual must be considered and implemented
during all phases of the life cycle.
Any security measures described in this user manual, for example, for user access,
password security, network security, firewalls, virus protection, and so on, represent
possible steps that a user of an 800xA System may want to consider based on a risk
assessment for a particular application and installation. This risk assessment, as well
as the proper implementation, configuration, installation, operation, administration,
and maintenance of all relevant security related equipment, software, and procedures,
are the responsibility of the user of the system.
This user manual describes how to upgrade System 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 latest
release.
This user manual does not include information on site planning, engineering planning,
software configuration, network design, security measures, tools, maintenance, and so
on that can be found in other 800xA user manuals.
Unless otherwise noted, the procedures described require Windows Administrator
privileges.

User Manual Conventions


Microsoft Windows conventions as defined in the Microsoft Manual of Style are normally
used for the standard presentation of material when entering text, key sequences,
prompts, messages, menu items, screen elements, and so on.

2PAA111694-610 A 13
About this User Manual
User Manual Conventions

Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip Icons


This user manual includes Warning, Caution, and Information where appropriate to
point out safety related or other important information. It also includes Tip to point out
useful hints to the reader. The corresponding symbols should be interpreted as follows:

Electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard that could result in electrical
shock.

Warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard that could result in personal injury.

Caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the concept


discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard that could result in
corruption of software or damage to equipment/property.

Information icon alerts the reader to pertinent facts and conditions.

Tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project or how to use
a certain function.

Although Warning hazards are related to personal injury, and Caution hazards are
associated with equipment or property damage, it should be understood that operation
of damaged equipment could, under certain operational conditions, result in degraded
process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore, fully comply with
all Warning and Caution notices.

2PAA111694-610 A 14
About this User Manual
Terminology

Terminology
A complete and comprehensive list of terms is included in System 800xA Terminology
and Acronyms (3BSE089190*). The listing includes terms and definitions that apply to
the 800xA System where the usage is different from commonly accepted industry standard
definitions.

Table: Terminology

Term/Acronym Description
Backup 800xA Backup: Backup using the 800xA Backup Definition aspect.
Functional Area Backup: Backup through defined tools or copy of
Functional Area configuration and/or data to a safe media for items not
covered by 800xA Backup.
The specific operations called out for the Functional Area within the
Backup/Restore procedure in System 800xA Maintenance
(3BSE046784*) for same version to same version backup and restore.
Restore 800xA Restore: Restore through the Configuration Wizard.
Functional Area Restore: Restore through defined tools or copy of
Functional Area configuration and/or data from a safe media for items
not covered by 800xA Backup.
The specific operations called out for the Functional Area within the
Backup/Restore procedure in System 800xA Maintenance
(3BSE046784*) for same version to same version backup and restore.
Upgrade Moving from one 800xA release to a later 800xA release, whether it be
a major or minor release.
Update Adding revisions, patches, hot fixes, or rollups to an existing 800xA
System.

Released User Manuals and Release Notes


A complete list of all User Manuals and Release Notes applicable to System 800xA is
provided in System 800xA Released User Documents (3BUA000263*).
System 800xA Released User Documents (3BUA000263*) is updated each time a
document is updated or a new document is released.

2PAA111694-610 A 15
About this User Manual
Released User Manuals and Release Notes

It is in pdf format and is provided in the following ways:


• Included on the documentation media provided with the system and published to
ABB Library and myABB/My Control System portal when released as part of a major
or minor release or System Revision.
• Published to ABB Library and myABB/My Control System portal when a User Manual
or Release Note is updated in between any of the release cycles listed in the first
bullet.

2PAA111694-610 A 16
1 Introduction

1 Introduction

The latest version of this manual is available in ABB Library and myABB/My Control
System portal.

This document reflects 800xA System and Functional Area software at the time of
release. All 800xA System and Functional Area Release Notes must be read and
understood before performing any upgrade procedures. The Release Notes contain
any last minute changes that must be performed when installing or upgrading the
800xA System. All Release Notes can be found on the System 800xA media under
the Release Notes folder.
Visual Basic Process Graphics (VBPG) is not supported beginning System 800xA
6.0. It is mandatory to migrate all VBPG to PG2 graphics before performing the
upgrade. Plan for the migration in advance. During Upgrade all the VBPG graphic
elements, VBPG graphic displays contents will be cleaned up. Also the standard VB
graphics and obsolete system extensions installed in the system are unregistered
and deleted.
This user manual describes the procedure to upgrade from 800xA 5.1 or any revision
or feature pack of 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 latest release.
The following are the different phases of a system upgrade:
• Plan
• Prepare
• Upgrade
• Configure
For more details on each system upgrade phase along with the workflow, refer to System
800xA Installation, Update, and Upgrade Getting Started (2PAA111708*).

2PAA111694-610 A 17
1 Introduction
1.1 Virus Scanning Configuration During Installation and Post Installation

1.1 Virus Scanning Configuration During Installation


and Post Installation
The user should make sure that the installation procedure completes without exposing
the computers to malware or malicious network traffic of any sort.
This can only be done by limiting the communication to the system and by performing
separate virus scanning of any portable media or disks before connecting them to
the system nodes during the installation. After completing the system installation and
configuration (post installation) it is recommended to perform a full virus scan of all
computers in the system.

1.2 Planning for the Upgrade


Visual Basic Process Graphics (VBPG) is not supported beginning System 800xA
6.0. It is mandatory to migrate all VBPG to PG2 graphics before performing the
upgrade. Plan for the migration in advance. During Upgrade all the VB PG graphics
elements, VB PG graphic displays contents will be cleaned up. Also the standard VB
graphics and obsolete system extensions installed in the system are unregistered
and deleted.
Planning for the upgrade can save time and resources. The instruction in this user manual
are presented in sequential order; however, depending on the plant performing the
upgrade, some of the actions can be performed in advance or in parallel. For example,
the upgrade flows are written to reflect upgrading and using existing servers and clients.
If new servers and clients are being used, prepare those before beginning the upgrade
(load and configure the Windows Operating System, third party software, and so on.),
or while performing the pre-upgrade procedures.
For third party software prerequisites, refer to System 800xA Third Party Software
(3BUA000500). This document is accessible from 800xA media, ABB Library and
myABB/My Control System portal.
The prerequisites depend on the system and node functions installed in the system. For
more details on supported operating systems and prerequisites, refer to System 800xA
Installation, Update, and Upgrade Getting Started (2PAA111708*).

2PAA111694-610 A 18
1 Introduction
1.2 Planning for the Upgrade

The hardware specifications such as the memory size and the processor speed will
determine the system performance after a system upgrade. Refer to Certified products
for use with ABB System 800xA for a list of verified hardware.
1. 800xA Licensing: The license model which enforces licensing for the 800xA
Hardware components including Controllers and Communication Interfaces, have
been changed beginning with 800xA 6.0. Controllers, Communication Interface
modules on the CEX-bus require separate Hardware license. IO modules and
Communication Interface slave units (CI801, CI830, and CI840) do not require
hardware license.
ABB requires data from the existing system in order to generate the Hardware license
for each Hardware component. The data is collected by running the ABB Control
Hardware Report Tool (2PAA114472*) in the existing system before upgrade. This
tool is available in ABB Library and myABB/My Control System portal.
Refer to System 800xA Licensing Information (2PAA111691*) for information on
the Control Hardware Report Tool.

Order the 800xA licenses required for the latest system version to which its intended
to upgrade. The licenses from the previous system versions will not work.

The following considerations may vary depending on the system version being
upgraded and if the upgrade will be performed online or offline.

Concurrent access to the current 800xA System version and the 800xA 6.1 system
is recommended until the upgrade has been performed. This makes it possible to
easily retrieve any data or files that have been missed. Concurrent access depends
upon many different factors, including:
• Configuration of the existing system.
• Desired configuration of the 800xA 6.1 system.
• Server and client use strategy.
• Configuration of user and user groups.
• Use of service accounts.
• Domain controllers.
• Redundancy.
• Logical and physical networks.

2PAA111694-610 A 19
1 Introduction
1.3 Supported Operating Systems

One strategy is to leave a minimal part of the existing system intact, such as
an Aspect Server, while preparing a major part of the 800xA 6.1 System. Another
strategy is to prepare a minimal 800xA 6.1 System.
Retaining an Aspect Server from the existing system minimizes the time it takes
to retrieve data or files from it. A disk drive image provides a quick way to
recover, but often it requires no hardware upgrade. Try to delay the upgrade
of the hardware in one Aspect Server as long as possible.
It is highly recommended to retain the Aspect Directory node after taking the
maintenance backup on the 800xA 5.1 System. This will not only act as a reference
node post-upgrade, but will also ensure that the changes made to the aspects created
by the System Extensions can be reapplied in the new system, if lost during an
upgrade.
If it is not necessary to do the complete upgrade in one process, it may be
possible to perform the upgrade in steps by stopping selected system functions
or by stopping some parts of the plant, or a combination of the two.
2. Identify the device types used in the system. The latest version of the Device Libraries
are required during the upgrade. These files will be made available on the System
800xA Installation media. Check for newer versions of the Device Libraries in ABB
Library and myABB/My Control System portal.

1.3 Supported Operating Systems


System 800xA runs only on 64-bit (x64) operating systems beginning System 800xA
6.0.
The supported operating systems, service packs, and hot fixes are listed in System
800xA Third Party Software (3BUA000500). This document can be found in 800xA media,
ABB Library and myABB/My Control System portal.

Server Operating System and Workstation Operating System will be used throughout
the remainder of this document.

The US English version of the operating system is required even if a translation NLS
package for System 800xA is used.
For more details on supported operating systems and prerequisites, refer to System
800xA Third Party Software (3BUA000500) and System 800xA Installation, Update, and
Upgrade Getting Started (2PAA111708*).

2PAA111694-610 A 20
1 Introduction
1.4 Disaster Recorvery

1.4 Disaster Recorvery


There are third party backup/restore and disk imaging utilities that are useful when
software or data becomes corrupted to the point that the node will no longer function
correctly. A limited number of hardware failures can also be compensated for by using
these utilities. However, it is important to understand the limitations and ramifications
associated with these utilities. In some cases (such as corrupted data, corrupted software,
or hard disk failures) these utilities can be useful while in other cases (such as replacing
a node) these utilities may be of limited use.
It is recommended that a third party backup/restore and/or disk imaging utility be used
to save (and restore if necessary) an image of node hard disks after installation of third
party software and/or after installing all software.

Disk image software supports online and offline modes. System 800xA supports only
offline mode of disk image backup.

The 800xA System import/export utility can be used to save 800xA System information
one portion at a time. However, the 800xA System backup utility is the functional
equivalent of exporting all 800xA System information at one time. The critical difference
between these utilities is that individually exported portions of 800xA System information
can be imported back into the original system or into a completely different system while
backed up 800xA System information can only be used to restore a specific system on
specific nodes. The 800xA System allows for scheduled 800xA System backups. Refer
to System 800xA Maintenance (3BSE046784*) for information on performing
precautionary scheduled 800xA System backups.

1.5 System Language Package


The 800xA System includes support for the default language, which is US English.
Translations of the operator interface (System 800xA Language Packages) are released
separately after the main release of the 800xA System. Upgrade of a system including
a Language Package requires an upgrade of the Language Package when it is released.
Refer to the Language Package release notes for information on upgrading a Language
Package to System 800xA 6.1.

2PAA111694-610 A 21
1 Introduction
1.6 Footprint Reduction during Upgrade

1.6 Footprint Reduction during Upgrade


System 800xA makes better use of hadware than older system versions beginning
System 800xA Version 6.0. The hardware footprint reduction is acheived by combinning
multiple node functions on a single node. The movement of node functions can be
acheived during the upgrade process. Refer to Appendix H for performing footprint
reduction during upgrade.

1.7 Online Upgrade


Online Upgrade makes it possible to upgrade an existing 800xA System without a process
shutdown. Plant operations are not disturbed while upgrading server and client software,
including OCS connectivity services, and AC 800M Controllers (processor units and
communication interfaces (CI)). The 800xA System being upgraded must have redundant
Aspect and Connectivity Servers.
Online Upgrade Controller Level allows AC 800M controllers to be upgraded with new
firmware versions online. Online upgrade is initiated from Control Builder by a nine-step
wizard. Refer to 800xA Online upgrade and Co-existence, versions compatibility
(3BSE080447) in the ABB Library and myABB/My Control System portal for the supported
upgrade paths.

It is required to maintain Time Synchronization among all the nodes during the
complete upgrade process.

The nodes are upgraded in the following order:


• Domain Controllers.
• One redundant Aspect Server.
• 800xA for AC 870P/Melody Configuration Server.
• One redundant Connectivity Server for each redundant Connectivity Server
configuration.
• Third Aspect Server (if 2oo3 redundancy).
• Some clients.
• IM Server.
• All other Application Servers (Batch, Asset Optimization, PC, Network and Software
Monitoring, and so on.).

2PAA111694-610 A 22
1 Introduction
1.7 Online Upgrade

• All other nodes except Primary Aspect Server.


• Primary Aspect Server.
The client and server level is upgraded and the plant is fully operable, although the
controllers are not upgraded. The controller level is upgraded as follows:
• Some redundant Controller pairs (and CEX units if needed).
• Remaining redundant Controller pairs (if desired).
• Nonredundant controllers (no CEX units). Upgrading nonredundant controllers will
require minimal plant downtime.

This instruction does not contain procedures for upgrading the AC 800M controller
level. Refer to Appendix D for a general description.

Perform the online upgrade procedures on 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony
systems as given in Appendix E.

2PAA111694-610 A 23
2PAA111694-610 A 24
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.1 Considerations

2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow

This topic describes the considerations to be taken before planning an upgrade of System
800xA 5.1 to System 800xA 6.1 and the workflow for upgrading.

Figure 2.1: Upgrade System 800xA - Overview

2.1 Considerations
The following considerations must be taken into account before performing the upgrade.
The system cannot be expanded with new functions until the system is completly
upgraded.
After the upgrade is completed refer to System 800xA Installation, Update, and
Upgrade Getting Started (2PAA111708*) for more information on how to add functions
to the system.
• Unless otherwise indicated, the person performing this upgrade must use the same
user account that was used during the installation of the 800xA System software.
• To guarantee the functionality of the upgraded system, follow these instructions
carefully and perform them in a well defined order.
• It is recommended that a disk image be taken of all disks on each node before
beginning and after completing the upgrade.
• Backing up the aspect directory (800xA System Backup), reports, history data,
graphics, and other application data is required before performing the upgrade.

2PAA111694-610 A 25
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.1 Considerations

• Take an inventory of all software on all nodes in the 800xA System before performing
the upgrade.
• Many functions in System 800xA require the local clocks in the different system
nodes to be synchronized. How the time synchronization is best done differs between
systems.
Refer to System 800xA Network Configuration (3BSE034463*) that describes number
of different time synchronization schemes. Ensure proper time synchronization
scheme is in place before and after upgrade.
• Refer to the compatibility issues detailed in Appendix C before beginning the upgrade.
Online upgrade and coexistence between different Controller versions is listed in
document 800xA Online upgrade and Co-existence, versions compatibility
(3BSE080447) available on ABB Library and myABB/My Control System portal.
• Visual Basic Process Graphics (VBPG) is not supported in System 800xA beginning
System 800xA 6.0. It is mandatory to migrate all VB PG to Process Graphics 2 (PG2)
before performing upgrade. Plan for the migration in advance. During Upgrade all
the VB PG graphics elements, VB PG graphic displays contents will be cleaned up.
Also the standard VB graphics and obsolete system extensions installed in the
system are unregistered and deleted.
Refer to System 800xA Engineering Process Graphics Migration Tool (3BSE049231*)
available in ABB Library and myABB/My Control System portal.
The System 800xA VBPG Search Tool is used to find VBPG aspects in 800xA system
that need to be migrated prior to a system upgrade. The tool can also identify PG2
and Faceplate aspects that have references to VBPG aspects. For more information
on the tool, refer to System 800xA VBPG migration and System 800xA VBPG Search
Tool (3BSE081093).
All VBPG aspects Main View in System 800xA 6.0 and later will show a message:
This aspect is not supported and will not be available for operator actions.
Symbol Factory Controls are no longer installed with the standard ABB 800xA
installation. A separate installation (ABB 800xA Symbol Factory) is needed to use
the Symbol Factory Controls. The ABB 800xA Symbol Factory installation package
is available on the media. A separate license is required to use the ABB 800xA Symbol
Factory Controls.
• If Foundation FIELDBUS is used in the system and if Visual Basic Graphics or
Faceplates are not used in the system, contact your local Support Organization on
how to do Online Upgrade.
• Perform the online upgrade procedures on 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony
systems as given in Appendix E.

2PAA111694-610 A 26
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.2 Upgrade

• If Batch Management is installed and running, all batches must be in the complete
state (no running batches or active phases) before upgrade.
• If VideONet Connect is used, note that existing video recordings and video recording
configuration in the 5.1 system will not be available in the upgraded system. Video
recordings will have to be configured in the upgraded VideONet Server node
according to VideONet History Manual available on the VideONet Server node after
installation of the VideONet Videoserver application. Also note that, in the upgraded
system it will not be possible to view video until the VideONet Videoserver application
has been upgraded to a new version.
After upgrade, make sure not to index the following folders under any circumstances,
or the entire volume that contains them. These folders can exist on one or more disks
and should not be indexed on any of them.
• OperateITData: Runtime data from services is stored here.
• OperateITTemp: Runtime data for client processes is stored here.
• ProgramData: Various other runtime data is stored here.
• HsData, Oracle: Applies only for Information Management Servers.
• ABBIndustrialIT Data: User data is stored here.
Refer to Microsoft Windows help for more information on the Windows Search Indexing
feature and recommendations on types of folders to index and not to index.

2.2 Upgrade
System 800xA supports Online upgrade and Offline upgrade. The detail workflow is
giving in the following sections.
Online Upgrade makes it possible to upgrade an existing 800xA System without a process
shutdown. Plant operations are not disturbed while upgrading server and client software,
including connectivity services, and AC 800M Controllers (processor units and
communication interfaces (CI)).
The 800xA System being upgraded online must have redundant Aspect and Connectivity
Servers, and redundant AC 800M Controllers consisting of two redundant processing
units connected to I/O modules either directly to the modulebus or using various CI
modules. The client and server level can be upgraded without upgrading the controllers.

800xA Systems without redundant Aspect and Connectivity Servers require a process
shutdown and must be upgraded offline.

2PAA111694-610 A 27
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

Redundancy is not supported for the Batch Management and Information Management
combined node type. Online upgrade is not supported for such systems.

This instruction addresses only the client and server level software. It does not provide
detailed instruction for upgrading the controller level; however, a high level discussion
about the AC 800M Controllers is documented in Appendix D.

Perform the online upgrade procedures on 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony
systems as given in Appendix E.

2.3 Online Upgrade Flow


This section provides detailed information and procedures for doing an Online Upgrade
of an 800xA System. Refer to Online Upgrade Controller Level for additional information
and ideas on how to streamline the upgrade process.
The topic is organized so that the instructions are presented in the proper upgrade
order. Do not skip any steps that pertain to 800xA software being used in the current
or upgraded system.
It is important to create backups of node hard disks (using a third party backup/restore
and/or disk imaging utility) and the 800xA System before starting the upgrade
procedures. Valid backups ensure that the system can be restored if necessary.

Place the process in a low level of production where the likelihood of process upsets
is minimized.

Online upgrade of systems with 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony need special
considerations. Refer to the 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Online Upgrade for
considerations, node order and detailed online upgrade procedures.
Online Upgrade workflow is divided into following sections:
• Preparing the System 800xA 5.1 : The procedures for preparing System 800xA 5.1
involves system wide Pre-Upgrade steps that needs to be done before upgrade.
The node wise Pre-Upgrade procedures need to be executed during the Online
Upgrade of that specific node.
• Preparing and Setting Up the System 800xA 6.1 (Online Upgrade): The procedures
for Online Upgrade covers the node order and the workflow to be followed across
the 800xA system.
• Post-Upgrade Procedures: Perform the post upgrade procedures for different node
functions.

2PAA111694-610 A 28
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

2.3.1 Preparing the System 800xA 5.1


The procedures for preparing System 800xA 5.1 involves system wide Pre-Upgrade
steps that needs to be done before upgrade. The node wise Pre-Upgrade procedures
need to be executed during the Online Upgrade of that specific node.
The following are the system-wide Pre-Upgrade procedures:
1. Document all Windows settings including the domain, DNS, policies, users, and so
on.
2. Collect the information about the System Functions, Node Functions and their
configurations from existing System 800xA 5.1. This information can be obtained
from existing plant documentation.
The information about existing System 800xA 5.1 must be used while planning a
similar System 800xA 6.1.
Diagnostics Collection Tool can also provide some information about existing
System 800xA 5.1. For more details, refer to Appendix G.

2PAA111694-610 A 29
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

3. Migrate all the existing Visual Basic Process Graphics (VBPG) aspects to the
corresponding Process Graphics 2 aspects. Refer to System 800xA Engineering
Process Graphics Migration Tool (3BSE049231*) available in ABB Library and
myABB/My Control System portal.
Visual Basic Process Graphics (VBPG) is not supported in System 800xA beginning
System 800xA 6.0. It is mandatory to migrate all VBPG to PG2 graphics before
performing upgrade.
The System 800xA VBPG Search Tool is used to find VBPG aspects in 800xA system
that need to be migrated prior to a system upgrade. The tool can also identify PG2
aspects that have references to VBPG aspects. For more information on the tool,
refer to System 800xA VBPG migration and System 800xA VBPG Search Tool
(3BSE081093).
All VBPG aspects Main View in System 800xA 6.0 and later will show a message:
This aspect is not supported and will not be available for operator actions.
Symbol Factory Controls are no longer installed with the standard ABB 800xA
installation. A separate installation (ABB 800xA Symbol Factory) is needed to use
the Symbol Factory Controls. The ABB 800xA Symbol Factory installation package
is available on the media. A separate license is required to use the ABB 800xA Symbol
Factory Controls.
4. The 800xA System and software require preparatory procedures before performing
the upgrade. These pre-upgrade procedures are dependent on the products installed
in existing 800xA System. Perform the applicable procedures in the order presented
in Pre-Upgrade Procedures section before proceeding.
If performing an online upgrade, you must perform the pre-upgrade procedures
described in this section on a node-to-node basis. Refer to the Preparing and Setting
Up the System 800xA 6.1 (Online Upgrade) section to know the node order to be
followed.
If performing an offline upgrade, save the data obtained during the pre-upgrade
procedures in node-specific folders.

2.3.2 Preparing and Setting Up the System 800xA 6.1 (Online Upgrade)
This section details the node order and the corresponding steps for each node that needs
to be followed during an online upgrade procedure.
The nodes must be upgraded in the following order for online upgrade of System 800xA:
• Domain Controllers.
• One redundant Aspect Server.

2PAA111694-610 A 30
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

• 800xA for AC 870P/Melody Configuration Server.


• One redundant Connectivity Server for each redundant Connectivity Server
configuration.
• Third Aspect Server (if 2oo3 redundancy).
• Some clients.
• IM Server.
• All other Application Servers (Batch, Asset Optimization, PC, Network and Software
Monitoring, and so on.).
• All other nodes except Primary Aspect Server.
• Primary Aspect Server.
The client and server level is upgraded and the plant is fully operable, although the
controllers are not upgraded. The controller level is upgraded as follows:
• Some redundant Controller pairs (and CEX units if needed).
• Remaining redundant Controller pairs (if desired).
• Nonredundant controllers (no CEX units). Upgrading nonredundant controllers will
require minimal plant downtime.

This instruction does not contain procedures for upgrading the AC 800M controller
level. Refer to Appendix D for a general description.

Perform the online upgrade procedures on 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony
systems as given in Appendix E.

For History Server High Availability Installation, first install Primary History Server.
Perform the Online Copy in the Primary History Server and then Install the Secondary
History Server.
Do not deploy both Primary and Secondary History Server together. If deployed,
Secondary server installation will fail.
Figure 2.2 shows a high level workflow of Online Upgrade.

2PAA111694-610 A 31
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

Figure 2.2: High level Workflow for Online Upgrade

Domain Controller Migration


This step can be skipped if 800xA system is in a workgroup environment.

2PAA111694-610 A 32
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

Domain Controllers must be upgraded as the first step while upgrading the 800xA System
online. Refer to Appendix A for the steps to upgrade the Domain Controllers.
In case the Aspect server is combined with a Domain Controller, only the redundant
Domain Controller should be upgraded first. The primary Aspect / Domain Controller
will be upgraded as the last step in the Online Upgrade Flow.
If you want to use IPSec functionality to secure 800xA system, it must be configured
for a migrated Domain Controller after upgrading to the 800xA 6.1 version. For
information on configuring the IPSec settings, refer to System 800xA Post Installation
(2PAA111693*).
If you want to view all exemptions using the new ABB 800xA IPSec Configuration
Tool in 800xA 6.1, then follow the procedure mentioned in the section Configure
IPSec .

Configuring IPSec for Online Upgrade

Changing IPSec policies in an online running system is not recommended as this


severely impacts the proper running of the system.

Perform the following steps incase performing online upgrade on 800xA System that
has IPSec and Batch Management.
1. Open Group Policy Management.
2. Browse to Group Policy object 800xA-IPSecPolicy-v1 under the following path:
Group Policy Management > Forest: Domain Name > Domains > Domain Name
> Group Policy Objects > 800xA-IPSecPolicy-v1
3. Right-click the policy and edit it.

2PAA111694-610 A 33
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

4. Browse to Computer Configuration > Policies > Windows Settings > Security
Settings > Windows Firewall with Advanced Security > Windows Firewall with
Advanced Security - LDAP://... > Connection Security Rules.

Figure 2.3: Connection Security Rules

5. Right-click on Connection Security Rules and then click New Rule to open New
Connection Security Rule Wizard.

2PAA111694-610 A 34
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

6. Select option: Custom in Rule Type page and then click Next.

Figure 2.4: New Connection Security Rule Wizard- Custom

7. In the Endpoints page click Next with default settings.


8. In the Requirements page, select option: Do Not Authenticate and click Next.
9. In the Protocols and Ports page make the following changes:
• Select Protocol Type as UDP
• Select Endpoint 2 port as Specific Ports and enter port number as 40061 and
then click Next.
10. In the Profile page, select all options Domain, Private and Public and click Next.
11. In the Name page, enter Name as Batch Management_Exempt-Batch-1 and then
click Finish.
12. Similarly perform Step-5 to Step-10 for 800xA History TCP port No 443 ,Select
protocol type as TCP and Endpoint 2 port as 443.In the Name page ,Enter Name
as 800xA History_Exempt-2 and then Click Finish

2PAA111694-610 A 35
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

13. If 800xA History Server configuration is High-Availability then perform Step-5 to


Step-10 for 800xA History UDP port No 7890,7980 ,Select protocol type as UDP
and Endpoint 2 port as 7890,7980.In the Name page ,Enter Name as 800xA
History_Exempt-3 and then Click Finish
14. Run command gpupdate /force on all 800xA 6.0 nodes in the system.

Redundant Aspect Server


The following is the procedure for upgrading redundant Aspect Servers.
1. Stop the redundant Aspect Server from the 800xA 5.1 System using the Stop Server
feature in the Configuration Wizard. This server can be a stand-alone Aspect Server
or it can be combined with a redundant Connectivity Server.
2. Remove the redundant Aspect Server from the 800xA 5.1 System using the Remove
Server feature in the Configuration Wizard. If working in a domain this server needs
to be removed from the Domain Controller. When this server is upgraded it will
become the Primary Aspect Server in the 800xA 6.1 System.

The other redundant Aspect Server, if running 2oo3 redundancy, will be removed
from the 800xA 5.1 System later.

3. Reformat the hard drive.


4. Install the new operating system defined for the 800xA 6.1 System.
5. Refer to System 800xA Installation, Update, and Upgrade Getting Started
(2PAA111708*) and perform all procedures relating to operating system settings,
Windows service packs, miscellaneous Windows components installation, other
third party software, group policy, 800xA Service User privileges, and Windows
updates and hot fixes.
6. Launch the Node Preparation Tool (NPT) by starting the Setup.exe from the root
level of the installation media to prepare the node.
The NPT copies the installation files to the local drive on the computer and installs
the 800xA Base Software. Thus preparing the node for deployment of an 800xA
System.
7. Launch System Configuration Console tool as the 800xA Installer User from ABB
Start Menu > ABB System 800xA > System.
8. Go to Create System task to create a System on the Primary Aspect Server node
and making the node ready for System deploy.

2PAA111694-610 A 36
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

9. Go to Configure System task in SCC, plan the 800xA 6.1 System identical to 800xA
5.1 system. Refer to System 800xA Installation, Update, and Upgrade Getting Started
(2PAA111708*) on how to plan the system.
To identify System functions and node functions, refer to Appendix G.
During planning 800xA 6.1 system, few node functions require service group name
and service provider name to be entered. For standard nomenclature of service group
names and service provider names, refer to Appendix F.
During Online Upgrade, the Primary Aspect Server of 800xA 5.1 system becomes
the Secondary Aspect Server of 800xA 6.1 system and vice versa.
Hence all node functions of 800xA 5.1 Primary Aspect Server are now to be planned
on 800xA 6.1 Secondary Aspect Server and vice versa, while planning the system
using SCC tool.
For Batch Redundancy, a server node in the system needs to be configured and
designated as the Batch Witness Server. Refer to System 800xA Batch Management
Configuration (3BUA000146*) for more information.
For Advant Master Connectivity Server node function, it is mandatory to configure
Network Group Number, Network 1, Network 2, and Node Number. These numbers
are documented in the Pre-Upgrade Procedures .

2PAA111694-610 A 37
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

10. In System Configuration Console, under System Setup > Configure System >
System nodes, exclude all other nodes apart from Primary Aspect Server node
using Node actions... > Exclusion... option.

Figure 2.5: System Configuration Console - Exclusion

2PAA111694-610 A 38
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

11. After excluding all the nodes except primary Aspect server, click Deploy system....

Figure 2.6: System Configuration Console - Deploy System

2PAA111694-610 A 39
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

12. Export and save the System Configuration and System Configuration State aspects
from: Admin Structure > Administrative Objects > Domains > <System
Name>,Domain

Figure 2.7: System Configuration and System Configuration State Aspect

Do not open SCC after export and before import of System Configuration and System
Configuration State aspects.

13. Load the System 800xA licenses required for the 800xA 6.1 System. Refer to System
800xA Licensing Information (2PAA111691*) for more information.

2PAA111694-610 A 40
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

14. Delete the newly created 800xA system (in Step 8.).

Stop the system before deleting.

a. Go to the Configuration Wizard and select System Administration, and click


Next.
b. Mark the system you want to delete. Click Next.
c. Select Systems and click Next.
d. Select Delete, click Next.
e. Select system and click Next.
f. Click Finish in the Apply Settings dialog box.
g. Wait a few minutes, and when the Configuration Wizard appears again with the
System dialog box the deletion of the system is completed.
h. Click Exit.
15. Reboot the node.
16. Install the 800xA 6.1 compatible custom libraries and extensions on the Primary
Aspect Server Node.

2PAA111694-610 A 41
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

17. Restore the 800xA 5.1 System backup on the Primary Aspect Server.
The User Account that is used for 800xA System restore using the Configuration
Wizard must be a member of the following groups:
• IndustrialITUser
• IndustrialITAdmin
• Local Administrators
The backup/restore utility supports the restoring of 800xA System information. The
following steps outline the 800xA System restore procedure.

Refer to System 800xA Maintenance (3BSE046784*) for more information on restoring


the system.

To start the restore procedure:


a. Open the Configuration Wizard.
b. In the Select Type of Configuration dialog box, select Restore System, and
then click Next.
c. When a dialog box appears with the Generate new system id check box
available, select the check box. This is necessary because there will be two
systems in one network during an online upgrade.
d. Enter a system name and click Next.
e. Rename the first Aspect Server to the last Aspect Server (this is now going to
be the Primary Aspect Server) in the Node Configuration dialog box under the
Primary nodes frame.
If the Aspect Server is combined with any other 800xA Server, naming of user
configured Service Group(s) and Service Provider(s) needs to be handled manually
after upgrade.
f. Rename the last Aspect Server to the first Aspect Server in the Primary nodes
frame and click Next.
Verify and review the message with missing System extensions. Ignore the missing
VB Graphics Extensions. However, it is important to verify and review all other missing
system extensions.

2PAA111694-610 A 42
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

18. Check for messages in the log file (select the View Log check box in the
Configuration Wizard). Refer to Errors and Warnings during Upgrade to resolve any
received warning or error messages.

Restart the node when advised during the restore procedure.

Do not start the Configure System task yet. If it is started and no system configuration
aspects are present, empty ones will be created. If this happens, delete those aspects
(System Configuration and System Configuration State) and continue to the next
step.
19. Check the CPU load in the node. The System Message service may generate a
high load (>90%). If this continues for longer than approximately 10 minutes, restart
the service.

If a message appears stating that a full deploy of the Generic Control Network is
needed, click OK.

20. Import the System Configuration and System Configuration State aspects from Step
12.
The aspects are to be imported to the below path:
Admin Structure > Administrative Objects > Domains > System Name,Domain
21. It's important to ensure that the Service Group names and Service Provider names
match either the default names for System 800xA 6.1 or the configured names for
node functions with Server Groups and Providers configured in Step 11. It is
mandatory to rename the Service Group and Provider names on the Primary Aspect
Server as per the default format before we proceed.
For more information about the correct names for service groups and providers,
refer to Appendix F.
If the Service Group names and Service Provider names do not match in the
deployment created by the system installer and imported in Step 20., Deploy can fail
or hang or duplicate Service Groups and Providers may be created after upgrade. In
this case the duplicate Service Groups and Providers needs to be cleaned up from
800xA 6.1 system looking at 800xA 5.1 reference System.
22. Refer to Compare the Number of Aspects and Objects and record the number of
aspects and objects in the system. Compare these values to those recorded when
the system was backed up.

2PAA111694-610 A 43
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

23. Verify the affinity settings to ensure best system performance. Refer to System
800xA Post Installation (2PAA111693*) for more information on how to configure
affinity.
24. Refer to Consistency Check and perform the necessary consistency checks.

800xA for AC 870P/Melody Servers


While performing an online upgrade, ensure that the upgrade of the Melody
Connectivity Server and the Melody Configuration Server is performed on the same
calendar day. The reason being:
A subscription (date stamp) is added to the upgraded Configuration Server by the
running Connectivity Server. If the upgrade of the servers are not performed on the
same calendar day, there would be a mismatch in this subscription, thus not allowing
the upgraded Connectivity Server to start after the system upgrade.

Redundant Connectivity Servers


The following are the procedures for upgrading redundant Connectivity Servers.
1. Perform node specific Pre-Upgrade Procedures depending on the node functions
assigned on the node.
2. Stop a redundant Connectivity Server from the 800xA 5.1 System using the Stop
Server feature in the Configuration Wizard.
3. Remove the redundant Connectivity Server from the 800xA 5.1 System using the
Remove Server feature in the Configuration Wizard. If working in a domain this
server needs to be removed from the Domain Controller.
4. Reformat the hard drive.
5. Install the new operating system defined for the 800xA 6.1 System.
6. Refer System 800xA Installation, Update, and Upgrade Getting Started
(2PAA111708*) and perform all procedures relating to operating system settings,
Windows service packs, miscellaneous Windows components installation, other
third party software, group policy, 800xA Service User privileges, and Windows
updates and hot fixes.
7. Launch the Node Preparation Tool (NPT) by starting the Setup.exe from the root
level of the installation media to prepare the node.
The NPT copies the installation files to the local drive on the computer and installs
the 800xA Base Software. Thus preparing the node for deployment of an 800xA
System.

2PAA111694-610 A 44
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

8. Install the 800xA 6.1 compatible custom libraries and extensions on this Node.
This information is applicable only if system has ABB 800xA for AC 100.
If you have made a copy of the Bus Configuration Database (BCD) folder in the
pre-upgrade procedure, copy the saved BCD file folder to the planned AC 100
Connectivity Server node on 800xA 6.1 system before proceeding to next step.
9. Deploy this redundant Connectivity Server node from 800xA 6.1 Primary Aspect
Server using Deploy system option of SCC tool. Before deploying, this node is to
be removed from Exclusion.
a. Open System Configuration Console Tool.
b. Navigate to System Setup > Configure System > System Nodes.
c. Select the node to be deployed and enable for deployment using Node actions...
> Exclusion... > Include in deployment option.
d. Select the node and click Deploy system... to deploy this node.
Deploying a node involves deploying of allocated node specific functions on
that node and connect node to the Primary Aspect Server.
10. Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedures and perform the applicable post-upgrade
procedures for the upgraded server.
11. Repeat this procedure for every redundant Connectivity Server.

Upgrade the servers one-by-one in order to keep redundancy of the system as long
as possible.

Operation and monitoring of the plant are only possible from clients in the 800xA 5.1
System at this point in the upgrade process.

Redundant Aspect Server (2oo3 Redundancy Only)

Perform this procedure only if the Aspect Servers in the 800xA System have 2oo3
redundancy.

2PAA111694-610 A 45
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

The following are the procedures for upgrading redundant Aspect Server (2oo3
redundancy only).
1. Stop the other redundant Aspect Server (if 2oo3 redundant) from the 800xA 5.1
System using the Stop Server feature in the Configuration Wizard.
2. Remove the other redundant Aspect Server from the 800xA 5.1 System using the
Remove Server feature in the Configuration Wizard. If working in a domain this
server needs to be removed from the Domain Controller.
3. Reformat the hard drive.
4. Install the new operating system defined for the 800xA 6.1 System.
5. Refer to System 800xA Installation, Update, and Upgrade Getting Started
(2PAA111708*) and perform all procedures relating to operating system settings,
Windows service packs, miscellaneous Windows components installation, other
third party software, group policy, 800xA Service User privileges, and Windows
updates and hot fixes.
6. Launch the Node Preparation Tool (NPT) by starting the Setup.exe from the root
level of the installation media to prepare the node.
The NPT copies the installation files to the local drive on the computer and installs
the 800xA Base Software. Thus preparing the node for deployment of an 800xA
System.
7. Install the 800xA 6.1 compatible custom libraries and extensions on this Node.
8. Deploy this redundant Aspect Server node from 800xA 6.1 Primary Aspect Server
using Deploy system option of SCC tool. Before deploying, this node is to be
removed from Exclusion.
a. Open System Configuration Console Tool.
b. Navigate to System Setup > Configure System > System Nodes.
c. Select the node to be deployed and enable for deployment using Node actions...
> Exclusion... > Include in deployment option.
d. Select the node and click Deploy system... to deploy this node.
9. Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedures and perform the applicable post-upgrade
procedures for the upgraded server.

Operation and monitoring of the plant are only possible from clients in the 800xA 5.1
System at this point in the upgrade process.

2PAA111694-610 A 46
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

Clients
The following are the procedure to upgrade 800xA clients.
1. Remove some clients from the 800xA 5.1 System using the Remove Client feature
in the Configuration Wizard. If working in a domain the clients need to be removed
from the Domain Controller.
Do not remove all of the clients from the 800xA 5.1 System at this point. Keeping
some clients in the 800xA 5.1 System will allow the operators to continue to observe
and control the process.

The procedure for the client nodes can be performed one-by-one or in a group.

2. Reformat the hard drive on each client.


3. Install the new operating system defined for the 800xA 6.1 System.
4. Refer to System 800xA Installation, Update, and Upgrade Getting Started
(2PAA111708*) and perform all procedures relating to operating system settings,
Windows service packs, miscellaneous Windows components installation, other
third party software, group policy, 800xA Service User privileges, and Windows
updates and hot fixes.
5. Launch the Node Preparation Tool (NPT) by starting the Setup.exe from the root
level of the installation media to prepare the node.
The NPT copies the installation files to the local drive on the computer and installs
the 800xA Base Software. Thus preparing the node for deployment of an 800xA
System.
6. Install the 800xA 6.1 compatible custom libraries and extensions on this Node.
7. Deploy the Client(s) from 800xA 6.1 Primary Aspect Server using Deploy system
option of SCC tool. Before deploying, this node is to be removed from Exclusion.
a. Open System Configuration Console Tool.
b. Navigate to System Setup > Configure System > System nodes.
c. Select the node to be deployed and enable for deployment using Node actions...
> Exclusion... > Include in deployment option.
d. Select the node and click Deploy system... to deploy this node.

Operation and monitoring of the plant is only possible from clients in the 800xA 5.1
System at this point in the upgrade process.

2PAA111694-610 A 47
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

Information Management Server


The following are the procedure to upgrade the Information Management Server.
1. Check that history and event data storage is available in the Connectivity Servers
to overlap, with margin, the time it takes to upgrade the IM Server. This includes
time to:
• Reformat the hard drive.
• Load all required software.
• Connect the IM Server to the 800xA 6.1 System.
• Reboot the IM Server.
• Collect data from the Connectivity Servers from the time when the IM Server
was removed from the 800xA 5.1 System.
2. Perform the Information Management pre-upgrade procedures. Refer to Information
Management.
3. Stop the IM Server from the 800xA 5.1 System using the Stop Server feature in
the Configuration Wizard.
4. Remove the IM Server from the 800xA 5.1 System using the Remove Server
feature in the Configuration Wizard. If working in a domain this server needs to be
removed from the Domain Controller.
5. Reformat the hard drive.
6. Install the new operating system defined for the 800xA 6.1 System.
7. Refer to System 800xA Installation, Update, and Upgrade Getting Started
(2PAA111708*) and perform all procedures relating to operating system settings,
Windows service packs, miscellaneous Windows components installation, other
third party software, group policy, 800xA Service User privileges, and Windows
updates and hot fixes.
8. Launch the Node Preparation Tool (NPT) by starting the Setup.exe from the root
level of the installation media to prepare the node.
The NPT copies the installation files to the local drive on the computer and installs
the 800xA Base Software. Thus preparing the node for deployment of an 800xA
System.
The Installation Type options are to be selected while running NPT, based on the
node functions selected on that node.
Information Manager - IM (Oracle) needs to be selected while running NPT on an
Information Management Server.

2PAA111694-610 A 48
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

9. Install the 800xA 6.1 compatible custom libraries and extensions on this Node.
10. Deploy this Information Management Server node from 800xA 6.1 Primary Aspect
Server using Deploy system option of SCC tool. Before deploying, this node is to
be removed from Exclusion.
a. Open System Configuration Console Tool.
b. Navigate to System Setup > Configure System > System nodes.
c. Select the node to be deployed and enable for deployment using Node actions...
> Exclusion... > Include in deployment option.
d. Select the node and click Deploy system... to deploy this node.
11. Verify that the ABB Process Administration Service (PAS) is set to manual in the
Services Control Panel (run Services.msc from the Run dialog box). Stop the service
if it is running.
12. Refer to Information Management and perform the applicable post-upgrade
procedures for the upgraded server.

Operation and monitoring of the plant are only possible from clients in the 800xA 5.1
System at this point in the upgrade process.

Application Servers

Perform the procedures for the Application Servers (Batch Management, Asset
Optimization, PC, Network and Software Monitoring, etc.) one at a time.

When upgrading redundant Batch Management Servers, the Primary Batch Server
must be upgraded first, followed by the Secondary Batch Server. Do not upgrade the
Secondary Batch Server followed by the Primary Batch Server.
For Batch Redundancy, a server node in the system needs to be configured and
designated as the Batch Witness Server. Refer to System 800xA Batch Management
Configuration (3BUA000146*) for more information.
The following are the procedure to upgrade the Application Servers.
1. Perform node specific Pre-Upgrade Procedures depending on the node type.
2. Stop an Application Server from the 800xA 5.1 System using the Stop Server feature
in the Configuration Wizard.
3. Remove the Application Server from the 800xA 5.1 System using the Remove
Server feature in the Configuration Wizard. If working in a domain this server needs
to be removed from the Domain Controller.

2PAA111694-610 A 49
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

4. Reformat the hard drive.


5. Install the new operating system defined for the 800xA 6.1 System.
6. Refer to System 800xA Installation, Update, and Upgrade Getting Started
(2PAA111708*) and perform all procedures relating to operating system settings,
Windows service packs, miscellaneous Windows components installation, other
third party software, group policy, 800xA Service User privileges, and Windows
updates and hot fixes.
7. Launch the Node Preparation Tool (NPT) by starting the Setup.exe from the root
level of the installation media to prepare the node.
The NPT copies the installation files to the local drive on the computer and installs
the 800xA Base Software. Thus preparing the node for deployment of an 800xA
System.
The Installation Type options are to be selected while running NPT, based on the
node functions selected on that node.

Figure 2.8: Installation Type

8. Install the 800xA 6.1 compatible custom libraries and extensions on this Node.

2PAA111694-610 A 50
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

9. Deploy the Application Server node from 800xA 6.1 Primary Aspect Server using
Deploy system option of SCC tool. Before deploying, this node is to be removed
from Exclusion.
a. Open System Configuration Console Tool.
b. Navigate to System Setup > Configure System > System nodes.
c. Select the node to be deployed and enable for deployment using Node actions...
> Exclusion... > Include in deployment option.
d. Select the node and click Deploy system... to deploy this node.
10. Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedures and perform the applicable post-upgrade
procedures for the upgraded server.
11. Repeat this procedure for every Application Server.
The 800xA System is now running in nonredundant mode in both the 800xA 5.1 and
the 800xA 6.1 systems. Operation and monitoring of the plant are possible from clients
in both systems at this point in the upgrade process.
12. Operators should move to the 800xA 6.1 System to operate and control the plant
at this point in the upgrade process.

Remaining Nodes
Remove the remaining nodes in the 800xA 5.1 System and follow the above procedures
based on node type, except for the Primary Aspect Server.

Operation and monitoring of the plant are only possible from clients in the 800xA 6.1
System at this point in the upgrade process.

Primary Aspect Server

Before proceeding with this step, make sure that all other nodes in the system are
upgraded to 800xA 6.1.

The following are the procedure to upgrade the Primary Aspect Server.
1. Use the Configuration Wizard to stop the 800xA 5.1 System on the Primary Aspect
Server.
2. Use the Configuration Wizard to delete the system from the 800xA 5.1 Primary
Aspect Server.
3. Reformat the hard drive.

2PAA111694-610 A 51
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.3 Online Upgrade Flow

4. Install the new operating system defined for the 800xA 6.1 System.
5. Refer to System 800xA Installation, Update, and Upgrade Getting Started
(2PAA111708*) and perform all procedures relating to operating system settings,
Windows service packs, miscellaneous Windows components installation, other
third party software, group policy, 800xA Service User privileges, and Windows
updates and hot fixes.
6. Launch the Node Preparation Tool (NPT) by starting the Setup.exe from the root
level of the installation media to prepare the node.
The NPT copies the installation files to the local drive on the computer and installs
the 800xA Base Software. Thus preparing the node for deployment of an 800xA
System.
7. Install the 800xA 6.1 compatible custom libraries and extensions on this Node.
8. Verify the Aspect Directory Services in 800xA 6.1 System to ensure that Aspect
Servers are in correct order.
a. Open the Plant Explorer Workplace on the Primary Aspect Server node of 800xA
6.1 system.
b. Navigate to Service Structure > Services >AspectDirectory >
AspectDirectory, Service Group.
c. In the Service Group Definition aspect, click the Configuration tab.
d. Verify if the 800xA 6.1 Primary Aspect Server node deployed is first in the list
followed by other Aspect Servers. If necessary, correct the order.

Figure 2.9: Order of Aspect Directory Services

2PAA111694-610 A 52
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.4 Offline Upgrade Flow

9. Deploy this node from 800xA 6.1 Primary Aspect Server using Deploy system
option of SCC tool. Before deploying, this node is to be removed from Exclusion.
a. Open System Configuration Console Tool.
b. Navigate to System Setup > Configure System > System nodes.
c. Select the node to be deployed and enable for deployment using Node actions...
> Exclusion... > Include in deployment option.
d. Select the node and click Deploy system... to deploy this node.
10. Perform the 800xA full backup from the Maintenance Structure (Aspect Directory
backup type) and ensure that there are no new errors and warnings.

800xA History - Online upgrade from System 800xA 5.1 to 6.1


Refer to the Appendix 800xA History Update / Upgrade Workflow in System 800xA
History Installation (2PAA107280*) manual for detail procedure on how to replace a node
with 800xA History functions.

PC, Network and Software Monitoring Device Library

Installation of PNSM Device Library Object Types. ABB equipment device libraries
are now possible to be installed using System Installer. If PNSM Device libraries are
used, add the System Function ABB Branded Equipment during system planning.
Refer to PC Network and Software Monitoring Configuration (3BUA000447*) manual for
detail procedure on how to Install PNSM Device Library Object Types in the 800xA
system.

2.4 Offline Upgrade Flow


This section provides detailed information and procedures for doing an Offline Upgrade
of an 800xA System. Refer to Online Upgrade for additional information and ideas on
how to streamline the upgrade process.
The topic is organized so that the instructions are presented in the proper upgrade
order. Do not skip any steps that pertain to 800xA software being used in the current
or upgraded system.
It is important to create backups of node hard disks (using a third party backup/restore
and/or disk imaging utility) and the 800xA System before starting the upgrade
procedures. Valid backups ensure that the system can be restored if necessary.

2PAA111694-610 A 53
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.4 Offline Upgrade Flow

Offline Upgrade workflow is divided into following sections:


• Preparing the System 800xA 5.1: The procedures cover system wide and node
specific steps that need to be done on a 800xA 5.1 System before doing an upgrade.
• Preparing the 800xA 6.1 System (Offline Upgrade): The procedures cover the
workflow to be followed for preparing 800xA 6.1 system during an Offline Upgrade.
• Setting Up the 800xA 6.1 System: The procedures cover the workflow to setup the
800xA 6.1 System including offline upgrade.

2.4.1 Preparing the System 800xA 5.1


Perform the following to prepare 800xA 5.1 System for an upgrade:
1. Document all Windows settings including the domain, DNS, policies, users, and so
on.
2. Collect the information about the System Functions, Node Functions and their
configurations from existing System 800xA 5.1. This information can be obtained
from existing plant documentation.
The information about existing 800xA 5.1 System can be used while planning a
similar 800xA 6.1 System.
Diagnostics Collection Tool can also provide some information about existing
800xA 5.1 System. For more details, refer to Appendix G.

2PAA111694-610 A 54
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.4 Offline Upgrade Flow

3. Migrate all the existing Visual Basic Process Graphics (VBPG) aspects to the
corresponding Process Graphics aspects. Refer to System 800xA Engineering
Process Graphics Migration Tool (3BSE049231*) available in ABB Library and
myABB/My Control System portal.
Visual Basic Process Graphics (VBPG) is not supported in System 800xA beginning
System 800xA 6.0. It is mandatory to migrate all VBPG to PG2 graphics before
performing upgrade.
The System 800xA VBPG Search Tool is used to find VBPG aspects in 800xA system
that need to be migrated prior to a system upgrade. The tool can also identify PG2
aspects that have references to VBPG aspects. For more information on the tool,
refer to System 800xA VBPG migration and System 800xA VBPG Search Tool
(3BSE081093).
All VBPG aspects Main View in System 800xA 6.1 and later will show a message:
This aspect is not supported and will not be available for operator actions.
Symbol Factory Controls are no longer installed with the standard ABB 800xA
installation. A separate installation (ABB 800xA Symbol Factory) is needed to use
the Symbol Factory Controls. The ABB 800xA Symbol Factory installation package
is available on the media. A separate license is required to use the 800xA Symbol
Factory Controls.
4. The 800xA System and software require preparatory procedures before performing
the upgrade. These pre-upgrade procedures are dependent on the products installed
in existing 800xA System. Perform the applicable procedures in the order presented
in Pre-Upgrade Procedures section before proceeding.
After taking the maintenance backup, retain the Aspect Directory node with the
800xA 5.1 System.
It is highly recommended to retain the Aspect Directory node after taking the
maintenance backup on the 800xA 5.1 System. This will not only act as a reference
node post-upgrade, but will also ensure that the changes made to the aspects created
by the System Extensions can be reapplied in the new system, if lost during an
upgrade.
Refer to Reconfigure Aspects Created By System Extensions in Post-Upgrade
Procedures for information on evaluating and reapplying the changes to the System
Extension aspects.

2.4.2 Preparing the 800xA 6.1 System (Offline Upgrade)


Figure 2.10 shows a high level flow of the preparing and configuring 800xA 6.1 system
during Offline Upgrade.

2PAA111694-610 A 55
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.4 Offline Upgrade Flow

Figure 2.10: Preparing and Configuring 800xA 6.1 System - Offline Upgrade

2PAA111694-610 A 56
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.4 Offline Upgrade Flow

Prepare the following to prepare an 800xA 6.1 System for an upgrade:


1. Order the System 800xA licenses required for the 800xA 6.1 System. Refer to
System 800xA Licensing Information (2PAA111691*) for more information.
2. Order new hardware and third-party software required for the 800xA 6.1 System.
Refer to System 800xA Installation, Update and Upgrade Getting Started
(2PAA111708*) for more information.
If you have chosen to upgrade the 800xA System online, then proceed to perform all
the specific steps for an online upgrade described in the Online Upgrade Flow section.
Do not perform the remaining steps in this section.
3. Migrate the redundant Domain Controllers. Refer to the Migrate Redundant Domain
Controllers Appendix for more information.
If it is a workgroup system, ignore this step.
4. Reformat the hard drives of all 800xA System nodes or use the new hardware for
the 800xA 6.1 System.
5. Install the new operating system defined for the 800xA 6.1 System.
6. Refer to System 800xA Installation, Update and Upgrade Getting Started
(2PAA111708*) and perform all procedures relating to operating system settings,
Windows service packs, miscellaneous Windows components installation, other
third party software, group policy, 800xA Service User privileges, and Windows
updates and hot fixes.

2PAA111694-610 A 57
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.4 Offline Upgrade Flow

7. Run the Node Preparation Tool on all 800xA nodes.


Launch the Node Preparation Tool (NPT) by starting the Setup.exe from the root
level of the installation media to prepare the node.
The NPT copies the installation files to the local drive on the computer and various
base 800xA software that are mandatory on all nodes for preparing them for
deployment.
The Installation Type options are to be selected while running NPT, based on the
node functions selected on that node.

Figure 2.11: Installation Type

The User Account that is used for 800xA System installation must be a member of
the following groups:
• IndustrialITUser
• IndustrialITAdmin
• Local Administrators
8. Refer to Configure IPSec if the IPsec is configured in the 800xA 5.1 System.

2PAA111694-610 A 58
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.4 Offline Upgrade Flow

For History Server High Availability Installation, first install Primary History Server.
Perform the Online Copy in the Primary History Server and then Install the Secondary
History Server.
Do not deploy both Primary and Secondary History Server together. If deployed,
Secondary server installation will fail.

2.4.3 Setting Up the 800xA 6.1 System


Perform the following on the node designated to be Primary Aspect Server of the upgraded
800xA 6.1 system:
1. Launch System Configuration Console tool as the 800xA Installing User from ABB
Start Menu > ABB System 800xA > System.
2. Go to Create System task to create a System on the Primary Aspect Server node
and making the node ready for System deploy.
3. Go to Configure System task in SCC, plan the 800xA 6.1 System identical to 800xA
5.1 system. Refer to System 800xA Installation, Update, and Upgrade Getting Started
(2PAA111708*) on how to plan the system.
During planning 800xA 6.1 system, few node functions require service group name
and service provider name to be entered. For standard nomenclature of service group
names and service provider names, refer to Appendix F.
For Batch Redundancy, a server node in the system needs to be configured and
designated as the Batch Witness Server. Refer to System 800xA Batch Management
Configuration (3BUA000146*) for more information.
For Advant Master Connectivity Server node function, it is mandatory to configure
Network Group Number, Network 1, Network 2, and Node Number. These numbers
are documented in the Pre-Upgrade Procedures.

2PAA111694-610 A 59
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.4 Offline Upgrade Flow

4. In the System Configuration Console Tool, under System Setup > Configure
System > System nodes, exclude all other nodes apart from Primary Aspect Server
node using Node actions... > Exclude/Include... option.

Figure 2.12: System Configuration Console - Exclude

A popup appears to Exclude the node.

Figure 2.13: System Configuration Console - Popup to Exclude

2PAA111694-610 A 60
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.4 Offline Upgrade Flow

5. After excluding all the nodes except primary Aspect server, click Deploy system....

Figure 2.14: System Configuration Console - Deploy System

6. Load the System 800xA licenses required for the 800xA 6.1 System. Refer to System
800xA Licensing Information (2PAA111691*) for more information.

2PAA111694-610 A 61
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.4 Offline Upgrade Flow

7. Export and save the System Configuration and System Configuration State aspects
from: Admin Structure > Administrative Objects > Domains > System
Name,Domain

Figure 2.15: System Configuration and System Configuration State Aspect

Do not open SCC after export and before import of System Configuration and System
Configuration State aspects.

2PAA111694-610 A 62
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.4 Offline Upgrade Flow

8. Delete the newly created 800xA system (in Step 2.).


a. Go to the Configuration Wizard and select System Administration, and click
Next.
b. Mark the system you want to delete, and Click Next.
c. Select Systems, and click Next.
d. Select Stop, click Next, and click Finish.
e. Wait till the system is stopped, and configuration wizard appears again.
f. In the configuration wizard select System Administration, and click Next
g. Mark the system you want to delete, and Click Next.
h. Select Systems, and click Next
i. Select Delete, and click Next
j. Select the node to delete the system from, and click Next.
k. Click Finish in the Apply Settings dialog box.
l. Wait a few minutes, and when the Configuration Wizard appears again with the
System dialog box the deletion of the system is completed.
m. Click Exit.
9. Install compatible custom libraries and extensions on Primary Aspect Server.

2PAA111694-610 A 63
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.4 Offline Upgrade Flow

10. Restore the 800xA 5.1 System backup on the Primary Aspect Server.
The User Account that is used for 800xA System restore using the Configuration
Wizard must be a member of the following groups:
• IndustrialITUser
• IndustrialITAdmin
• Local Administrators
The backup/restore utility supports the restoring of 800xA System information. The
following steps outline the 800xA System restore procedure.

Refer to System 800xA Maintenance (3BSE046784*) for more information on restoring


the system.

To start the restore procedure:


a. Open the Configuration wizard.
b. In the Select Type of Configuration dialog box, Select Restore System and
click Next.
c. In the Restore Selection dialog box, navigate to the path of 800xA 5.1 System
Backup and click Next.
d. In the System Directories Selection dialog box, accept the default selections
and click the Next.
e. In the Node Configuration dialog box, check node name in the backup, original
node name and click Next.
Verify and review the message with missing System extensions. Ignore the missing
VB Graphics Extensions. However, it is important to verify and review all other missing
system extensions.

ABB Structured Data Logger (SDL) is no longer supported in System 800xA 6.1.
Ignore the message about missing system extension during restore and proceed.

f. In the Apply Settings dialog box, check summary info of selection and click
Finish.

2PAA111694-610 A 64
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.4 Offline Upgrade Flow

11. Check for messages in the log file (select the View Log check box in the
Configuration Wizard). Refer to Errors and Warnings during Upgrade to resolve any
received warning or error messages.

Restart the node when advised during the restore procedure.

Do not start the Configure System task yet. If it is started and no system configuration
aspects are present, empty ones will be created. If this happens, delete those aspects
(System Configuration and System Configuration State)and continue to the next step.
12. Import the System Configuration and System Configuration State aspects from Step
7..
The aspects are to be imported to the below path:
Admin Structure > Administrative Objects > Domains > System Name,Domain
13. To make the future updates and upgrades easier, the Service Group names and
Service Provider names must match either the default mandatory service names
for 800xA Base 6.1 or the configured names for node functions with Server Groups
and Providers configured in Step 5.. It is mandatory to rename the Service Group
and Provider names on the Primary Aspect Server before proceeding.
For more information about the correct names for service groups and providers,
refer to Appendix F.
If the Service Group names and Service Provider names do not match in the
configuration created by the system installer and imported in Step 12., Deploy can
fail or hang or duplicate Service Groups and Providers may be created after upgrade.
In this case the duplicate Service Groups and Providers needs to be cleaned up from
800xA 6.1 system looking at 800xA 5.1 reference System.
14. Refer to Compare the Number of Aspects and Objects and record the number of
aspects and objects in the system. Compare these values to those recorded when
the system was backed up.
15. Verify the affinity settings to ensure best system performance. Refer to System
800xA Post Installation (2PAA111693*) for more information on how to configure
affinity.

2PAA111694-610 A 65
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.4 Offline Upgrade Flow

16. Verify the Aspect Directory Services to ensure that Aspect Servers are in correct
order.
a. Open the Plant Explorer Workplace.
b. Navigate to Service Structure > Services >AspectDirectory >
AspectDirectory, Service Group.
c. In the Service Group Definition aspect, click the Configuration tab.
d. Verify if the Primary Aspect Server node deployed is first in the list followed by
other Aspect Servers. If necessary, correct the order.

Figure 2.16: Order of Aspect Directory Services

17. Install compatible custom libraries and extensions on all remaining 800xA Nodes,
as performed on Primary Aspect Server

2PAA111694-610 A 66
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.4 Offline Upgrade Flow

18. In the System Configuration Console Tool, under System Setup > Configure
System > System nodes, select the node to be deployed and enable for deployment
using Node actions... > Exclude/Include in deployment option.

Figure 2.17: System Configuration Console - Include

A popup appears to Include the node.

Figure 2.18: System Configuration Console - Popup to Include

2PAA111694-610 A 67
2 Considerations and Upgrade Flow
2.4 Offline Upgrade Flow

Do not remove any node before the system is deployed.


If a node is removed you must manually remove the corresponding node object in
Node Administration Structure > Node Administration > All Nodes> Node to be
removed
19. Perform this action to include all remaining nodes.
This information is applicable only if system has ABB 800xA for AC 100.
If you have made a copy of the Bus Configuration Database (BCD) folder in the
pre-upgrade procedure, copy the saved BCD file folder to the planned AC 100
Connectivity Server node on 800xA 6.1 system before proceeding to next step.
a. From Primary Aspect Server, deploy all the remaining nodes. Refer to System
800xA Installation, Update and Upgrade Getting Started (2PAA111708*), for
more information.
b. Perform post upgrade procedures as mentioned in Post-Upgrade Procedures
on all applicable nodes.
20. Perform the following to install PNSM Device Library object types:
ABB equipment device libraries are now possible to be installed using System
Installer. If PNSM Device libraries are used, add the System Function ABB Branded
Equipment during system planning.
Refer to PC Network and Software Monitoring Configuration (3BUA000447*) manual
for detail procedure on how to Install PNSM Device Library Object Types in the
800xA system.

2PAA111694-610 A 68
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.1 Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps

3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures

The 800xA System and software require preparatory steps before performing the upgrade.
Perform the applicable procedures in the order presented, based on the installed system.
If performing an online upgrade, you must perform the pre-upgrade procedures
described in this section on a node-to-node basis. Refer to the Online Upgrade Flow
section to know the node order to be followed.
If performing an offline upgrade, save the data obtained during the pre-upgrade
procedures in node-specific folders.

3.1 Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps


Perform the following pre-upgrade procedures for all the applicable system/node functions
based on the installed system configuration:
• System-wide Pre-Upgrade Procedures
• Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup
• System 800xA Maintenance Backup
• Pre-upgrade Procedures for Local Data Backup

3.2 System-wide Pre-Upgrade Procedures


• Network including RNRP
• Configure IPSec
• Consistency Check
• Migrating Visual Basic Process Graphics Aspects to Process Graphics Aspects
• Faceplates
• Record the Number of Aspects and Objects

2PAA111694-610 A 69
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.2 System-wide Pre-Upgrade Procedures

3.2.1 Network including RNRP


Document the current RNRP configuration in all nodes. The settings in Windows PCs
are lost at upgrade of the system. Document also the settings on all network cards in all
nodes (IP address, Subnet mask and other non-default settings).
For more information about network in general and RNRP in particular see the manual
System 800xA Network Configuration (3BSE034463*).

3.2.2 Configure IPSec


If you want to view all exemptions using the new ABB 800xA IPSec Configuration
Tool in 800xA 6.1, then follow the procedure as in the IPsec Configured in Source
System .
In version 6.1 the System 800xA IPsec Configuration Tool has updated the policies
to use SHA-256 encryption.
Manual steps are needed to apply the use of this new functionality or the configuration
will continue to use the old encryption.
To update a configuration for a newer version of System 800xA IPsec Configuration
Tool the entire existing configuration needs to be manually removed and a new
configuration needs to be created, i.e. all the exemption must be configured once
more.

IPsec Configured in Source System


If the IPsec is configured in the source system (800xA 5.1) then after the domain controller
is upgraded, perform the following steps on the domain controller before upgrading other
nodes:

Changing IPSec policies during Online upgrade is not recommended as this severely
impacts the proper running of the system.

1. Disable the existing group policy from the domain group policy object.
a. Go to Group Policy Management and choose Group Policy Objects.
b. Right-click the existing group policy.
c. Select GPO Status.
d. Select All Settings disabled.
2. Disable the link of the existing group policy.
a. Right-click the existing group policy and clear the Link Enabled option.

2PAA111694-610 A 70
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.2 System-wide Pre-Upgrade Procedures

3. Delete the existing group policy.


a. Right-click the existing group policy in the Group Policy Objects and click
Delete.
4. Follow the procedure mentioned in System 800xA Post Installation (2PAA111693*)
to configure the rules.

IPsec not Configured in Source System


If IPsec is not configured in the source system then follow the procedure mentioned in
System 800xA Post Installation (2PAA111693*) to configure the rules.

3.2.3 Consistency Check


This topic describes the consistency check performed on the 800xA System.
Perform a consistency check before performing the 800xA System backup. Failing
to do so could result in problems when restoring the system after the upgrade. Any
changes to the aspects and objects must be done before taking the backup.
The following is an overview of the consistency check functionality in the 800xA System.
• Perform consistency checks both before and after the upgrade.
• The consistency check is continuously improved between releases. If a consistency
error is detected after the upgrade, it does not necessarily mean that the error was
introduced by the upgrade process. It might have been there from the beginning,
but went undetected.

2PAA111694-610 A 71
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.2 System-wide Pre-Upgrade Procedures

• Try to correct all consistency errors before the upgrade. This will make the upgrade
process easier. Consistency errors may cause the upgrade to either fail, or continue,
but without having done exactly what was intended. Since it is very difficult to know
where the upgrade handling will do changes, it is desirable to make the system as
consistent as possible before the upgrade. It is also good to keep a system with the
old version running so it is possible to go back and do more corrections in the old
system if problems occur during the upgrade.
– However, the upgrade will often work even though there are some remaining
consistency errors. In some cases it is easiest to correct the errors after the
upgrade (because the repair functionality has been improved in the new release),
so it may be worth an attempt at continuing with the upgrade. It is recommended
to keep a list of the detected consistency errors for future reference.
During the consistency check the following error messages might come from
PROFIBUS Hardware Libraries in system version 5.1 and later:
[Error] Library key must not be used on 'ABB_TFx12_PA 1.2-0:Aspect
Category Definition'. ... : Library Version Definition [Error] Aspect
'ABB_TFx12_PA 1.2- 0:Hardware Library' contains multiple library keys.
... : Library Version Definition [Error] Library key must not be used
on 'ABB_TFx12_PA 1.2-0:Object Type Structure'. ... : Library Version
Definition 3 error(s) reported by 1 aspect(s). 1 aspect(s) can be
repaired

This will have no impact on system upgrade.


• In 800xA 5.1 and later, perform the consistency check with the Consistency Check
tool (started by clicking the question mark icon in top right corner of Plant Explorer
Workplace).

2PAA111694-610 A 72
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.2 System-wide Pre-Upgrade Procedures

• Perform consistency checks on the user-defined libraries in the Object Type


Structure or Library Structure, the Control Project in Control Structure, and the
Functional Structure.
• The general part of the upgrade process consists of importing new versions of
standard libraries, and propagating object type changes to user libraries and user
applications. It is only necessary to correct consistency errors regarding object type,
object type references, and similar configurations for the general part of the upgrade
process to work. Other inconsistencies such as unresolved references should
normally not lead to problems.
– However, special upgrade handling designed by the Functional Areas may also
update the references of aspects, so it is best to correct also broken references
before the upgrade.
– In the Library structure, navigate to Library Version Definition aspect present
in the user defined libraries. Select the Consistency tab and click Check
Consistency. Correct any errors that may appear during the consistency check.
In 800xA5.1 and later, perform the consistency check with the Consistency Check tool
(started by clicking the question mark icon in top right corner of Plant Explorer Workplace).
This instruction only includes the 800xA 5.1 and later procedure. Refer to System 800xA
Tools (2PAA101888*) for more detailed information on running the 800xA 5.1 consistency
check.

Perform a consistency check before performing the 800xA System backup. Failure
to do so could result in problems when restoring the system after the upgrade.

If using Asset Optimization, be sure to run the Consistency Check tool and delete
any inconsistent Asset Monitor Control Connection Properties aspects.

Perform the following to perform a consistency check:


1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Click the Consistency Check Tool icon at the top of the Plant Explorer Workplace
to launch the Consistency Check Tool.

Rather than performing Step 3. through Step 6. it is also possible to drag the desired
items to the Consistency Check Tool.

3. Click Add Item to open the Select Item dialog box.


4. Browse to the desired location.

2PAA111694-610 A 73
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.2 System-wide Pre-Upgrade Procedures

5. Select the desired items (use Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click to select multiple items). If a
subtree is selected, all objects and aspects in the subtree will be selected. If a library
or application is selected, everything in this entity will be selected.
6. Click Add and Close.
7. Click Check.
8. If errors are found, and they are marked Repairable, perform an automatic repair
by selecting Repair Aspect in the context menu.
9. If errors are found that are not automatically repairable, try to manually reconfigure
the aspects to repair the consistency errors.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.2.4 Migrating Visual Basic Process Graphics Aspects to Process


Graphics Aspects
Visual Basic Process Graphics (VBPG) is not supported in System 800xA beginning
System 800xA 6.0. The Visual Basic (VB) editor is not supported and the graphic aspects
based on VB can no longer be edited in System 800xA beginning System 800xA 6.0.
It is mandatory to migrate all VBPG graphics to PG2 graphics before performing upgrade.
Refer to System 800xA Engineering Process Graphics Migration Tool (3BSE049231*)
available in the ABB Library and myABB/My Control System portal for information about
the migration process.
The System 800xA VBPG Search Tool is used to find VBPG aspects in 800xA system
that need to be migrated prior to a system upgrade. The tool can also identify PG2
aspects that have references to VBPG aspects. For more information on the tool,
refer to System 800xA VBPG migration and System 800xA VBPG Search Tool
(3BSE081093).
All VBPG aspects Main View in System 800xA 6.0 and later will show a message:
This aspect is not supported and will not be available for operator actions.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 74
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.2 System-wide Pre-Upgrade Procedures

3.2.5 Faceplates
The faceplates that were not migrated to Process Graphics 2 before the upgrade have
to be migrated for the following reasons:
• Better runtime performance, as no name server access is required when a faceplate
is opened.
• More reliable because the references continue to work even if the target object is
renamed.
• Microsoft Corporation has withdrawn support for Visual Basic.
• Upgraded faceplates function efficiently with the Consistency Checker and Reference
Tool. This behaves similar to a Process Graphics 2 graphic aspect.
• The upgrade to new reference handling can also repair some broken references.
Refer to the Upgrading Faceplates appendix in System 800xA Engineering Process
Graphics (3BSE049230*) for the procedure to upgrade the faceplates.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.2.6 Record the Number of Aspects and Objects


This topic helps you compare the number of aspects and objects in the system before
the 800xA System Backup and after the 800xA System Restore.
Perform the following procedure to record the number of aspects and objects in the
800xA 6.1 System and compare the number with the 800xA 5.1 System.
1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Use the Structure Selector to open the Admin Structure.
3. Use the Object Browser to navigate to:
Administrative Objects\Domains\system_name, Domain

4. Select Domain Definition in the Aspect List Area.


5. Record the number of objects and aspects listed in the System Size Information
area in the Preview Area.
6. Use the Structure Selector to open the Control Structure.
7. Use the Object Browser to navigate to:
control_network_name, Control Network

of one of the control networks contained in the system.

2PAA111694-610 A 75
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.2 System-wide Pre-Upgrade Procedures

8. Right-click the Control Structure aspect and select Details.


9. Click the Statistics tab.
10. Record the number of objects listed.

Step 11. through Step 15. are not applicable to systems with only 800xA for Symphony
Plus Harmony.

11. Right-click the Control Structure aspect within a controller project of the control
network selected in Step 7..
12. Select Details from the context menu.
13. Record the number of objects listed.
14. Repeat Step 11. through Step 14. for all the controller projects within the control
network.
15. Repeat Step 7. through Step 14. for every control network in the system.

The number of aspects and objects after system restoration should be in the same
range as those recorded during system backup, although there will likely be more.

16. Use the Object Browser to navigate to:


HSE_Subnet name, HSE Subnet

of one of the HSE Subnets contained in the system.


17. Right-click the Control Structure aspect and select Details.
18. Select the Statistics tab.
19. Record the number of objects listed.
20. Repeat Step 16. through Step 19. for every HSE Subnet in the system.
21. Use the Object Browser to navigate to:
MB300 name, MB300 Network

of one of the MB 300 Networks contained in the system.


22. Right-click the Control Structure aspect and then click Details.
23. Click the Statistics tab.

2PAA111694-610 A 76
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

24. Record the number of objects listed.


25. Repeat Step 21. through Step 24. for every MB300 network in the system.
The number of aspects and objects after system restoration must be in the same
range as those recorded during system backup, although there will be a few more
aspects and objects recorded in the 800xA 6.1 System.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance


Backup
This section details the pre-upgrade procedures that must be performed on the 800xA
5.1 System before taking the maintenance backup.
• Batch Management
• Time Server Client Configuration
• Customized Alarm Priority Mapping Aspects
• 800xA for AC 800M
• Engineering Studio
• Device Types in System 800xA
• Device Management FOUNDATION Fieldbus
• 800xA for Advant Master and 800xA for Safeguard
• 800xA for AC 100
• 800xA for DCI
• 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony
• 800xA for AC 870P/Melody
• 800xA for MOD 300
• IEC 61850 Connect
• Freelance Connect (800xA for Freelance)
• PLC Connect
• Asset Optimization
• PC, Network and Software Monitoring

2PAA111694-610 A 77
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

• PC, Network and Software Monitoring Device Library


• SMS and e-mail Messaging
• Information Management
• Application Scheduler and Calculation Server
• 800xA History
• Process Engineering Tool Integration
• Multisystem Integration

3.3.1 Batch Management


This topic describes the pre-upgrade procedure for Batch Management.
1. Verify all the scheduled batches are completed or terminated.
2. Verify the Batch Management Servers are operating normally before and during
800xA System backups of systems containing Batch Management nodes. This will
ensure the backup of all batch data.
After upgrade to the new version of Batch Management, the Miscellaneous Batch
configuration information contained in the Library Structure\Batch
Management\Configuration\Miscellaneous Configuration aspect prior to upgrade will
not be retained.This configuration goes back to default setting on the system.

It is highly recommended to backup Batch Recipe Procedures prior to Upgrade.

Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.3.2 Time Server Client Configuration


Navigate to the aspect server node objects in Node Administration Structure. View
the Time Server Client Configuration aspect on the aspect server node objects. Note
down the configuration of the checkboxes. The values will be needed after the installation
of the new version.

2PAA111694-610 A 78
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

Figure 3.1: Time Server Client Configuration aspect

Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.3.3 Customized Alarm Priority Mapping Aspects


Some customized Alarm Priority Mapping Aspects may be overwritten during the upgrade.
Record all values in the Alarm Priority Mapping aspects before beginning the upgrade
so that they can be recreated after the upgrade.
1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Use the Structure Selector to open the Library Structure.
3. Use the Object Browser to navigate to:
Alarm & Event > Alarm Collection Definitions, Alarm Collection
Definitions

4. Select a Alarm Collection Definition object with customized Alarm Priority Mapping
Aspect.
5. Select Alarm Priority Mapping in the Aspect List Area.
6. Record the values in the Alarm Priority Mapping aspects.
7. Repeat for all customized Alarm Priority Mapping aspects.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 79
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

3.3.4 800xA for AC 800M


Perform the following procedures on all AC 800M Connectivity Servers:
1. Control Builder stores its settings (systemsetup.sys) on disk in the following
...\ABB Industrial IT Data\Engineer IT Data\Control Builder M Professional
Copy this systemsetup.sys file to a safe media. This step needs to be executed on
all nodes where Control Builder M is installed.
2. Make sure "Auto-load configuration" is enabled. Save OPC configurations by selecting
File > Save Configuration in the OPC Server Panel.
3. The OPC Server stores configuration files (*.cfg) and settings (systemsetup.sys) on
disk. Copy these files to a safe media. Note down where the .cfg file was originally
stored since we need to restore the file to the same location. The systemsetup.sys
file is located in:
...\ABB Industrial IT Data\Control IT Data\OPC Server for AC 800M
The configuration files are stored in the Files folder in the same location.

AC 800M Fingerprint Tool


AC 800M Fingerprint tool is a data collection tool, which collects diagnostic data from all
the controllers on the network. This tool can be used on the 800xA 5.1 System to collect
data about the firmware versions, CPU load, hardware revisions and so on. The data is
collected in tab-separated text files and is saved with the IP address and the controller
name in a separate folder on the system. The data in the text files can also be exported
to a spreadsheet for data analysis.
Run the AC 800M Fingerprint tool before the upgrade to collect data from the 800xA 5.1
System. Similarly, run the tool after an upgrade to collect the data on the 800xA 6.1
System. The data collected before and after the upgrade can be compared to analyze
and verify the changes that may have occurred during the upgrade process. Refer to
System 800xA Control AC 800M Configuration (3BSE035980) for more information on
the AC 800M Fingerprint tool.
The Fingerprint tool is located in ...\Engineering\Control Builder M\Tools\AC 800M
Fingerprint in installation media. Start the Fingerprint Tool after copying it to local node.

2PAA111694-610 A 80
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

Start Values Analyzer Tool


A firmware upgrade of the controller may reset variables to their initial value. This happens
in case the cold retain attribute has not been set. The Start Values Analyzer tool,
introduced in System 800xA 6.0, can check if the attributes and parameters set to the
variables are changed after an upgrade. The tool displays a list of the variables that may
be set to the initial values after an upgrade. The output from this tool can be exported
to a spreadsheet for data analysis.
Run this tool before an upgrade and collect the data regarding the variables and the
associated attribute values. Run this tool after an upgrade, record the data, and compare
the results with the data collected before the upgrade. If certain variables are set to the
initial value during an upgrade, it can be reset to the last configured value based on the
collected data. Refer to System 800xA Control AC 800M Configuration (3BSE035980)
for more information on the Start Values Analyzer tool.
The Start Values Analyzer tool is located in ...\Engineering\Control Builder
M\Tools\StartValuesAnalyzer\SV50SP2_SV51\ in 800xA 6.1 installation media. Start the
Start Values Analyzer Tool after copying it to local node.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.3.5 Engineering Studio


Use the following procedures to prepare for the Engineering Studio upgrade.
All the local language parameters used in the Function Designer need to be changed
to English before the upgrade. Usage of non-English parameters in the Function
Diagrams results in errors while generating configuration data.

Engineering Studio Add-Ins


Before updating/upgrading the system from previous release to the latest release ensure
the Engineering Studio Add-Ins are listed in Active Application Add-Ins in MS-Excel.

Ensure to verify the add-ins only on the Engineering nodes that have Microsoft Office
installed.

2PAA111694-610 A 81
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

If the Add-ins are not listed, perform Step 3. through Step 5. to enable them in the
MS-Excel:
1. Open MS-Excel.
2. Navigate to File > Options > Add-Ins > Active Application Add-ins.
Refer to Figure 3.2 to view the Engineering Studio Add-ins.

Figure 3.2: Engineering Studio Add-Ins

3. Select COM Add-ins from Manage drop-down and click Go... List of COM Add-ins
window appears.
4. Select all the Engineering Studio Add-ins from the list and click OK.
5. View the Add-Ins in the Active Application Add-ins panel on the Excel Options
window.
Open MS-Excel and perform the recommended settings, if prompted.
Navigate to File > Options> General, and clear the Show the Start screen when this
application starts check box.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 82
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

3.3.6 Device Types in System 800xA


Identify the device types used in the system. The latest version of the Device Libraries
are required during the upgrade. Compatible version of the Device Libraries are available
on the System 800xA 6.1 Installation media. Check for newer versions of the Device
Libraries if any in ABB Library and myABB/My Control System portal.

Some of device libraries released for 5.x version may not be compatible for 6.1 system
version. For incompatible devices list, please refer the document 9ARD149813*

Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.3.7 Device Management FOUNDATION Fieldbus


Perform the following to prepare for the Device Management FOUNDATION Fieldbus.
User-made modifications to library objects representing FF standard blocks (these are
blocks supported by the Device Type Standard FBs as indicated in the Block Info tab
of the block class parameter dialog box) will be overwritten during upgrade. If such
changes have been made, they can be reconstructed manually as a post upgrade
procedure.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.3.8 800xA for Advant Master and 800xA for Safeguard


PU515A RTA Board is not supported in System 800xA 6.1, use PU410 RTA Unit
instead.

Perform the following to prepare for the 800xA for Advant Master and 800xA for Safeguard
upgrade.
• Save the Advant Master Controller Licenses.txt.
• Save the Configuration Files
• Save the DATHR Files.
• Document the RTA Board Settings.

Save the Advant Master Controller Licenses.txt


Perform the following on the Primary Aspect Server in the original version of the 800xA
System:

2PAA111694-610 A 83
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

Save the Advant Master Controller Licenses.txt file to a safe location.


The default location for the file on a 32-bit system is:
...\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Operate IT\AC 400 Connect\Licenses
The default location for the file on a 64-bit system is:
...\Program Files(x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Operate IT\AC 400 Connect\Licenses

Save the Configuration Files


The configuration files in the Connectivity Servers can contain special configuration
settings for Alarm and Event or Data access. Refer to 800xA for Advant Master,
Configuration (3BSE030340*) for more information about these special configuration
settings.
If such changes are available in the configuration files, perform the following on each
800xA for Advant Master and 800xA for Safeguard Connectivity Server node:
Save the following files to a safe location:
• AdvDsMasterAdapter.csv
• AdvMbAeOPCServer.csv
The default location for the files on a 32-bit system is:
...\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Operate IT\AC 400 Connect\Bin
The default location for the files on a 64-bit system is:
...\Program Files(x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Operate IT\AC 400 Connect\Bin

2PAA111694-610 A 84
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

Save the DATHR Files


Perform the following on each 800xA for Advant Master and 800xA for Safeguard
Connectivity Server node:
1. Make an RTA Board backup.
2. Save the following files to a safe location:
• DATHR1.CD
• DATHR2.CD
• DATHR3.CD
from the folder:
...\ProgramData\ABB\AC400 Connect\AdvantBase\Data\RTA\ Init\
and record which files belong to which node.

Document the RTA Board Settings


Perform the following on each 800xA for Advant Master and 800xA for Safeguard
Connectivity Server node:
1. Document the following settings in the RTA Board Control aspect for re-configuration
after the upgrade.
a. MB300 Network 1, Network 2, and Node Number. These numbers must later
be used in the SCC tool when configuring the Node Roles of System 800xA
6.1.
b. The value (selected or cleared) of the 800xA as Clock Master
(REVERSED_SYNC_MODE) check box.
c. The value (selected or cleared) of the PU410 redundant cable supervision
check box.
2. Document the Network Number found on the MB 300 Net aspect. This aspect is
found in the MB300 Network object parent to each MB300 RTA Board object:
This number must later be used as Network Group Number in the SCC tool when
configuring the Node Roles of System 800xA 6.1.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.3.9 800xA for AC 100


Perform the following to prepare for the 800xA for AC 100 upgrade:

2PAA111694-610 A 85
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

For each 800xA for AC 100 Connectivity Server node, document the settings in the
Configuration Wizard for these action groups:
• AF100 Network
• AC 100 OPC Server Definitions
• AC 100 OPC Server Station Filtering
If you have stored a local copy of the Bus Configuration Database (BCD) file in the
Connectivity Server node, copy the BCD file folder to a safe location.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.3.10 800xA for DCI


Perform the following to prepare for the 800xA for DCI upgrade:
1. Use the import/export utility to export all DCI OPC Server Network objects and all
their children from the Control Structure.

The exported file will be used only if there is a problem with the upgrade.

2. If any modifications and/or additions were made to Symphony DCI object types in
the Object Type Structure, export only those changes using the import/export utility.
3. If performing an online upgrade, review 800xA for DCI Connectivity Server Node
IDs and change them if needed to prevent conflicts during the upgrade.
800xA for DCI Connectivity Server Node IDs
The Node IDs are assigned automatically by System Installer for 800xA 6.0 systems
and later. The Node IDs are set in the range of 21 through 24 for Primary Connectivity
Servers and 25 through 28 for Secondary Connectivity Servers. In 800xA 5.1 and earlier
systems Node IDs were set manually, and Node ID range limits were not enforced.
If any of the 800xA for DCI Primary Connectivity Server Node IDs are in the range of 25
through 28, or any Secondary Connectivity Server Node IDs are in the range of 21
through 24, there may be Node ID duplicates after the initial deployment of the secondary
half of the system during an online upgrade.
Failure to change Node IDs that will result in duplicates during online upgrade will
result in loss of contact with DCU controllers. To prevent this, the Node IDs settings
that will result in duplicates during the online upgrade process must be changed
before the upgrade is started.

2PAA111694-610 A 86
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

Fill in the current Connectivity Server Node ID in the table below. If any of the Primary
Connectivity Server Node IDs are in the range of 25 to 28, or any of the Secondary
Connectivity Server Node IDs are in the range of 21 to 24, the IDs will need to be changed
to a number not in the restricted range.
One option would be to subtract 10 from a primary Connectivity Server Node ID if it is
in the conflicted range, and to add 10 to a secondary Connectivity Server Node ID if it
is in the conflicted range. The new IDs must not conflict with each other, or any of the
current Node IDs.

Current Current New


New Primary
Primary Secondary Secondary
Service Group Connectivity
Connectivity Connectivity Connectivity
Server Node ID
Server Node ID Server Node ID Server Node ID
1
2
3
4

To identify and change (if needed) the DCI Node IDs:


1. On each DCI Connectivity Server node, open the DCI Maintenance task:
ABB Start Menu > ABB System 800xA > 800xA OCS Systems > DCI > DCI
Maintenance
2. Click on the Yes button on the User Account Control pop-up.
3. Click on the Basic menu and select DCI Node Number from the menu.
4. If identifying the Node ID, record the number that appears in the Node Identification
dialog, and click Cancel.
5. If changing the Node ID, in the pop-up Node Identification dialog, select and change
the number to match the updated Node ID, and click the OK button.
6. Then click on the Basic menu and select Exit from the menu.
7. If changing the Node ID, finish by restarting the node and wait for the node to come
online.
8. Repeat steps Step 2. through Step 7. for all remaining DCI Connectivity Server
nodes.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 87
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

3.3.11 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony


The following 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Pre-Upgrade Procedures are only
applicable for 800xA 5.x to 6.x Upgrades. They are not applicable when upgrading
the Operating System on an 800xA 6.x system.
If 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony is used in the system, 800xA for Symphony Plus
Harmony Standalone ConfigServer Export Tool must be run before performing the 800xA
System Backup.
Perform the steps as described in the Save 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony
Configuration Server Information section to prepare for the 800xA for Symphony Plus
Harmony upgrade.

Save 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Configuration Server Information


Perform the following steps once on each 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony
Configuration Server and on each combined 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony
Configuration and Connectivity Server node in the system:
1. Install the Standalone ConfigServer Export Tool from the following directory on the
System 800xA 6.1 installation media:
Connectivities\Harmony\Standalone ConfigServer Export Tool
a. Double-click Standalone ConfigServer Export Tool.msi.
b. On the welcome screen of the InstallShield wizard, click Next to start the
installation.
c. Select Finished when the installation is complete.
2. Select Start, click Run, and enter SymHarmExporter to launch the export tool.
3. In the Harmony Exporter window, select Browse.
4. In the Save As window, enter a File name for the ConfigServer Export file, choose
a folder location to save the file, and then click Save.
5. In the Harmony Exporter window, select Start Export. The Output Log will display
export status information. An Export Completed at date/time message is displayed
when the export is completed.
6. Close the Harmony Exporter window. The saved ConfigServer Export file will be
needed to upload the ConfigServer data into the 800xA 6.1 system after the upgrade
is complete.

2PAA111694-610 A 88
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

Config Server Backup


Use the following procedure to create a 800xA 5.1 backup version of the 800xA for
Symphony Plus Harmony Configuration. This backup is not needed for the upgrade to
System 800xA 6.1, but would be needed to recreate a 800xA 5.1 system if necessary.
1. On the 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Configuration Server, select:
Start Menu > All Programs > ABB Industrial IT 800xA > 800xA for OCS Systems
> Harmony > Configuration > Backup Configuration
2. Click Connect.
3. Click Browse to name the backup file and choose a location to save it.
4. Click Backup.
5. After the backup is completed, click Exit.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.3.12 800xA for AC 870P/Melody


Disable the Melody AutoConfigurator service in Plant Explorer > Service Structure
(the service must be disabled when the system maintenance backup is started).

Back up the project specific changes (if applicable):


• DHCP Server Configuration.
• ETC Host files for Melody Connectivity Servers from:
...\Windows\system32\Drivers
• Changes in the Default Object Types (e.g. manual changes for permissions in
Control Connection Aspects).
• ConvDB changes only on Configuration Server, change to the directory ABB
Industrial IT\Configuration on the Program Files folder (For 64-bit system it is
Program Files (x86) folder) and back up the ConvDB.mdb and
ConvDB_<Hostname>.mdb files.

ConfigServer node: Ensure that no Commissioning will be done from the Melody
Composer during this upgrade.

2PAA111694-610 A 89
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

Use the following procedure to save 800xA for AC 870P/Melody information:


1. Log in to the 800xA Service account on the Configuration Server node.
a. Create a backup of the Configuration Server database.
b. Select:
All Programs > ABB Industrial IT 800xA > 800xA for AC 870P Melody >
Configuration > Backup Configuration
c. Click Connect.
Save the backup file to a safe media like a network share or removable disk.
Otherwise, the file will be deleted once an upgrade occurs due to a reload of the
node.
d. Click Backup.
e. Click Exit when the backup is complete.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.3.13 800xA for MOD 300


Ensure that the configuration data noted in the Customized Data for Backup appendix
in 800xA for MOD 300 Configuration (3BUR002417*) has been recorded.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 90
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

3.3.14 IEC 61850 Connect


Use following procedure to backup 800xA for IEC61850 information in System 800xA
5.1 :
1. Process Graphics 2 - Faceplate Elements and Graphic Element aspects
preparation :
This procedure only applies if IEC 61850 Connect is installed, which uses a
user-defined Graphic Library for applications.
While updating from a previous system version, it is observed in the Functional
Structure that all Process Graphics 2 Faceplate Elements and Graphic Element
aspects have the same name as the Faceplate Element.
Before performing System Backup in the previous system revision, select Object
Type Structure > IEC61850 user-defined Library and perform the following for
all Process Graphics 2 Faceplate Elements and Graphic Element aspects of all
Conducting Equipment objects:
• Right-click the aspect and select Details.
• In the Aspect info tab:
- Remove the Auto Instantiate aspect and Template aspect.
- Select the Inheritance Enabled option.
• Perform an upload operation with the relevant scd file.

Use the updated scd file if Step 1. is performed in running Plant conditions, to ensure
that there are no disturbances after performing the upload operation.

2. Take backup of IEC 61850 CET OPC Server projects :


Take backup of all IEC 61850 OPC Server projects present in applicable 800xA
Connectivity Server Nodes through CET Tool.
a. Open the CET Tool.
b. Select File > Open/Manage project. Select the project that needs to be exported.
c. Click Export Project and click Open Project.
d. Save the Exported project (*.pcmp file) in a safe location.
External IEC61850 Tools Project/Configuration Backup :
The Project/Configuration Backup procedure of applicable ABB or 3rd Party IEC61850
Engineering tools external to 800xA (Eg. IET/CCT, CCT600, IET600 and PCM 600
or other 3rd party tools) are not described in this manual. Refer to respective Product
manuals for the same.

2PAA111694-610 A 91
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.3.15 Freelance Connect (800xA for Freelance)


Perform the following procedure to prepare for 800xA for Freelance upgrade:
1. Note down all the resource IDs including Alias used by the Freelance OPC Server.
You will need the OPC Server resource ids and its Alias after you install the newer
version of Freelance OPC Server.

3.3.16 PLC Connect


Perform the following procedure to prepare for the PLC Connect upgrade.
1. If the PLC Connect Communication Server Pre Treatment function is being used in
the application (refer to System 800xA PLC Connect Configuration (3BSE035041*)
for more information), make a backup of the Pretreat dll (Pretreat3.dll or
<user-defined>.dll, be sure to select the version used). The Pretreat dll is located
in the following folder on the PLC Connect Connectivity Server:
...\ABB Industrial IT\Operate IT\PLC Connect\Bin

The path is the default location of the file. If it has been placed somewhere else, make
a backup from that location.

2. Make a backup of the application project and source files for the Pretreat dll.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.3.17 Asset Optimization


Preparing for the Asset Optimization upgrade requires backing up data to a safe media.

2PAA111694-610 A 92
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

Use the following procedure to back up Asset Optimization information (perform only the
steps applicable to the system):
1. Asset Monitoring:

Asset Monitoring directories will be found on every Asset Optimization Server node
and any other node defined as an Asset Monitoring Server.

a. If Runtime Asset Monitors are being used in the system, save the Runtime
Asset Monitor data directory (DeviceRunTimeMSLogicStore) to a safe media.
This directory stores the runtime information calculated by the Runtime Asset
Monitors running in this node. This directory is located in:
...\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\AssetMonitorEnvironment\Bin
For 64-bit system, the default location is:
...\Program Files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\AssetMonitorEnvironment\Bin
b. If XY Profile Deviation Asset Monitors are being used in the system, save the
XY Profile Deviation Asset Monitor data directory (XY_Reference_Profiles) to
a safe media. This directory is located in:
...\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\AssetMonitorEnvironment\Bin
For 64-bit system, the default location is:
...\Program Files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\AssetMonitorEnvironment\Bin
c. If Counter Check Asset Monitors are being used in the system, save the Counter
Check Asset Monitors data directory named:
{66E71F7B-90D6-4E62-9881-38388B24CBDF}

to safe media. This directory exists for each AO Server in the system. These
directories are located in:
<install drive>:\OperateITData\AoEng\<AO Server ID>\ AmCat\<Counter Check
ID>
Where each <AO Server ID> directory represents one AO Server instance
running on the selected node. The <AO Server ID> directory name is formatted
as two consecutive GUIDs, for example:
{F9C150F5-2929-4A12-BC28-E00ED6DB1585}{B925E77F-2A82-41C6-A981-FAB4386D5701}.

2PAA111694-610 A 93
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

For correct system operation it is important that only the directories identified by the
Counter Check Asset Monitor category GUID be saved, as other data in the tree
structure above these directories will not be consistent with a restore.
2. Maximo Integration:
If using Maximo Integration, the Maximo Integration information (Maximo Equipment
ID and Maximo Credentials aspects) must be saved from all Asset Optimization Server
nodes. Refer the Service Structure for the name of the Asset Optimization Server
nodes.
a. The MxDef files provide the mapping between the 800xA System environment
and the Maximo system. If the MxDef files were customized per the instructions
in System 800xA Asset Optimization Configuration (3BUA000118*) back up
the customized MxDef files to safe media.
b. The customized MxDef Files for Maximo versions 4.1 and 4.1.1 are located in
the following directory:
...\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\ABBAO\Services\MOM\MxDefs\
For 64-bit system, the default location is:
...\Program Files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\ABBAO\Services\MOM\MxDefs\
c. The customized MxDef files for Maximo version 5.1 and 5.2 are located in the
following directory:
...\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\ABBAO\Services\MOM\MxDefs\Maximo5\MxServer
For 64-bit system, the default location is:
...\Program Files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\ABBAO\Services\MOM\MxDefs\Maximo5\MxServer
d. The customized MxDef files for Maximo version 6.2 are located in the following
directory:
...\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\AOECSConnector\MaximoDef
For 64-bit system, the default location is:
...\Program Files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\AOECSConnector\MaximoDef

2PAA111694-610 A 94
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

e. Back up the AOMaximoModel.xml file to a safe location. A backup of


AOMaximoModel.xml is necessary because the ECS model for Maximo also
needs to be modified if the MXDef files are customized.
The model file is available at the following location:
...\Program files\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\AOECSConnector\ECSDefinitions
For 64-bit system, the default location is:
...\Program files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\AOECSConnector\ECSDefinitions
The pending fault reports residing in the system are available in the following directory
structure:
...\OperateITData\OptaoACDs
Back up the entire OptaoACDs folder.

2PAA111694-610 A 95
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

3. SAP/PM Integration:
If using SAP/PM Integration, the SAP/PM Integration information (SAP Equipment
ID and SAP Credentials aspects) must be saved from all Asset Optimization Server
nodes. Reference the Service Structure for the name of the Asset Optimization
Server nodes.
a. Although the SAP/PM system is separate from the 800xA System, it is a good
idea to back up the system in use. Follow SAP/PM standard practices for
SAP/PM system backup.
b. The SAPPMDef files provide the mapping between the 800xA System
environment and the SAP/PM system. If the SAPDef files were customized per
the instructions in System 800xA Asset Optimization Configuration
(3BUA000118*), back up the customized SAPDef files to safe media.
The customized SAPPMDef files for SAP version 4.7 are located under:
...\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\ Asset
Optimization\AOECSConnector\SAPPMDef
For 64-bit system, the default location is:
...\Program Files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\ Asset
Optimization\AOECSConnector\SAPPMDef
c. Back up the AOSAPModel.xml file to a safe location. A backup of
AOSAPModel.xml is necessary because the ECS model for SAP also needs
to be modified if the SAPPMDef files are customized.
The model file is available at the following location:
...\Program files\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\AOECSConnector\ECSDefinitions
For 64-bit system, the default location is:
...\Program files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\AOECSConnector\ECSDefinitions
The pending fault reports residing in the system are available in the following directory
structure. Backup the entire OptaoACDs folder.
...\OperateITData\OptaoACDs

2PAA111694-610 A 96
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

4. DMS Calibration Integration


The DMS Calibration Integration approach is changed in 800xA 5.1. Upgrade of DMS
Calibration Integration is not supported. Reconfigure the DMS Calibration Integration
based on an engineered solution.
Contact ABB technical support for more information.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.3.18 PC, Network and Software Monitoring


Use the following procedure to prepare for the PC, Network and Software Monitoring
upgrade.
1. If there are user defined Script, Resource, and Assembly files they need to be backed
up. The user files are located in: (For 64-bit system, files are located under Program
Files (x86) directory)
...\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\ PC, Network and Software
Monitoring\bin\Configuration\ Scripts\User
...\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\ PC, Network and Software
Monitoring\bin\Configuration\ Assemblies\User
...\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\ PC, Network and Software
Monitoring\bin\Configuration\ Resources\User directory
Copy the files in these directories to a safe location.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 97
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

3.3.19 PC, Network and Software Monitoring Device Library


Use the following procedure to prepare PC, Network and Software Monitoring Device
Library upgrade:
1. Back up MOF files (if they exist) to a safe location. The MOF files are located on
the PC, Network and Software Monitoring Server node(s) in:
...\Program Files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\PC, Network and Software
Monitoring\MOFS
2. Back up Asset monitor dlls (if they exist) to a safe location. The dlls will be available
on the Asset Optimization Server node(s) in:
...\Program Files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\PC, Network and Software
Monitoring\Asset Monitoring\Bin
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.3.20 SMS and e-mail Messaging


Save all GSM Device hardware information. Record information for the GSM device on
the SMS and e-mail Messaging Reconfiguration GSM Hardware Setup Worksheet shown
in Table 3.1.

Table 3.1: SMS and e-mail Messaging Reconfiguration GSM Hardware Setup Worksheet

Item Setting/Value
General Settings
Interval for Checking for Incoming Value: _____ Seconds/Minutes (circle one)
Messages
Unicode Checked or Unchecked (circle one)
Modem Settings
Available COM Ports Value: COM _____
Baud Rate Value: _____
PIN Value: _____
Preferred SMSC Number Value: _____

Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 98
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

3.3.21 Information Management


Perform the following procedures to prepare for the Information Management upgrade
before taking a maintenance backup.

Verifying Information Management Database Sizing


Verifying HS_Index sizing
While upgrading to 800xA 6.1, a new index is added for the message logs. This new
index will use the space proportional to the configured message log capacity. Generally,
1 GB of space per million messages is required in the History Runtime Indexes
Tablespace for storing the message logs.
To check and verify the tablespace sufficiency:
1. Navigate to the Node Administration structure.
2. For the Information Management server, add the configured capacity for the
IMMSGLOG and the PDLMSGLOG. Round up the result to the nearest million. If
IMMSGLOG has six million capacity and the PDLMSGLOG has 400,000 capacity,
round up the result to seven million. This example will require 7 GB of additional
index space.
3. Open the Oracle Instance Wizard and review the storage for the History Runtime
Indexes. Verify that the difference between the current usage and the maximum
usage is greater than the calculated value from Step 2.. If the available space is
less than the calculated space, increase the maximum size of the tablespace. If the
maximum size of the tablespace is greater than 32 GB, a second database file (DBF)
must be added.
4. Review and update any other tablespaces that are at or near 100%.
5. Apply the changes and exit from the Oracle Instance Wizard.
Verify HS_IPDL table sizing
The upgrade will modify/create additional indexes to improve PDL performance. These
indexes may require additional tablespace. Use the following procedure to make any
necessary adjustments. Proper sizing will insure the upgrade runs properly. If multiple
IM servers exist in the system, this procedure is required on each IM server.
1. Login to the IM server as the "800xAInstaller" user.
2. open a cmd.exe window.
3. run SQLPLUS.exe /@localhost

2PAA111694-610 A 99
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

4. at the SQL prompt, type


SQL> select * from ops$ocshis.pdl_tables;
SQL> exit;
5. Using the row counts returned,use this equation to deteming the additional space
required.
HS_IPDL extra space = HISTORY_ASSOC_OCC_END*75 +
HISTORY_ASSOC_OCC_START*75 + RESOURCE_TRANSACTIONS*30 +
TASK_VARIABLES*30 + TASK*85
6. Open the IM Oracle Instance Wizard.
7. Increase the HS_IPDL maximum size by the calculated amount. If the tablespace
is close to 32GB, add an additional datafile as needed.
8. Review TEMP and UNDO tablespace. For large configurations, configurations with
12 million entry messages logs, the maximum sizes for temp and rollback should
be in the 8-12GB range.

Cleaning the History Database


It is recommended that the history database be cleaned before making the backup.

ABB Process Administration Service (PAS) service must be stopped before cleaning
the History Database.

1. Open a Windows Command Prompt and enter hsDBMaint -checkDB.


2. If any problems are found, enter hsDBMaint -clean to fix them.

2PAA111694-610 A 100
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

Verifying Service Provider Name Format


The Inform IT History Service Provider name is created automatically by the software
when the IM node is first created. If a user modifies the name, errors will be generated
while accessing a few utilities or while performing an upgrade. These errors can be
avoided by checking the name and correcting the name if necessary. The procedure to
check and change the Service Provider name is as follows:
1. In the Node Administration Structure, navigate to the IM History Configuration
group as shown in Figure 3.3.

Figure 3.3: History Configuration - Service Provider Name

2. Verify if the History Service Provider Name format is:


IM_Inform IT History_<hostname>

where <hostname> is the hostname of the IM server.


3. If the name does not match this format, use the workplace to correct the name.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 101
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

3.3.22 Application Scheduler and Calculation Server


This procedure only applies to installations using the Application Scheduler and/or
Calculation Server services. If the services are installed and enabled, they must be
disabled before the Maintenance backup is taken. If they exist, perform the following for
each:
1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Use the Structure Selector to open the Service Structure.
3. Select the Scheduler Service Object/Calculation Server Object.
4. Select the Service Definition aspect.
5. Click the Configuration tab.
6. Clear the Enabled check box and click Apply.
The Scheduler/Calculation server services will have to be manually enabled after the
upgrade.
If performing an online upgrade, you can restart the Application Scheduler and/or
Calculation services after the PPA maintenance backup is completed. There is no
need to restart these if performing an offline upgrade as all nodes are offline before
any restoration begins.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 102
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

3.3.23 800xA History


Perform the following for the 800xA History upgrade:
1. In 800xA 6.1 version 800xA History will be installed with 800xAService user account,
so if the user account is different in 800xA 5.1 History installation then user name
has to be changed. Follow the procedure as in System 800xA History Administration
and Configuration (2PAA107563*) manual for changing the user name.
2. Upgrade the 800xA History DCN & History Servers nodes from 800xA 5.1(800xA
History 2.0) to 800xA 6.1 using 800xA 6.1 media Manual History Installer. Follow
the procedure as described in System 800xA History Administration and Configuration
(2PAA107563*) manual

2PAA111694-610 A 103
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

3. In 800xA 6.1 all 800xA History parameters (Database drive letter, Backup drive
letter, Time zone, Database size, IP configuration and machine name) should be
same as that of 800xA 5.1. If any change is required, perform the same in 800xA
5.1 before starting upgrade by referring the required appendix in the System 800xA
History Administration and Configuration (2PAA107563*) manual

800xA History Embedded Data Collectors


Perform the following on the 800xA History Embedded Data Collectors:

The following steps must be performed on the 800xA History Data Collector node
and only before taking the maintenance back up of the 800xA Aspect System.

Ensure to complete the update steps of the 800xA History Server(s) before proceeding
with the remaining steps in this procedure.

a. Perform the following on the System 800xA 5.1 on the 800xA History Server,
if the History Installation is done other than the 800xA Service Account. Modify
800xA History Admin User name / DB Admin User to the Service account name
that is being planned on the 800xA 6.1 System. For more information on how
to modify 800xA History admin account to Service account, refer to System
800xA History Administration and Configuration (2PAA107563*) manual
For upgrading the 800xA History database from 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 ,800xA
History database must be updated to the 800xA History 6.1 version on the
800xA 5.1 System itself and then take backup which will be restored later on
the upgraded 800xA History Server,On how to update the 800xA History
database Refer to System 800xA History Installation manual (2PAA107280-610*)
for update procedure.
i. Go to Service structure in the 800xA Workplace, modify the User name
with the Service account name that is planned on the 800xA 6.1 system
for the 800xA History Service Providers in the 800XA History Sync service
group, 800xA History Event Collector Service group, and 800xA History
Event Server service group.
ii. For 800xA History Sync Service, perform the following:
• Click 800xA History Sync Service object in the Service structure.
• Select the HistorySupervision aspect.
• Right-click Config View and select Special Configuration tab.
• Modify to the Service account name that is planned on 800xA 6.1
system.

2PAA111694-610 A 104
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

b. For upgrading the 800xA History database from 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 ,800xA
History database must be updated to the 800xA History 6.1 version on the
800xA 5.1 System itself and then take backup which will be restored later on
the upgraded 800xA History Server,On how to update the 800xA History
database Refer to System 800xA History Installation manual (2PAA107280-610*)
for update procedure.
c. To update the History database Locally copy the 800xA history media from
System 800xA 6.1 media from the the below path:"\Applications\History"
d. After completion of update, follow the steps below to take necessary database
backups:
i. From the Desktop, select and open the RTDB Control Panel > Starting
and Stopping folder.
ii. Double-click Stop_RTDB.bat.
iii. Type Y in the popup window and press Enter.
Wait for the Database service to stop. After the services are stopped
successfully, a message stating All tables OK will be displayed.
iv. Press any key to exit.
v. Copy the Database folders (Application folder and RTDB Data folder), from
database drive, to some other drive or safe location.
vi. Copy the Backup folder from backup drive ,to some other drive or safe
location
After updating the database on 800xA History Embedded Data Collectors, make sure
that all the Data Collectors are connected to the History Server. This can be verified
in the Vtrin application of History Server(s).
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.3.24 Process Engineering Tool Integration


Perform the following to back up Process Engineering Tool Integration information.
The project data is located in the following directory in a 32-bit system:
...\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Engineer IT\Engineering Studio\Process Engineering
Tool Integration\Xml
The project data is located in the following directory in a 64-bit system:

2PAA111694-610 A 105
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

...\Program Files(x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Engineer IT\Engineering Studio\Process


Engineering Tool Integration\Xml
Save the XML data directory to a safe media such as a network share or removable disk.
The directory contains the default mapping files (*.dmf) modified on the project, accelerator
files (*.acc), and configuration files (*.pcf and *.fcf).
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.3.25 Multisystem Integration


Online upgrade for a system containing Multisystem Integration is not supported with
Multisystem Integration in operation.

When performing an upgrade on a Multisystem Integration system, the individual systems


needs to be handled one at a time and during that time operated locally.

Always have a higher or the same version in the subscriber system as the provider
systems.

From version 6.1 it is possible to use load balancing between redundant Remote
Access Client and Remote Access Server. When performing an upgrade to 6.1 this
functionality is not enabled by default. For more information on how to enable this
functionality contact local ABB support.

Example upgrade scenario for Multisystem Integration


Consider a Multisystem Integration system consists of two provider systems (A and B)
and a subscriber system (C). System A, B and C is on the same version and an upgrade
of system B and C is planned.
The following workflow should be used:
1. Operate system A, B and C locally.
2. Upgrade system C according to the ordinary instructions.
3. Verify that system A and B can be controlled remotely from system C again.
4. Operate system B locally.

2PAA111694-610 A 106
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.3 Pre-upgrade Procedures before Maintenance Backup

5. In system C, stop the RAC (Remote Access Client) afw-service group that is
connected to system B.

Don't stop the afw-service group that is connected to system A.

6. Upgrade system B according to the ordinary instructions.


7. In system C, start the RAC (Remote Access Client) afw-service group that is
connected to system B.
8. Verify that system B can be controlled remotely from system C again.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 107
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.4 System 800xA Maintenance Backup

3.4 System 800xA Maintenance Backup


1. All system extensions that are part of the system must be installed and loaded on
the node where the backup will be taken (usually the primary Aspect Server node).
The 800xA Backup/Restore function makes it possible to make an online backup
of the Aspect Directory on the Primary Aspect Server in the 800xA 5.1 System and
restore it to the new Primary Aspect Server in the 800xA 6.1 System.
A full backup stores all aspect objects and aspect data (application data) in the
Aspect Directory.
2. Perform the 800xA System backup from the Maintenance Structure (Aspect
Directory backup type).
Do not make any configuration changes such as modifying displays, modifying or
deleting objects as these changes made to the system will be lost from this point
forward.
a. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
b. Use the Structure Selector to open the Maintenance Structure.
c. Create a Full Backup Definition object.
d. Configure the Scope and Storage tabs.
e. Check the disk space and path in the Storage tab. A large configuration could
require a minimum of five gigabytes of free space.
f. Start the backup process.
Refer to the How to Make a Full Backup topic in System 800xA Maintenance
(3BSE046784*) for more detailed information on performing the 800xA System
Backup.
Backing up a Production System will not save the contents of the Engineering
Environment. Use the Export function to save the contents of the Engineering
Environment. Modifications can be made in the Engineering Environment while backing
up a Production System but all Load Evaluate Go sessions must be closed.
Only the Production Environment is restored when a Production System is restored.
All other environments are removed. Do not restore a Production System while a
Load Evaluate Go session is active or modifications are being made in the Engineering
Environment.
For more information, refer System 800xA Engineering and Production Environments
(3BSE045030*).

2PAA111694-610 A 108
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.5 Pre-upgrade Procedures for Local Data Backup

Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.5 Pre-upgrade Procedures for Local Data Backup


• 800xA for AC 800M
• Gain Schedule Settings in PidAdvancedCC
• Information Management
• Application Change Management
• Basic History Service Data
• 800xA History
After taking a maintenance backup and before doing an upgrade, the local data (the
run-time data that was not previously backed up) needs to be backed up. This section
describes the steps for a few Functional Area software that need to be performed to
back up the local data before an upgrade.

3.5.1 800xA for AC 800M


After taking a maintenance backup and before performing an online upgrade, ensure to
back up the run-time data from the Aspect Server as detailed in the following section.

Compiler Output File Helper Tool


The compiler output files are created for every application and controller configuration
that will be downloaded to the controller. After a successful download of the application
and controller configuration to the controller, the compiler output files are transferred to
the Aspect Server.
The maintenance backup, before an upgrade will include the backup of the compiler
output files. However, there may be instances when some change to the applications or
controller configuration is downloaded after taking the maintenance backup. In this case,
the compiler output files need to be handled to ensure that a warm download can be
performed after the upgrade.
The Compiler Output File Helper tool, introduced in System 800xA 6.1, extracts the
compiler output files from the Aspect Server and stores it on a local disk. The same tool
is also used to import the collected files to the Aspect Server after the upgrade.

2PAA111694-610 A 109
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.5 Pre-upgrade Procedures for Local Data Backup

If changes have been downloaded to the controllers after taking the maintenance backup,
run the Compiler Output File Helper tool on the retained 800xA 5.1 Aspect Server to
extract the compiler output files. After the upgrade to System 800xA 6.1, run the tool to
import those files. Refer to System 800xA Control AC 800M Configuration (3BSE035980)
for more information on the Compiler Output File Helper tool.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.5.2 Gain Schedule Settings in PidAdvancedCC


Some internal Function Block types in ControlAdvancedLib have changed names. After
an upgrade this will lead to the loss of cold retain values in the Gain Scheduling table of
the PidAdvancedCC Control Module instances. The user is notified about the cold retain
mismatch in the Change Analysis. See Figure 3.4 and Figure 3.5.

Figure 3.4: Change Analysis

2PAA111694-610 A 110
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.5 Pre-upgrade Procedures for Local Data Backup

Figure 3.5: Change Analysis

The following Gain Scheduling values (inside the red boxes) are affected and will be
lost. See Figure 3.6, Figure 3.7, Figure 3.8, Figure 3.9 and Figure 3.10.

2PAA111694-610 A 111
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.5 Pre-upgrade Procedures for Local Data Backup

Figure 3.6: Faceplate - GS tab

2PAA111694-610 A 112
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.5 Pre-upgrade Procedures for Local Data Backup

Figure 3.7: Faceplate - Edit 1 tab

2PAA111694-610 A 113
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.5 Pre-upgrade Procedures for Local Data Backup

Figure 3.8: Faceplate - Edit 2 tab

2PAA111694-610 A 114
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.5 Pre-upgrade Procedures for Local Data Backup

Figure 3.9: Interaction Window - Gain Scheduling window

2PAA111694-610 A 115
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.5 Pre-upgrade Procedures for Local Data Backup

Figure 3.10: Interaction Window - Edit window

Before an upgrade make a hardcopy of all Gain Schedule settings, i.e. main interaction
window and Edit window(s) of the PidAdvancedCC Control module instances. Note that
for every set of variables a hardcopy shall be made of each “Edit” window(s). After project
upgrade the Gain Scheduling variables shall be manually entered either from Control
Builder or from a Workplace in order to retain the Gain Schedule settings.

3.5.3 Information Management


Perform the following procedures to prepare for the Information Management upgrade.

2PAA111694-610 A 116
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.5 Pre-upgrade Procedures for Local Data Backup

End Microsoft Excel Process using Windows Task Manager


Use Windows Task Manager to manually end the EXCEL.EXE process.

ABB Process Administration Service (PAS)


Perform the following procedure to run the PAS utility.
1. Run the Process Administration Service (PAS) utility on the Information Management
Application Server node. From the Control Panel select:
Administrative Tools > PAS > Process Administration
This opens the Process Administration Service dialog box.
The path for PAS Utility is different on 800xA 6.1 System. The below path to be used
in case of upgrading Operating system on 6.1 or later system.
ABB Start Menu > ABB System 800xA > PAS Management > PAS Control
2. Click Stop All to stop all processes under PAS supervision.
3. Click Close when the dialog box indicates that all processes are stopped.
4. Use standard Windows procedures, select the Services from Administrative Tools
in Windows Control Panel, to place the ABB Process Administration Service into
manual and insure that it is stopped.

Information Management History Backup and Restore Utility

The IM Server must be connected to an active aspect system at this time. The following
steps require acesss to the aspect directory.

Use the Information Management History Backup/Restore utility to create all the backup
files that are required to completely back up the Information Management History
database. This includes all configuration data, log data from both file-based and
ORACLE -based logs, and the Aspect System definition file.
During a backup operation, all data in the Oracle database owned by the Oracle History
user is exported to the specified destination and compressed into a zipped archive, along
with any files that have been created to store file-based property log entries (called flat
files).
The History database can be backed up to any drive, including any mapped network
drives. The disk type should be NTFS for the backups.

2PAA111694-610 A 117
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.5 Pre-upgrade Procedures for Local Data Backup

To avoid any ambiguity, the backup operation produces a zipped archive of compressed
History database files for each drive that contains at least some portion of the database,
where each archive contains only the database files that are stored on the corresponding
drive. The backup utility uses the naming convention name-drive.zip for the zipped
archives that it produces. For example, if the History database is located entirely on the
C:\ drive and you wish to back up the database to a zipped archive called hist, the backup
operation will compress the database files into a zipped archive named histDB-C.zip.
If the data files exceed two gigabytes, or if there are more than 25,000 files, then multiple
zip files will be created using the following naming convention:
• First File name-drive.zip
• Next File name-drive0001.zip
• Next File name-drive0002.zip
When backing up the History database, make sure the disk is ready and available on
the node on which the procedure is to occur. The log file should be checked after the
backup operation to make sure that the backup operation completed successfully.
Make sure the system drive is not getting full. Temp space is required to make the backup.
If the log file indicates that the Oracle export failed, additional options can be passed to
hsBAR to use another disk for the Oracle export.
To make a backup:
1. Open Information Mgmt.
2. Select History > Backup and Restore.
3. Verify the Create Backup Files of Current Configuration option is enabled in the
IM Historian Backup/Restore Utility window.
4. Click Next. A window for setting up the backup operation is displayed.

2PAA111694-610 A 118
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.5 Pre-upgrade Procedures for Local Data Backup

5. Specify the location where the backup files are to be created in the New Directory
Path for the Backup field. Create a new directory such as E:\IMbackupSV5.1.
The backup of the History data must be in a directory of its own, not the
D:\HSDATA\History directory. If the data is put into the D:\HSDATA\History directory,
it will get lost.
a. Specify additional hsBAR options if needed. When the system drive is low on
space, it is typical to specify:
-a D:\Export

The -a option enables an alternate location for temporary and Oracle DB export
files during the backup process. The folder should be created ahead of time
and the files system must be NTFS. Use this option to specify a different folder
for the oracle export file.
6. Verify the Only Generate Aspect Definition File option is disabled.
7. Click Next. The HsBAR Output Window is displayed.
8. Select the Automatically Close Upon Completion option.
9. After the HsBAR Output Window closes, monitor the progress in the Progress Status
area of the IM Historian Backup/Restore Utility window and click Finish when the
backup is complete.
If a message appears stating that there are inconsistencies between the log
configurations in the Aspect System and the log configurations in Oracle, it may be
because the database was not cleaned before running the backup. Use the hsDBMaint
-clean function to clean the database and then rerun the backup. If this does not fix
the problem, contact ABB Technical Support for further assistance.

Saving Other Information Management Related Files


There are several other files related to Information Management to be saved as part of
a total system backup.
• History Archive Data: For each archive device, go to the location specified by the
Device Filename and copy the folders under that directory to a safe location. Do
this even if automatic backup is configured. If the automatic backups are on local
disks, locate these folders and back them up to a safe location.
• History Archive State Information: The folder that holds the last archive time and
other archive state information must be copied to a safe location. Copy the folder
named Archive located at:
c:\ProgramData\ABB\IM\Archive

2PAA111694-610 A 119
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.5 Pre-upgrade Procedures for Local Data Backup

• Reports: Save any report template files created in Microsoft Excel, DataDirect,
and/or Crystal Reports ®. Also save report output files created as a result of running
these reports using the Scheduling Services.
• Desktop Trends: Back up trend display, ticker display, and tag explorer files.
– Ticker files are located in:
C:\Users\<user>\AppData\Roaming\ABB Industrial IT\Inform IT\Desktop Trends
– Trend Files are located in:
C:\Users\<user>\AppData\Roaming\ABB Industrial IT\Inform IT\Desktop Trends
– Tag Explorer files are located in:
C:\Users\<user>\AppData\Roaming\ABB Industrial IT\Inform IT\Desktop Trends
• Display Services: Back up the directories for custom users, as well as display and
user element definitions.
The files in a 32-bit system are located at:
C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Inform IT\Display Services\Server\Data
The files in a 64-bit system are located at:
C:\Program Files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Inform IT\Display Services\Server\Data
Save the user-built .svg and .uet files.
• DataDirect: Back up the custom text files for object, object type, and attribute menus
used on the DataDirect windows. Save the user-built text files located at:
c:\ProgramData\ABB\IM\DataDirect\etc
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.5.4 Application Change Management


Perform the following procedure to take a backup of the ACM Server Database before
the upgrade:
1. Open SQL Server Management Studio navigating to the path:
All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2
2. Expand Databases folder and select the desired SQL Database that is linked to
ACM System (for example: WSS_Content).
3. Right-click on the database and select Back Up... from the Task menu.

2PAA111694-610 A 120
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.5 Pre-upgrade Procedures for Local Data Backup

4. Enter the required information in the backup dialog box.

Figure 3.11: SharePoint Backup Dialog Box

5. Click OK and wait for the completion of the operation.


6. Copy the backup to a local machine before starting the system upgrade.

Step1 to 6 can be skipped if already performed as part of the Pre-upgrade procedure.

Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 121
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.5 Pre-upgrade Procedures for Local Data Backup

3.5.5 Basic History Service Data


On nodes that have the Basic History installed, stop the Service Provider for each of
the nodes, and back up the Basic History Service data. The backed up data will be
restored on the new system after the upgrade.
To save Basic History Service data:
1. Stop the Basic History Server from the Service Structure by the following procedure:
a. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
b. Use the Structure Browser to open the Service Structure.
c. Select the Basic History, Service > < Service Group Name>, Service Group >
<service provider name>.
d. Select the Service Provider Definition aspect.
e. Click the Configuration tab.
f. Clear the Enabled check box and click Apply.
2. Use Windows Backup (not the 800xA Backup) or manually copy the folder to a safe
location to backup the files in the following directory:
...\OperateITData1\History\{provider ID}
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

3.5.6 800xA History


Perform the steps described in the 800xA History Server, 800xA History Embedded Data
Collectors, and 800xA History Archiving sections to prepare for the 800xA History upgrade.
Refer the Section "Appendix C: C.2 Online upgrade from System 800xA 5.1 to 800xA
6.1" in the System 800xA
History Installation (2PAA107280*) manual for more details on Upgrade procedure

2PAA111694-610 A 122
3 Pre-Upgrade Procedures
3.5 Pre-upgrade Procedures for Local Data Backup

800xA History Server


Perform the following on the 800xA History Server:
1. Perform the following on the System 800xA 5.1 on the 800xA History Server, if the
History Installation is done other than the 800xA Service Account.
Modify 800xA History Admin User name / DB Admin User to the Service account
name that is being planned on the 800xA 6.1 System. For more information
on how to modify 800xA History admin account to Service account, refer to 800xA
History Administration and Configuration (2PAA107563*) manual
2. For upgrading the 800xA History database from 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1, 800xA
History database must be updated to the 800xA History 6.1 version on the 800xA
5.1 System itself and then take backup which will be restored later on the upgraded
800xA History Server, On how to update the 800xA History database Refer System
800xA History Installation manual (2PAA107280-610*) for update procedure.
3. To update the History database Locally copy the 800xA history media from System
800xA 6.1 media from the the below path:"\Applications\History"
4. After completion of update, follow the steps below to take necessary database
backups:
a. From the Desktop, select and open the RTDB Control Panel > Starting and
Stopping folder.
b. Double-click Stop_RTDB.bat.
c. Type Y in the popup window and press Enter.
Wait for the Database service to stop. After the services are stopped
successfully, a message stating All tables OK will be displayed.
d. Press any key to exit.
e. Copy the Database folders (Application folder and RTDB Data folder), from
database drive, to some other drive or safe location.
f. Copy the Backup folder from backup drive ,to some other drive or safe location

800xA History Archiving


Follow the instructions described in the Information Management section of the
Pre-Upgrade Procedures related to Archive and PAS.
Refer to Pre-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next pre upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 123
2PAA111694-610 A 124
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.1 Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps

4 Post-Upgrade Procedures

The 800xA System and software require steps to be done after performing the upgrade.
Perform the applicable procedures in the order presented based on the installed system.

4.1 Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps


Click the proper link to go directly to the post-upgrade procedure based on the installed
system.
• Verify the Network and RNRP
• Removal of VB Graphics and Obsolete System Extensions
• Compare the Number of Aspects and Objects
• Reconfigure Aspects Created By System Extensions
• Configure Hot key for the New Find Tool
• Correct Alarm and Lock Indication in Faceplates
• IEC 61850 Connect
• Time Server Client Configuration
• Customized Alarm Priority Mapping Aspects
• Reconfigure Group Displays
• VideONet
• Device Management and Fieldbuses
• 800xA for Advant Master and 800xA for Safeguard
• 800xA for AC 100
• 800xA for DCI
• 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony
• 800xA for AC 870P/Melody
• 800xA for MOD 300

2PAA111694-610 A 125
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.1 Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps

• PLC Connect
• Asset Optimization
• PC, Network and Software Monitoring
• PC, Network and Software Monitoring Device Library
• SMS and e-mail Messaging
• Batch Management
• Basic History Service
• Information Management
• Desktop Trends
• Calculations Service
• Scheduling Service (Application Scheduler)
• 800xA for AC 800M
• Control Builder M Projects
• Engineering Studio
• Process Engineering Tool Integration
• Add Autostart Shortcut
• Multisystem Integration
• Load System Extensions
• Changing Aspect Precedence List
• System Backup
• 800xA History
• Application Change Management
• Consistency Check
• Freelance Connect

2PAA111694-610 A 126
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.2 Verify the Network and RNRP

4.2 Verify the Network and RNRP


The procedure below acts as a quick start up guide to verify that the fundamentals in
the computer network is OK. Perform this verification on a node-to-node basis, i.e. every
time a node is upgraded.
• Start the Windows program “RNRP Network Status Tool”, preferable in the upgraded
node.
• Verify the following in the tool:
– All relevant nodes are listed
– All nodes have correct area number, node number and IP address
– Nodes with redundant network connections should have status “Up” both for
Path0 and Path1.

If network issues exist then configure the network according to the documentation made
at pre-upgrade – see section Network including RNRP.
RNRP need to be manually configured for example in the following use cases:
• The IP subnet does not match the RNRP Base address (default 172.16.0.0).
• Max number of hops exceeds three.
• IP forwarding is required.
• A Backbone network area is applied.
• Etc.
For more information about network in general and RNRP in particular see the manual
System 800xA Network Configuration (3BSE034463*).

4.3 Removal of VB Graphics and Obsolete System


Extensions
During upgrade all the standard VB graphics and obsolete system extensions are
unregistered and deleted from the aspect directory. Below are the list of system extensions
which are deleted automatically during the upgrade (as part of restore):
• ABB 800xA Base VB Graphics Extension
• AC800M Connect VB Graphics Extension
• AC800M Classic

2PAA111694-610 A 127
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.3 Removal of VB Graphics and Obsolete System Extensions

• ABB Function Designer for AC800M Classic


• ABB Topology Designer for AC800M Classic
• ABB AC 800MC Signal Extension Classic
• ABB Batch Advanced Templates VB Graphics Extension
• ABB Batch VB Graphics Extension
• ABB 800xA For Freelance VB Graphic Extension
• 800xA for MOD 300 VB Graphics Extension
• ABB 800xA for Advant Master VB Graphics Extension
• ABB 800xA for IEC61850 VB Graphics Extension
• ABB 800xA for Safeguard VB Graphics Extension
• ABB Device Management FOUNDATION Fieldbus VB Graphics Extension
• Harmony VB Graphics
• PLC Connect VB Graphics System Extension
• ABB Asset Optimization VB Graphics System Extension
• ABB DCI VB6 Graphics Extension
• ABB PC Network and Software Monitoring VB Graphics Extension
• ABB 800xA for AC 100 VB Graphics Extension
• PCDeviceVBGraphicsExt
• PCEquipmentLib VB Graphics Extension
• MOD300CCFLibVBGraphics
• VBGraphics for INFI90FCLib
• Minerals Library VB Process Graphics

2PAA111694-610 A 128
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.3 Removal of VB Graphics and Obsolete System Extensions

Verify that all the VB graphics extensions are removed by performing the following steps
on the Aspect Server:
1. Review the list of all the system extensions under the System extensions aspect
located in Admin Structure > Administrative Objects > Domains > System
name,Domain
2. Review the list of system extensions objects located at Admin Structure >
Administrative Objects > Inventory Object > System Extension,Aspect Type
3. Perform maintenance backup to verify that there are no errors related to the above
listed VB graphics system extensions.
If there are traces of above listed VB graphics system extensions exist in the system
then perform the following to clean the VB graphics system extensions on the Aspect
Server:
1. Navigate to the C:\Program Files (x86)\ABB 800xA\Base\bin location on local
node on 800xA 6.1 or later. For 800xA System 6.0.3 and later the tool is availabe
on the 800xA media in Core Functionalities\Process Portal A\VBPG Removal
2. If running on 800xA 6.0.3 system then, Copy the AfwVBPGRemoval.exe to a location
on the local drive.
3. Navigate to the location of AfwVBPGRemoval.exe on the local drive.
4. Open the Command Prompt as administrator by clicking on File > Open command
prompt > Open command prompt as Administrator.
5. Run the AfwVBPGRemoval.exe from the command prompt (Admin)
6. Enter 'y' to continue.
7. Any pending traces of VB graphics elements and displays will be cleaned. Any
remaining VB graphics system extensions will be removed.
8. Repeat the above steps till you have everything cleaned up.
VB graphic aspects in user defined libraries and applications will not be automatically
removed in order to avoid broken references if PG2 graphics still refer to them. The
VB graphics aspects contents will be cleaned and made empty, leaving a blank aspect.
Those aspects can be removed from the system using Find tool by searching for
each VBPG aspect category provided they are no longer referenced.

2PAA111694-610 A 129
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.4 Compare the Number of Aspects and Objects

4.4 Compare the Number of Aspects and Objects


This topic helps you compare the number of aspects and objects in the system before
the 800xA System Backup and after the 800xA System Restore.
Perform the following procedure to record the number of aspects and objects in the
800xA 6.1 System and compare the number with the 800xA 5.1 System.
1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Use the Structure Selector to open the Admin Structure.
3. Use the Object Browser to navigate to:
Administrative Objects\Domains\system_name, Domain

4. Select Domain Definition in the Aspect List Area.


5. Record the number of objects and aspects listed in the System Size Information
area in the Preview Area.
6. Use the Structure Selector to open the Control Structure.
7. Use the Object Browser to navigate to:
control_network_name, Control Network

of one of the control networks contained in the system.


8. Right-click the Control Structure aspect and select Details.
9. Click the Statistics tab.
10. Record the number of objects listed.

Step 11. through Step 15. are not applicable to systems with only 800xA for Symphony
Plus Harmony.

11. Right-click the Control Structure aspect within a controller project of the control
network selected in Step 7..
12. Select Details from the context menu.
13. Record the number of objects listed.
14. Repeat Step 11. through Step 14. for all the controller projects within the control
network.

2PAA111694-610 A 130
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.4 Compare the Number of Aspects and Objects

15. Repeat Step 7. through Step 14. for every control network in the system.

The number of aspects and objects after system restoration should be in the same
range as those recorded during system backup, although there will likely be more.

16. Use the Object Browser to navigate to:


HSE_Subnet name, HSE Subnet

of one of the HSE Subnets contained in the system.


17. Right-click the Control Structure aspect and select Details.
18. Select the Statistics tab.
19. Record the number of objects listed.
20. Repeat Step 16. through Step 19. for every HSE Subnet in the system.
21. Use the Object Browser to navigate to:
MB300 name, MB300 Network

of one of the MB 300 Networks contained in the system.


22. Right-click the Control Structure aspect and then click Details.
23. Click the Statistics tab.
24. Record the number of objects listed.
25. Repeat Step 21. through Step 24. for every MB300 network in the system.
The number of aspects and objects after system restoration must be in the same
range as those recorded during system backup, although there will be a few more
aspects and objects recorded in the 800xA 6.1 System.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 131
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.5 Reconfigure Aspects Created By System Extensions

4.5 Reconfigure Aspects Created By System Extensions


A system upgrade may overwrite the modifications done to certain aspects created by
System Extensions. You may need to reapply the modifications based on the previous
system information. The aspects that are overwritten will be included in the Configuration
Wizard log, which is generated during an upgrade.
To reapply the configuration settings to the aspects created by System Extensions:
1. Identify the aspects that are modified using the Configuration Wizard log generated
during the system upgrade. Figure 4.1 shows an example of the Configuration Wizard
log that contains information about the aspects that are overwritten during the
upgrade.

Figure 4.1: Configuration Wizard Log

2. Use the Aspect Directory node retained from the 800xA 5.1 System to know the
configuration changes that were overwritten during the upgrade. With the help of
the Find tool and the GUID obtained from the Configuration Wizard log, navigate to
the modified aspects in the 800xA 5.1 System.

2PAA111694-610 A 132
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.6 Configure Hot key for the New Find Tool

3. Analyze the aspects in the 800xA 5.1 System for any modifications. Based on the
analysis, redo the same modifications in the 800xA 6.1 System, if required.
Not all modifications to the aspects listed in the Configuration Wizard log need
to be reapplied after an upgrade. You can ignore certain messages such as the
following, if listed in the Configuration Wizard log:
Tue Aug 26 02:11:37 2014: [Object Type Structure]Object Types/Control
System/AC 800M\
/C Connect/CBM_Signals/CBM_DINTOS:
Function Parameters {5090672F-82AD-4D4D-BEE1-E134ADB1455A}:
{471E37E4-8ABA-4B0F-81D4-7FFFBD762E8D}

Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending


on the installed system.

4.6 Configure Hot key for the New Find Tool


Perform the following procedure to configure the Ctrl + F hot key for the Find Tool:
1. Open Hot keys aspect for any workplace in the workplace structure.
2. Select Ctrl + F hot key in the hot keys list and then remove.
3. Add the hot key by entering the combination Ctrl + F in the hot key area with context
global and with Action Execute Verb.
4. In Aspect, navigate to the Global verbs aspect in the Web system workplace.
5. From Verb select Show_FindTool. Add the newly Configured Find Tool Hot key in
the hot keys list aspect.

The Ctrl+F Hotkey configuration for the New Find Tool need not have to be performed
while upgrading from 5.1 Rev E or 5.1 FP4 Rev E to later versions.

Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending


on the installed system.

4.7 Correct Alarm and Lock Indication in Faceplates


To correct Alarm and Lock indication in Faceplates, perform the following on Primary
Aspect Server node:
1. Open Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Navigate to: Graphics Structure > Graphics Tools VB6 > Special

2PAA111694-610 A 133
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.8 IEC 61850 Connect

3. Delete AlarmControl aspect of Aspect Category Graphic Element.


4. Delete LockControl aspect of Aspect Category Graphic Element.

Figure 4.2: Correct Alarm and Lock indication in Faceplates

Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending


on the installed system.

4.8 IEC 61850 Connect


Upgrade CET Project from System 800xA 5.1 to System 800xA 6.x
To upgrade CET OPC Server Project Backup to new version, perform the following:
1. From CET Menu, click File > Open / Manage Project.
2. In Open / Manage Project dialog, click Import Project.
3. Browse *.pcmp file for CET OPC Server Project backup to be imported.
4. In Open / Manage Project dialog, select the desired project under Projects listed
with previous product versions.
5. Click Open Project.
6. In Project Conversion Wizard dialog, click Next.
7. In Select Version dialog, select new version and click Ok.

For revision release, the Select Version window will list versions 3.x.

2PAA111694-610 A 134
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.8 IEC 61850 Connect

8. Click Next and wait until the project conversion is complete.


9. Click Finish to initiate the CET OPC Server project conversion.
10. Import CET Event Categories.
If the CET project has been upgraded from System 800xA 5.1 FP4 or later Feature
Packs, then ignore the Step a through Step d below regarding importing of CET Event
Categories.
The CET Event Categories are not available in the upgraded project in CET version
6.0.x. To import the CET Event Categories, perform the following:
a. In the CET Tool, Open the upgraded Project.
b. Open Event Template Tool from Computer Node context Menu.
c. Click Open Template and then browse ...\Program Files (x86) \ABB\61850 OPC
Server to import CETEventCategories.xml.
d. Ensure the Overwrite existing Definitions in import option is selected during
import.
This will update only default Event Classes with Event categories. Condition category
and Simple Event category of User Defined Event Classes should be updated
accordingly by the user.
11. Perform the following Update/Reload of the upgraded project in CET Tool.
a. Right-click on Computer Node.
b. Select Management.
c. Click Update & reload configuration.
12. Restart IEC 61850 Connectivity Server Node.
13. Perform the following steps after Primary and secondary IEC 61850 Connectivity
servers are restarted.
a. In Plant Explorer Workplace, navigate to Service Structure > Event Collector,
Service.
b. Perform an Upload for all IEC61850 Alarm and Event Service Groups.
c. Navigate to Library Structure > Alarm & Event > Alarm Collection Definitions,
Alarm Collection Definition.
d. Verify all IEC61850 Alarm Collection Definition Objects.
If any Category Group is uncategorized, then manually categorize the group
using respective Alarm Collection Definition Aspect.

2PAA111694-610 A 135
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.9 Time Server Client Configuration

Refresh IEC 61850 OPC DA Service providers :


In 800xA Service Structure, the IEC 61850 OPC DA Service providers need to be
refreshed because when performing CET Project Upgrade & Update / Reload, the new
OPC instance created has different GUID.
Go to 800xA Service Structure => IEC 61850 OPC DA Service Provider => Special
Configuration tab => OPC Server Identity, ProgID => click Refresh button => From the
dropdown, select the correct IEC 61850 OPC DA Service instance => click Apply button.
Go to IEC 61850 OPC DA Service Provider => Configuration tab => uncheck Enabled
checkbox => click Apply => check Enabled checkbox => click Apply button.
Repeat the procedure for all IEC 61850 OPC DA Service providers.
External IEC61850 Tools Project/Configuration Restore :
The Project/Configuration Restore procedure of applicable ABB or 3rd Party IEC61850
Engineering tools external to 800xA (Eg. IET/CCT, CCT600, IET600 and PCM 600
or other 3rd party tools) are not described in this manual. Refer to respective Product
manuals for the same.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

4.9 Time Server Client Configuration


Navigate to the aspect server node objects in Node Administration Structure. View
the Time Server Client Configuration aspect on the aspect server node objects. Change
the configuration of the checkboxes to the values noted down in the Pre-upgrade steps.

Figure 4.3: Time Server Client Configuration aspect

2PAA111694-610 A 136
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.10 Customized Alarm Priority Mapping Aspects

Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending


on the installed system.

4.10 Customized Alarm Priority Mapping Aspects


Some customized Alarm Priority Mapping Aspects may have been overwritten during
the upgrade. Recreate the Alarm Priority Mapping Aspects using the data recorded
during Customized Alarm Priority Mapping Aspects in Pre-Upgrade Procedures.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

4.11 Reconfigure Group Displays


New Group Display aspects that are created and configured in the Object Type Structure
on the object types and instances in System 800xA 5.1 will work correctly even if there
is more than one aspect with the same name but each aspect has a different Aspect
Category.
Configured Group Display aspects that existed in the Object Type Structure and on
the object types and instances in System 800xA 5.1 should have their Aspect Categories
reconfigured for the aspects to display correctly. (This is required for the reference to an
aspect to be stored along with its Category ID.)
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

4.12 VideONet
After upgrading from System 800xA 5.1 Feature Pack 4 Rev E, or lower versions, to
System 800xA 6.1, existing video recording configuration will be lost and have to be
reconfigured using the VideONet Videoserver application. Refer to VideONet History
Manual for information on configuration of recordings.
All 800xA nodes used to display video must have the video codec installed. Refer to
VideONet Connect for 800xA User Manual (2PAA109407*) for information on how to
install the video codec.

4.12.1 Upgrade VideONet Videoserver


1. If working in a domain this server must be removed from the Domain Controller.
2. Reformat the hard drive.

2PAA111694-610 A 137
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses

3. Install the new operating system defined for the 800xA 6.1 System.

Make sure that the upgraded VideONet server node uses the same IP address as
before the upgrade.

4. Refer to VideONet Connect for 800xA User Manual (2PAA109407*) for information
on how to install the VideONet server node.
5. Restart the VideONet server node.

4.12.2 Upgrade VideONet Connect Database


1. On a client node, open a Plant Explorer Workplace and go to the [Control
Structure]Root/Video Network object and bring up the VideONet Database aspect
view.
2. Click Export and go to the <800xA Installation path>\ABB
800xA\Base\Extensions\VideONet
Connect\VnClient\VideONet_DatabaseConversion folder.
3. Type the file name vndb_51.db and click Save.
4. Make sure that the vndb_51.db file is not write protected.
5. Create a copy of the vndb_51.db file.
6. Start a command window (Run as administrator) and go to the
VideONet_DatabaseConversion folder.
7. Run the command, Convert_VideONet_DB_v11.0_to_v11.1.bat vndb_51.db.
The output in the command window should be Success!.
8. Click Import in the VideONet Database aspect view and select the updated
vndb_51.db file and click Open.
9. Click Apply in the VideONet Database aspect view.
The VideONet database is updated.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedures to go to the next post upgrade step depending on
the installed system.

4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses


Ensure that all the DLW Services in the DLW Server (Primary Aspect Server) are started
in 800xAService account.

2PAA111694-610 A 138
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses

Figure 4.4: DLW Services on Primary Aspect Server

4.13.1 Restore Device Types


Third party software, such as Device Type Managers for the Device Type must be
reinstalled because the hard drive of the 800xA System node has been reformatted.
The following steps for Fieldbus Device Types need to be carried out on the Primary
Aspect Server node.
Starting with System 800xA 6.1, the restore of the Device Types must be done only
on the Primary Aspect Server node. The Device Types will be copied to the clients
after the restoration is complete on the Primary Aspect Server node.
If the system contains FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device Types, check the following
before proceeding to the next step:
• Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
• Use the Structure Selector to open the Object Type Structure > FF Libraries.
• Check to see if there is more than one entry of FF H1 Device Library, FF
Object Type Group.

• If there is more than one entry, perform FF Upload once so there is only one
instance of FF H1 Device Library, FF Object Type Group present. If there
is only one entry, proceed to the next step using the Device Library Wizard.

2PAA111694-610 A 139
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses

1. Start the Device Library Wizard. Select:


ABB Start Menu > ABB System 800xA > Device Mgmt > ABB Device Library
Wizard
If the Device Library Wizard - Client has not been connected to the Device Library
Wizard - Server, navigate first to:
Device Library Wizard Administration > Connect Client
and follow the Device Library Wizard Procedure.
2. Select the Enable Trace File check box as shown in Figure 4.5.

Figure 4.5: Enabling the Trace File

3. Click Main Menu to open the main menu of the Device Library Wizard.
4. Navigate to Device Type Administration > System Restore Wizard

2PAA111694-610 A 140
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses

5. Select the second option in the System Restore Wizard(1) as shown in Figure 4.6
and click Next.

Figure 4.6: System Restore Wizard (1)

6. Select the first option in the System Restore Wizard(2) as shown in Figure 4.7 and
click Next.

Figure 4.7: System Restore Wizard (2)

2PAA111694-610 A 141
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses

7. Enter the path to the device types in the next screen in the wizard as shown in Figure
4.8, and click Next.

Figure 4.8: Path to Device Types

8. Click Next to confirm the extract of device types as shown in Figure 4.9.

Figure 4.9: Device Types to be Extracted - Confirmation Dialog

2PAA111694-610 A 142
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses

9. Click Next on the Selection Summary screen as shown in Figure 4.10.

Figure 4.10: Device Types to be Extracted - Selection Summary

2PAA111694-610 A 143
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses

10. Click Next to re-install the device types as shown in Figure 4.11.

Figure 4.11: Re-install Device Types

11. Click Finish to complete the procedure to extract and re-install device types on the
Primary Aspect Server as shown in Figure 4.12.

Figure 4.12: Selection Summary

2PAA111694-610 A 144
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses

The device types on the Primary Aspect Server can be transferred to the client nodes
in one of the following two ways:
• Device types installed in Device Library Wizard server gets automatically copied to
client node on invoking the Device Library Wizard as shown in the Figure 4.13.

Figure 4.13: Synchronizing Device Types in Client

• Using the Synchronize option in the Device Library Wizard Administration window
as shown in the Figure 4.14.

Figure 4.14: Object Type Transfer Progress

2PAA111694-610 A 145
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses

4.13.2 Device Management PROFIBUS & HART


AC800M Connect and AC800M High Integrity system extensions must be loaded
before loading PROFIBUS Device Integration Library - Basic and HART Device
Integration Library - Basic system extension. Therefore, install AC800M Connect and
AC800M high Integrity also when installing Device Management PROFIBUS and
HART.

Compressing Aspect Data


After the system upgrade, perform the following to compress the aspect data using the
Data Compression Tool:
1. Double-click and open the Data Compression Tool from the following location:
C:\Program Files(x86)\ABBIndustrialIT\EngineerIT\FieldbusBuilder
\bin\DMAspectDataCompression.exe
The Data Compression Tool is opened as shown in Figure 4.15.

The callouts in Figure 4.15 represent the corresponding steps in this procedure.

Figure 4.15: Data Compression Tool

2. Select Control Network on the Data Compression Tool.


3. Expand the Control Network group and select a project or a controller from the list.

2PAA111694-610 A 146
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses

4. Click BrowsePath to browse and select a folder location to save the .csv file.
5. Click Compress to compress the aspect data.
A message will be displayed stating the actual number of device instances in the
project and the actual number of device instances that are compressed using the
tool as shown in Figure 4.16.

Figure 4.16: Data Compression Details Message

The Data written successfully in the following path: <path specified in Step 4.> will
be displayed at the bottom of the tool upon successful completion of aspect data
compression as shown in Figure 4.17.

Figure 4.17: Successful Completion of Device Types Compression

6. Click Exit.

2PAA111694-610 A 147
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses

OPC Server PROFIBUS & HART


After system upgrade,in some cases the PH OPCDA service provider might switch to
error state . In such case please restart PH OPCDA service provider by
disabling/re-enabling it. For more information on configuration of PROFIBUS & HART
devices (Fieldbus Builder PROFIBUS/HART, OPC Server, DTM’s and Device Type
Objects in 800xA), refer to System 800xA Device Management PROFIBUS & HART
Configuration (3BDD011934*) manual.

This step must be performed after project upgrade as mentioned in 800xA for AC
800M Post-upgrade procedures.

2PAA111694-610 A 148
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses

4.13.3 License Count Tool


After the system upgrade, the licenses required for the device types in the new system
must be checked and verified. Perform the following to count and verify the licenses for
the device types in the system:
1. Run the License Count Tool from the following location:
C:\Program Files(x86)\ABBIndustrialIT\EngineerIT\FieldbusBuilder
\bin\LicenseCounting.exe
2. On the License Counting wizard, expand the Root element, select the Control
Network, and then click Count License as shown in Figure 4.18.

Figure 4.18: License Count Tool Wizard

If there is more than one control network, you need to individually select the network
and click Count License to know the number of licenses used per control network.

A message stating the number of device type instances in the system and the number
of licenses required is displayed as shown in the Figure 4.19.

2PAA111694-610 A 149
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses

Figure 4.19: License Count Message

2PAA111694-610 A 150
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses

3. Perform the following to verify the number of licenses used in the system:
a. Open a Plant Explorer workplace.
b. Use the structure selector to select the Control Structure.
c. Click Root and select License Usage in the Aspect List area.
d. Check the number of licenses used in the system for the 800xA FIELDBUS
Profibus and Hart feature. Refer to Figure 4.20 for more information.

Figure 4.20: License Usage Aspect in Control Structure

The number of licenses displayed by the License Count Tool and the number displayed
against the License Usage aspect in the Control Structure must be the same.

4.13.4 Device Management FOUNDATION Fieldbus


Do not change the IP address of the OPC server FF during the online plant update.
Changing the HSE IP address of the PC changes the HSE Default Gateway entry in
the HSE subnet network configuration dialog, which in turn reboots all CI860 at
subsequent configuration downloads.

2PAA111694-610 A 151
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses

Perform the following to complete updating Device Management FOUNDATION Fieldbus.


1. Update LD 800HSE Linking Devices: Update all LD 800HSE linking devices to
the latest firmware version released for this system environment following the update
procedure described in the user instructions for the particular device.
Refer to Field IT, Foundation Fieldbus Linking Device, LD 800HSE, Version Table
(3BDS009910) in ABB Library and myABB/My Control System portal for the latest
linking device firmware released for this system environment.
From Downloads Explorer, navigate to:
Control Products and Systems/800xA/Device Management Foundation
Fieldbus/Foundation Fieldbus Linking Device LD 800HSE
2. Check, Save, and Upload FF Libraries:
a. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
b. Use the Structure Selector to open the Object Type Structure.
c. Use the Object Browser to navigate to:
FF Libraries, Object Type Group

d. Select FF Management in the Aspect List Area.


e. Click Open Project.
f. Check the libraries for plausibility.
g. Exit Fieldbus Builder FF and save changes if prompted to do so.
h. Return to the Plant Explorer Workplace and select FF Upload in the Aspect
List Area.
i. If the traffic light symbol shows red, click Upload.
The green traffic light symbol indicates that the FF libraries have been
synchronized.

2PAA111694-610 A 152
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses

3. Optional: Reconstruct User-made Changes to Library Objects representing FF


Standard Blocks:

This step is only required if changes were made to library objects representing FF
standard blocks.

During upgrade, user-made changes to library objects representing FF standard


blocks have been overwritten. Important substitutions have been logged.
a. If such changes were made, display the substitutions as follows:
• Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
• Use the Structure Selector to open the Object Type Structure.
• Use the Object Browser to navigate to:
FF Libraries, Object Type Group

• Select FF Upload in the Aspect List Area.


• Select Library Merge Logger tab and read the log.
i. For reconstructing user-made changes, reapply the changes to the
library objects manually.

2PAA111694-610 A 153
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.13 Device Management and Fieldbuses

4. Check, Save, Commission, and Upload the HSE Subnet.

Perform the following procedure for each HSE Subnet.

a. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.


b. Use the Structure Selector to open the Control Structure.
c. Use the Object Browser to navigate to:
HSE Subnet

d. Select FF Management in the Aspect List Area.


e. Click Open Project.
f. Check to see if the configured HSE subnet ID is used for the OPC Server FF
configuration in FF Network > Properties and modify it if required.
g. Check whole project for plausibility.
h. If required, perform device assignment for all linking devices LD 800HSE.
Typically, no device assignment is lost during the upgrade.
i. If required, perform pre-commissioning/commissioning for all objects for which
this is necessary (discernible from engineering status). A pre-commissioning
may be required if the firmware has been changed.

To assign all H1 devices in one step, use the Assign all devices function from the
HSE Subnet context menu: Object > Assign all devices...

For downloading use the online dialog from the HSE Subnet context menu: Object >
Online Dialog...

j. Exit Fieldbus Builder FF and save changes if prompted to do so.


k. Return to the Plant Explorer Workplace and select FF Upload in the Aspect
List Area.
l. If the traffic light symbol shows red, click Upload HSE Subnet.
The green traffic light symbol indicates that the HSE Subnet has been
synchronized.

2PAA111694-610 A 154
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.14 800xA for Advant Master and 800xA for Safeguard

5. In some cases the HSE OPCDA service provider may switch to error state during
upgrade with error 0x8abb1440. In this case simply restart the HSE OPCDA service
provider by disabling/re-enabling the provider.
For more information on configuration of FF devices refer to System 800xA Device
Management FOUNDATION Fieldbus Configuration (3BDD012902*) manual.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

4.14 800xA for Advant Master and 800xA for Safeguard


Perform the following post upgrade procedures for 800xA for Advant Master and 800xA
for Safeguard.
• Copy the Advant Master Controller Licenses.txt.
• Update the Configuration Files
• Copy the DATHR Files.
• Reconfigure RTA Board Control Aspect Settings .

4.14.1 Copy the Advant Master Controller Licenses.txt


Perform the following on the Primary Aspect Server in the 800xA 6.1 System:
• Copy the following updated file from the safe location:
Advant Master Controller Licenses.txt

to the default location in the 800xA 6.1 System:


...\Program Files (x86)\ABB 800xA\AC 400 Connect\Licenses

4.14.2 Update the Configuration Files


For each Connectivity Server, compare the following files saved in a safe location during
the 800xA for Advant Master pre upgrade phase:
• AdvDsMasterAdapter.csv
• AdvMbAeOPCServer.csv
with the installed version of the files at the following location:
...\Program Files (x86)\ABB 800xA\AC 400 Connect\Bin.
If any customization was done to the old files, update the installed version of the files
with the corresponding changes.

2PAA111694-610 A 155
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.14 800xA for Advant Master and 800xA for Safeguard

4.14.3 Copy the DATHR Files


Perform the following on each Connectivity Server node:
1. Copy the saved files from the safe location:
• DATHR1.CD
• DATHR2.CD
• DATHR3.CD
to the following folder in the Connectivity Server:
...\ProgramData\ABB\AC400Connect\AdvantBase\Data\ RTA\Init\

4.14.4 Reconfigure RTA Board Control Aspect Settings


If the RTA board IP is configured different than the default IP (172.16.168.50), change
the RTA board IP in the registry of Advant Connectivity Server before proceeding.
Path: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE > SYSTEM > CurrentControlSet > Services > PU410
> Parameters > slvBoard
Change the IP in string IpAddress.
1. Open the MB 300 RTA Settings dialog box in Configuration Wizard and reconfigure:
• MB 300 Node and Network Numbers.
• Check 800xA as Clock Master (REVERSED_SYNC_MODE) in case the time
synchronization key REVERSED_SYNC_MODE was previously enabled.
2. If redundant cables are supervised between PU410 and the computer.
a. Open Plant Explorer Workplace.
b. Navigate to RTA Board Control aspect in: Control Structure > MB300 Network
> MB300 RTA Board (Of upgraded Advant Connectivity Server node)
c. Check PU410 redundant cable supervision option.

2PAA111694-610 A 156
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.15 800xA for AC 100

3. Always restart the RTA board.


4. The Audible property must be 0 for events and 1 for alarms 800xA for Advant Master
version 4.1 SP1 RU6 and newer. Refer to System 800xA Configuration
(3BDS011222*) for configuration of audible alarms.
Safeguard standard event 300 - 326 does not comply with this rule before 800xA
for 800xA for Advant Master Version 5.0 SP2. The Event numbers where the Audible
property should be changed from 1 to 0 are:
• EVENT302.
• EVENT305.
• EVENT310.
• EVENT312.
• EVENT320.
• EVENT321.
• EVENT322.
• EVENT325.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

4.15 800xA for AC 100


Perform the following post upgrade procedure for 800xA for AC 100:

4.15.1 Configuration and Operation


All software products for using the Advant Controller 100 Series in an 800xA System are
now installed and ready to use. Refer to 800xA for AC 100 Configuration and Operation
(3BDS013989*) for more information on configuration and operation; for example,
procedures to connect an 800xA System to an AC 100 OPC Server. Refer to the Data
Access topic in System 800xA Configuration (3BDS011222*) to connect via DCOM,
and to use the DCOMCNFG tool to set the DCOM security setting.

2PAA111694-610 A 157
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.15 800xA for AC 100

4.15.2 Time Synchronization and Daylight Saving Time


There are a number of ways to configure the clock synchronization for an Advant Fieldbus
100 network along with a network of System 800xA products. The Advant Fieldbus 100
network has its own clock synchronization. Refer to Advant Fieldbus User Manual
(3BSE000506*) for functionality and configuration details, and in the corresponding
reference manual for the data base elements of each controller.
A System 800xA network consists of one or several servers and a number of clients
connected via TCP/IP. Synchronization of that network of servers and clients in itself is
supported by the 800xA System. This is described in System 800xA Administration and
Security (3BSE037410*). One clock server synchronizes the other servers and clients
in the network.
The AC 100 OPC Server can function as the time master or as a slave versus the Advant
Fieldbus 100 network.
The information in the remainder of this topic represents the recommended Configuration.
All servers and clients in an Advant Fieldbus 100 network must be configured to the
same time zone and must be time synchronized.
It is recommended that you set-up an 800xA Connectivity Server, that hosts the AC 100
OPC Server, as time master. It will be time master both for the System 800xA network
as well as for the Advant Fieldbus 100 network.
Any adjustment of the network time is done (from the time server) using the Windows
Date and Time dialog box in the Windows Control Panel.
To set up the 800xA System for such a configuration:
1. Set up the selected server node as the time server. If there are several server nodes,
set up the others to request the correct time from the time server.
2. Set up all the workstation nodes to accept the clock synchronization.
3. Make sure that the Automatically adjust clock for Daylight Saving Time setting
is selected is set on all server and workstation nodes.
4. Set the time synchronization of the AC 100 OPC Server to Master according to the
instructions in AC 100 OPC Server Configuration and Operation (3BDS013988*).
5. Set the time synchronization of other Advant OPC Servers for Advant Fieldbus 100
to None according to the instructions in AC 100 OPC Server Configuration and
Operation (3BDS013988*).
6. Those nodes will collect their time from the time server.

2PAA111694-610 A 158
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.15 800xA for AC 100

The result of this solution is as follows for time tagged data:


• Alarm data and Historical data are stored according to UTC time. The local time
does not matter.
• Alarm and History data presentation manages the presentation of data with the local
time.

4.15.3 Installation Verification (Optional)


After performing the software and hardware installation, it is recommended that you
verify that the AC 100 OPC Server has been properly installed. To accomplish this:
1. Check that the AC 100 OPC Server utilities are available from the Start menu. Select:
ABB Start Menu > ABB Advant Master > AC 100 OPC Server > About AC 100
OPC Server

For more information on ABB Start Menu, refer to System 800xA Tools
(2PAA101888*).

2. Select:
Control Panel > Programs and Features
to view if ABB AC 100 OPC Server is properly listed here.

2PAA111694-610 A 159
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.15 800xA for AC 100

3. Check the Windows Device Manager (Figure 4.21) and make sure that the CI527A
device and driver are working properly.
a. The Device Manager is started by: Control Panel > Device Manager
b. To find the CI527A Driver select: View > Devices by type
c. Expand the AF100 icon.

Figure 4.21: Device Manager

d. Right-click ABB AF100 CI527A - PNP and then click Properties to open the
ABB AF100 CI527 - PnP Properties dialog box.
e. In the Details tab, select Device instance path in the Property drop-down (Figure
4.22) to find the correct version of the CI527A Hardware IDs: This must contain
DEV_0862 as shown in Figure 4.22.

2PAA111694-610 A 160
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.15 800xA for AC 100

Figure 4.22: CI527A Version Information

4. Verify that the services


• ABB AC 100 CI52X Manager
– ABB AC 100 OPC Server
– ABB AC 100 VFI Server
are listed and running by selecting:
Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services
5. Use the Details tab in Windows Task Manager to verify that the following processes
are running, and that the User name is 800xA Service account:
• wiaopc.exe
– wiaci526.exe
– wivserver.exe

2PAA111694-610 A 161
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.15 800xA for AC 100

4.15.4 Product Verification


After performing the initial configuration of the AC 100 OPC Server, it is recommended
that you verify that the software has been properly configured and that the system has
contact with the Advant Fieldbus 100 network. To do this:
1. Verify that the About OPC Server box is shown correctly by starting the About AC
100 OPC Server dialog box (Figure 4.23):
ABB Start Menu > ABB Advant Master > AC 100 OPC Server > About AC 100
OPC Server

Figure 4.23: About AC 100 OPC Server Dialog Box

2PAA111694-610 A 162
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.15 800xA for AC 100

2. Verify that the board is operational and all stations are reachable by viewing the AF
100 Diagnostics dialog box (Figure 4.24). For more information about the Diagnostics
function, refer to AC 100 OPC Server Configuration and Operation (3BDS013988*).
Select:
ABB Start Menu > ABB Advant Master > AC 100 OPC Server > AF 100
Diagnostics

Figure 4.24: AF 100 Diagnostics Dialog Box

2PAA111694-610 A 163
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.16 800xA for DCI

3. Check Windows Event Viewer to ensure that no fatal errors are reported from the
ABB AC 100 OPC Server. Select:
Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Event Viewer > Windows Logs >
Application
4. If the recommended verifications show problems, check the hardware of the CI527A
by doing the following:
a. Check that the green P (power) is lit.
b. Check that the yellow RX (receive) LED is lit (if other stations on the Advant
Fieldbus 100 network are up and running).
c. When the Advant Fieldbus 100 Interface is started, check that the yellow TX
(transmit) LED starts to blink.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

4.16 800xA for DCI


4.16.1 Deleting Additional Control Network
1. Delete the newly created DCI Control Network Object.
a. Open Plant Explorer Workplace.
b. Navigate to Control Structure > Root.
c. Identify and delete the newly created DCI Control Network object.
Newly created object will have the name in format: DCI%DciOpcDaID%, Symphony
DCI OPC Server Network.

2PAA111694-610 A 164
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.16 800xA for DCI

Figure 4.25: Deleting newly created DCI Control Network Object

4.16.2 Configure a Single NIC Interface to the DCU


The DCI control network must be Class A (127.0.0.0 or less) and must have a subnet
mask of 255.0.0.0.

AbbDciSelectNetwork modifies the registry. You must have Administrative rights to


use this program.

Most 800xA for DCI installations use the ABB ECC MUX to communicate with Distributed
Control Unit (DCU) controllers in order to take advantage of the redundant network.
However, a single NIC may be used to communicate with the DCUs if redundancy is not
an issue. If a single NIC is used, then it must be designated as the one used for the DCI
Control Network (CNET) as follows:

2PAA111694-610 A 165
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.16 800xA for DCI

If the ABB ECC MUX Redundant Ethernet driver has not been installed, configure the
path for the network services by performing the following steps:
1. Select:
ABB Start Menu > ABB System 800xA > DCI > ABB DCI Select Network

For more information on ABB Start Menu, refer to System 800xA Tools
(2PAA101888*).

The AbbDciSelectNetwork dialog box will appear (Figure 4.26). An X in the first
row indicates that no network is selected.

Figure 4.26: ABB DCI Select Network Dialog Box

2. Choose the network that 800xA for DCI will use by clicking on the row of the desired
network adapter.

Choose the network by IP address. The physical name is provided for help in the
Description column.

3. Click OK. The network is now selected.


4. Restart the node to activate the selection.
5. The next time the network service is run, it will automatically default to the last chosen
network. If desired, repeat Step 1. through Step 4. to choose a new network.

4.16.3 Enable DCI OPC AE Service Group(s)


1. Open Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Navigate to Service Structure > Event Collector, Service and expand it.

2PAA111694-610 A 166
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.17 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony

3. Select the DCI AE Service Group(s).


4. Select Enabled check box, if it is not already checked.
5. Click Apply.

Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending


on the installed system.

4.17 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony


4.17.1 Harmony API Configuration
The Harmony API software is installed on every Harmony Connectivity Server during
Deploy.

2PAA111694-610 A 167
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.17 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony

To configure Harmony API, run the Harmony API Configuration utility on each Harmony
Connectivity Server node.
1. Double-click the shortcut on the Windows Apps Screen created during installation.
It is listed in ABB Symphony Plus.
2. Click Help to view the ICI to Computer Interface Setup guide provided with the
HarmonyAPI. Follow the instructions in the guide to configure the Harmony API for
the ICI type present on the node.

Figure 4.27: Harmony API Configuration Dialog Box

4.17.2 Harmony Configuration Server Information


Use the following procedure to upload the 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony
Configuration Server Information that was saved during the 800xA for Symphony Plus
Harmony Pre-Upgrade phase into the Aspect Directory.
1. Open the Plant Explorer window and navigate to the Harmony OPC Server Network
object in the Control Structure.
2. Select the Uploader aspect.

2PAA111694-610 A 168
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.17 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony

3. If the Area, Unit, and Equipment attributes were configured in the system prior to
upgrade, on the Settings tab enable "Import Functional Structure Assignments".
4. On the Import tab, select Browse, and navigate to the location of the Harmony
ConfigServer Export file that contains the tags for the Harmony Server object
assigned to this Harmony OPC Server Network object.
5. Select the Tag Table for the primary Harmony Server tag object associated with
the Harmony OPC Server Network object.
6. Select Start Import.
7. Repeat Step 1. through Step 6. for each Harmony OPC Server Network object in
the system.

2PAA111694-610 A 169
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.17 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony

4.17.3 Restart Connectivity Server


After the upload of the 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Configuration Server
Information, perform the following procedure to restart the Connectivity Servers:
1. Open Plant Explorer and navigate to Service Structure > Services > Harmony
Executive, Service > Basic, Service Group > Harmony Executive Service
Provider.
2. Select the Service Provider Definition aspect as shown in Figure 4.28.

Figure 4.28: Restart of Harmony Executive Service

3. Click the Configuration tab and clear the Enabled check box.
4. Click Apply and wait for the current status of the service to change to Undefined.
5. Select the Enabled check box and wait for the current status of the service to change
to Service.

2PAA111694-610 A 170
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.17 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony

4.17.4 Remove Harmony Configuration Server


From System Version 6.0 onwards, the 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Configuration
Server nodes are no longer required. If the system being upgraded contained any
standalone 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Configuration Servers, use the following
procedure to remove the Harmony Executive Service Providers for those nodes:
1. Open Plant Explorer and navigate to Service Structure > Services > Harmony
Executive, Service > Basic, Service Group.
2. Select the Harmony Executive Service Provider configured for the standalone
Harmony Configuration Server node.
3. Press the Delete key or right-click the object and select Delete.
4. Click OK when the Delete Object dialog is displayed.
5. Repeat Step 1. through Step 4. for each previously configured standalone 800xA
for Symphony Plus Harmony Configuration Server node.

4.17.5 Remove Harmony Server Monitor


The optional Harmony Server Monitor is no longer used in 800xA for Symphony Plus
Harmony. If configured, the Harmony Server Monitor object and SAC Data Source are
no longer needed and can be removed after the upgrade. To remove them:
1. In Plant Explorer, navigate to the Control Structure.
2. Right click on the Harmony Server Monitor object located under Root, Domain,
and select Delete. The name of this object will be whatever was selected when this
object was created and configured.
3. A Delete Object dialog will be displayed confirming the delete of the object and it’s
children. Select OK.
4. Navigate to the Service Structure.
5. Expand the Server Aspect Controller, Service object and select the Service Group
that was created for the Harmony Server Monitor. The name of this Server Aspect
Controller Server Group will be whatever was selected when this Service Group
was created and configured.
6. Right click and select Delete.
7. A Delete Object dialog will be displayed confirming the delete of the object and it’s
children. Select OK.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 171
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.18 800xA for AC 870P/Melody

4.18 800xA for AC 870P/Melody


Restore existing backups for project specific changes (if available) for: (Refer to 800xA
for AC 870P/Melody in Pre-Upgrade Procedures for more information.)
• DHCP Server Configuration.
• ETC Host files for 800xA for AC 870P/Melody Connectivity Servers.
• Changes in the Default Object Types.
• ConvDB changes of the Configuration Server.
Perform the following post upgrade procedures for 800xA for AC 870P/Melody.
• Restore 800xA for AC 870P/Melody Information.
• Additional 800xA for AC 870P/Melody Configuration Steps.

4.18.1 Restore 800xA for AC 870P/Melody Information


Perform the following procedure to restore 800xA for AC 870P/Melody information:
1. Log in to the 800xA Installing User account (or the 800xA Service account) on the
Configuration Server node.
2. Restore the 800xA for AC 870P/Melody Configuration information that was saved
during 800xA for AC 870P/Melody in Pre-Upgrade Procedures..
a. Select Restore Configuration from the Start Menu.
b. Click Connect in the Melody Connect Configuration Backup/Restore window.
c. Click Browse and select the Melody Configuration Server database backup
file.
d. Click Restore.
e. If a prompt appears indicating that the system version does not match the
backup version, click OK.
f. If the message Services must be stopped, REBOOT system now then
restart this application! is displayed, restart the node and repeat Step
a. through Step e..
g. Click Exit when the restore operation is complete.
If there are specific faceplates in use (process industries or utilities), the faceplates
must also be upgraded. Refer to the faceplate related documents for further
instructions.

2PAA111694-610 A 172
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.18 800xA for AC 870P/Melody

4.18.2 Additional 800xA for AC 870P/Melody Configuration Steps


Perform the following configuration steps after adding each 800xA for AC 870P/Melody
Connectivity Server to the 800xA System.
Refer to 800xA for AC 870P/Melody Configuration (3BDD011741*) to Configure the
following:
1. Internet Explorer Security Settings.
2. Configure Access Rights.
3. Adjust PNSM configuration.
4. Enable the Melody AutoConfigurator service in Plant Explorer > Service Structure.
If the upgrade of the Melody Connectivity Server and the Melody Configuration Server
were not performed on the same calendar day, there may be a problem with starting
the upgraded Connectivity Server in the 800xA 6.1 System.
The following is the workaround if the upgrade of the servers were not performed on
the same calendar day:
Remove the subscription added to the Configuration Server by performing a backup
of the upgraded Configuration Server before starting the upgraded Connectivity
Server.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 173
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.19 800xA for MOD 300

4.19 800xA for MOD 300


Rename MOD 300 Event Collector Service Group(s) and Service Providers as per the
instructions in Renaming MOD 300 AE Service Group and Service Provider Names.
1. If any of the MOD 300 Connectivity Server RTA board IP Addresses had previously
been changed from the default IP value (172.16.168.50), these changes will need
to be manually applied in the registry of the corresponding MOD 300 Connectivity
Servers before proceeding.
Path: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE > SYSTEM > CurrentControlSet > Services >
PU410 > Parameters > slvBoard
Change the IP in string IpAddress.
2. Reverse_Time synch will be disabled following the re-installation of PAS. If the
Connectivity Server node sets the time on the Real-Time Accelerator Board(RTAB),
Reverse_Time_Synch must be enabled.
a. Select: ABB Start Menu > ABB System 800xA > PAS Management > PAS
Control
b. Click Advanced, advanced options dialog appears.
c. Select Comm Settings to open a new window.
d. Select Enabled from the drop-down menu for Reverse Time Sync.
e. Click OK.
3. If any objects were customized, those changes must be implemented again on
objects delivered with 800xA for MOD 300 Version 6.1.
4. Update the registry settings previously recorded. Refer to 800xA for MOD 300
Configuration (3BUR002417*).
5. If changes were made for Step 1. or Step 2. , restart PAS. Open PAS from:
ABB Start Menu > ABB System 800xA > PAS Management > PAS Control.
From PAS Server Control under Advanced select Stop PAS. When all PAS services
have stopped, select Start PAS.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

4.20 PLC Connect


Perform the following post upgrade procedures for PLC Connect.

2PAA111694-610 A 174
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.20 PLC Connect

4.20.1 Restoring the Pretreat dll


To restore the Pretreat dll:
1. If the PLC Connect Communication Server Pre Treatment function is being used in
the application, copy the Pretreat dll file (Pretreat3.dll or Pretreat4.dll) from the
backup location to the same folder as it was backed up from on the PLC Connect
Connectivity Server. If the default folder is used, that location is:
...\ABB Industrial IT\Operate IT\PLC Connect\Bin
2. Register the Pretreat dll file (refer to System 800xA PLC Connect Configuration
(3BSE035041*) for more information).
3. Restart the PLC Connect Connectivity Server for the changes to take effect.
4. Restore the project and source files for the Pretreat dll.

4.20.2 Update the Sattbus Configuration


Perform the following if the Sattbus protocol is used for any of the controllers:
1. Select the PLC Controller Configuration aspect for the controller that uses Sattbus
protocol and click Edit Driver.
2. Configure the Common System Settings and click OK.
3. Restart the Connectivity Server.

4.20.3 Redeploy the PLC Connect Configuration


To redeploy the PLC Connect configuration:
1. Use the Structure Selector to open the Control Structure in the Plant Explorer
Workplace.
2. Use the Object Browser to navigate to the first Generic Control Network object.
3. Select Deploy in the Aspect List Area.
4. Press the SHIFT key and click Deploy in the Preview Area to ensure that a full
deploy is done.
5. The deploy begins and the progress is displayed in the Preview Area. The deploy
is completed when Deploy ended is displayed.
6. Repeat the procedure for any additional Generic Control Network objects.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 175
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.21 Freelance Connect

4.21 Freelance Connect


All the below steps related to Freelance needs Freelance system offline i.e Online
update of the Freelance OPC and Freelance Engineering tools are not supported.

Perform the following post upgrade procedures for Freelance Connect:


1. Upgrade 800xA system Online/Offline with Freelance Connect selected in System
Configuration Console before deployment
2. Install Freelance OPC 2016 SP1 at the Connectivity Server
3. Configure the Freelance OPC Server resource IDs and its Alias as it were before
the upgrade.
4. Load the "Whole Station" in the Freelance OPC Server Gateway Object in the
Freelance Engineering System in case it displays "Version Error"
5. Upload the event collector special configuration for Freelance in Plant Explorer and
Restart the Event collect Service.
6. Install Freelance Engineering 2016 SP1 at the Engineering Station
7. Upgrade Freelance Controller firmware to 2016 SP1 compatible version manually.

2PAA111694-610 A 176
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.22 Asset Optimization

4.22 Asset Optimization


Use the following procedure after updating Asset Optimization. Perform only the steps
applicable to the system.
1. Asset Monitoring:

Asset Monitoring directories must be restored on every Asset Optimization Server


node defined in the system.

a. If Runtime Asset Monitors are being used in the system, restore the Runtime
Asset Monitor data directory (DeviceRunTimeMSLogicStore) to the following
directory:
...\Program Files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\AssetMonitorEnvironment\Bin
The saved data contains the Runtime Asset Monitor data present at the time of the
save. Use the Runtime Asset Monitor faceplate to reset the Asset Monitors by adding
the lost time to their accumulated run time or with some known values based on other
records. Ignore any alarms occurring during the backup.
b. If XY Profile Deviation Asset Monitors are being used in the system, restore the
XY Profile Deviation Asset Monitor data directory (XY_Reference_Profiles) to
the following directory:
...\Program Files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\AssetMonitorEnvironment\Bin
c. If Counter Check Asset Monitors are being used in the system, restore the
Counter Check Asset Monitors data directory named:
{66E71F7B-90D6-4E62-9881-38388B24CBDF}

from safe media. This directory exists for each AO Server in the system. These
directories are located in:
<install drive>:\OperateITData\AoEng\<AO Server ID>\ AmCat
Where each <AO Server ID> directory represents one AO Server instance from
which the directory:
{66E71F7B-90D6-4E62-9881-38388B24CBDF}

was originally saved from. The <AO Server ID> directory name is formatted as
two consecutive GUIDs, for example:
{F9C150F5-2929-4A12-BC28-E00ED6DB1585}{B925E77F-2A82-41C6-A981-FAB4386D5701}.

2PAA111694-610 A 177
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.22 Asset Optimization

2. Maximo Integration:

ABB Enterprise Connectivity (ECS) must be installed in order to access Maximo


Server.

The Maximo Integration information (Maximo Equipment ID and Maximo Credentials


aspects) must be restored on all Asset Optimization Server nodes. Reference the
Service Structure for the Asset Optimization Server.
a. Refer to System 800xA Asset Optimization Configuration (3BUA000118*) to
configure ECS.
b. If the MxDef files were customized, restore the MxDef files to the following
directory:
...\Program Files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\AOECSConnector\MaximoDef\
Refer to System 800xA Asset Optimization Configuration (3BUA000118*) for
more information on MxDef files.
c. Restore the AOMaximoModel file to the following location if the ECS model was
customized:
...\Program files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\AOECSConnector\ECSDefinitions
d. Ensure that the ABB Maximo Connectivity system extension is loaded.
The pending fault reports residing in the system can be restored to the following
directory structure:
...\OperateITData\OptaoACDs
Restore the entire OptaoACDs folder.

2PAA111694-610 A 178
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.22 Asset Optimization

3. SAP/PM Integration:

ABB Enterprise Connectivity (ECS) must be installed in order to access SAP Server.

The SAP/PM Integration information (SAP Equipment ID and SAP Credentials aspects)
must be restored on all Asset Optimization Server nodes. Reference the Service
Structure for the Asset Optimization Server.
a. Refer to System 800xA Asset Optimization Configuration (3BUA000118*) to
configure ECS.
b. If the SAPDef files were customized, restore the SAPDef files to the following
directory (For 64-bit system, files are located under Program Files (x86)
directory):
...\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\AOECSConnector\SAPPMDef
c. Restore the AOSAPModel file to the following location if the ECS model was
customized (For 64-bit system, files are located under Program Files (x86)
directory):
...\program files\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\Asset
Optimization\AOECSConnector\ECSDefinitions
Refer to System 800xA Asset Optimization Configuration (3BUA000118*) for
more information on SAPDef files.
d. Ensure that the ABB SAP Connect system extension is loaded.
The pending fault reports residing in the system can be restored to the following
directory structure:
...\OperateITData\OptaoACDs
Restore the entire OptaoACDs folder.
4. DMS Calibration Integration.
The DMS Calibration Integration approach is changed in 800xA 5.1. Upgrade of DMS
Calibration Integration is not supported. Reconfigure the DMS Calibration Integration
based on an engineered solution.
Contact ABB technical support for more information.

2PAA111694-610 A 179
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.23 PC, Network and Software Monitoring

5. Asset Monitors that are assigned (use the Configure option drop-down list box on
the Asset Monitor Instance on an Object) to a particular AO Server object and Asset
Optimization Server aspect (by Object name:Aspect name pair), will not be correctly
configured after the upgrade. The AOServer property will be unconfigured and the
following error message will appear:
Unable to resolve AO Server for this Asset Monitor configuration

This must be resolved before the Asset Monitor Logic can be loaded into an AO
Server:Asset Optimization Server for execution. Refer to the Object Type Structure
for Asset Optimization, Object Type Group:AO Server, Object Type.
6. After a restore of a 800xA 5.1 System, the Asset Optimization Server (Monitor
Server/Engine) is running. The AO Server tab of the Asset Monitoring Server aspect
will show a status of good: AM Engine running.
a. Clicking the Asset Monitors tab and selecting AMs assigned to this AO
Server will show that the values in the Status column are NOT Loaded,
enabled.

b. Click Load all AMs to reload all enabled Asset Monitors assigned to this AO
Server.
The Enable Write Access check box must be selected in the Asset Monitor Data
Source aspect before loading Runtime Asset Monitors into the AO Server. Refer to
System 800xA Asset Optimization Configuration (3BUA000118*) for more information.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

4.23 PC, Network and Software Monitoring


Perform the following post upgrade procedures for PC, Network and Software Monitoring:
• Configure the Service Provider and Service Group
• Migrate the IT Asset Monitors

2PAA111694-610 A 180
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.23 PC, Network and Software Monitoring

4.23.1 Configure the Service Provider and Service Group


Perform the following steps on the PC, Network and Software Monitoring Server node.
1. Use the Structure Selector to open the Service Structure in the Plant Explorer
Workplace.
2. Use the Object Browser to navigate to the:
Services > OpcDA_Connector, Service > SG_IT Server

object. If there is no object to navigate to, skip to Step 12.


3. Open the OPCDA_Provider_<servername> object and double-click on the Service
Provider Definition aspect.
4. On the Configuration tab, restart the PNSM service by clearing and selecting the
Enabled check box. The Current field should change to Service.
5. Use the Structure Selector to open the Control Structure.
6. Use the Object Browser to navigate to the IT Server object.
7. Double-click OPC Data Source Definition in the Aspect List Area.
8. Click on the Service Group drop-down menu and select the SG_IT Server.
9. Click on the OPCDA_Provider_<servername> which was configured in Step 3..
10. Click Apply.
11. Skip to Migrate the IT Asset Monitors.
12. Use the Structure Selector to open the Control Structure.
13. Use the Object Browser to navigate to the IT Server object.
14. Double-click OPC Data Source Definition in the Aspect List Area.
15. Select New.
16. Click Add and select the appropriate Service Provider from the list.
17. Click OK twice.
18. Click Apply.

2PAA111694-610 A 181
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.24 PC, Network and Software Monitoring Device Library

4.23.2 Migrate the IT Asset Monitors


If Asset Optimization and PC, Network and Software Monitoring were installed on the
original system, then the following must be done for any existing IT Assets that had IT
Asset Monitors configured for them.
1. Use the Find Tool in the Plant Explorer Workplace to locate all the IT Asset Monitor
aspect instances in the Control Structure.
2. Right-click on each of the found aspects and select Goto Object.
3. Open the IT Device Manager aspect and click Generate to recreate the IT Asset
Monitor.
4. Repeat Step 3. for each object in the Find list.
5. Use the Object Browser to navigate to:
Root, Domain > Asset Optimization, Asset Optimization > AO Server 1,
AO Server

6. Select Asset Optimization Server in the Aspect List Area.


7. Select the Enabled check box in the AO Server tab and click Apply.
8. Click Load all AMs in the Asset Monitors tab.
Ensure that community setting for SNMP service is set. For more information on
configuring SNMP service, refer to System 800xA PC,Network and Software Monitoring
Configuration manual(3BUA000447)
Basic Computer Monitoring will not upgrade properly from a previous version to the
current version. Use the Basic Computer Monitoring Configuration Tool to recreate
the configuration.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

4.24 PC, Network and Software Monitoring Device Library


4.24.1 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony/Melody Connectivity Server Node
Update
The following procedure is only applicable to 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony and
800xA for Melody Connectivity Server nodes.

Do not perform this procedure on a server node that is running Shadow OPC Server
as AfwService.

2PAA111694-610 A 182
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.24 PC, Network and Software Monitoring Device Library

Determining the Node Running ShadowOPC Server as AfwService


To identify the node that is running ShadowOPC Server as AfwService:
1. Refer to System 800xA PC, Network and Software Monitoring Configuration
(3BUA000447*) and verify that the Shadow OPC Service is configured.
2. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
3. Use the Structure Selector to open the Control Structure.
4. Use the Object Browser to navigate to:
5. IT Server, IT OPC Server Network

6. Select OPC Data Source Definition in the Aspect List Area.


7. Click View in the Preview Area to launch the Service Group Definition dialog.
8. Select service provider from the Providers list.
9. Click View to launch the Service Provider Definition dialog.
10. The Node in the Configuration tab is the name of the node that is running
ShadowOPC Server as AfwService.
11. Close all dialogs.

Applying the Update


Perform the following procedure on all 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony and 800xA
for Melody Connectivity Server nodes.
1. Insert the System 800xA media into the drive.
2. Use Windows Explorer to locate and copy ABBShadowOPC.exe.config on the media.
...\Applications\PNSM\ABBShadowOPC.exe.config
3. Use Windows Explorer to navigate to the following directory on the local hard drive:
...:\Program Files(x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\ PC, Network
and Software Monitoring\bin

4. Make a backup of the existing ABBShadowOPC.exe.config file.


5. Paste the file copied in Step 2. to the hard drive location navigated to in Step 3..
6. Restart the node.
7. After the restart, use Windows Task Manager to verify the KeepAliveApp.exe in not
in the list of processes.

2PAA111694-610 A 183
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.24 PC, Network and Software Monitoring Device Library

4.24.2 Restarting the Event Collector Service


Restart the event collector service for the following Products:
• SMS and E-mail Messaging.
• AC 800M Status Monitoring.
• Asset Optimization.
• PC, Network and Software Monitoring.
Perform the following steps to see events in the Event Log:
1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Use the Structure Selector to open the Service Structure.
3. Use the Object Browser to navigate to:
Event Collector,Service > ABB 800xA System Message Server,Service
Group > Event Collector_ABB 800xA System Message Server_NodeName,
Service Provider

where NodeName is the node where the service is registered which is generally the
Aspect Server node.
4. Select Service Provider Definition in the Aspect List Area.
5. Clear the Enabled check box and click Apply.
6. Select the Enabled check box and click Apply.
7. Repeat Step 4. through Step 6. for:
Event Collector,Service > ABB 800xA Soft Alarm OPC Server,Service
Group > Event Collector_ABB 800xA Soft Alarm OPC Server_NodeName,
Service Provider.

This will restart the Event Collector_ABB 800xA System Message, Server_NodeName
service, and Event Collector_ABB 800xA Soft Alarm OPC Server_NodeName services
and the Event Log will display all events.

2PAA111694-610 A 184
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.25 SMS and e-mail Messaging

4.24.3 Additional Post Upgrade Steps


Perform the following post upgrade procedure for PNSM Device Library:
1. Copy the MOF files to a respective directory on the PC, Network and Software
Monitoring Server node(s) from the safe location, if MOF files were backed up:
...\Program Files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\PC, Network and Software
Monitoring\MOFS
2. Copy the Asset Monitor dlls to a respective directory on the Asset Optimization
Server node(s) from the safe location, if Asset Monitor dlls files were backed up:

Create Asset Monitoring\ bin folder manually, if they do not exist.

...\Program Files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Optimize IT\PC, Network and Software


Monitoring\Asset Monitoring\Bin
Register copied Asset Monitor dll(s) using regsvr32 command on the Asset
Optimization Server node(s)
If Generic Network Interface IT asset is used in the system, ensure that correct Device
ID for network adapter is configured. For more information on configuring Device ID,
refer to the respective Release Note.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

4.25 SMS and e-mail Messaging


Reconfigure the GSM Device hardware information recorded in the save operation during
the pre-upgrade procedures.

It may be necessary to stop and start the Messenger Server Service in the Service
Structure after the SMS and e-mail Messaging restore operation.

Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending


on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 185
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.26 Batch Management

4.26 Batch Management


4.26.1 Activate Batch Redundancy
If redundant Batch Servers are used, Batch Redundancy must be activated after upgrading
both the Batch Servers to System 800xA 6.1.
For detailed procedure to activate Batch Redundancy, refer to System 800xA Post
Installation (2PAA111693*).

4.26.2 Batch Management Post Installations


Wait until the Primary Batch Server node is in primary mode by viewing a P in the
Windows Taskbar of the selected Primary Batch Server. The length of time for the P
icon to appear depends on the size of configuration (number of batch units) and the
number of nodes in a system. There is generally no configuration in the system at
this point, so the P icon should appear within couple of minutes.
When user come across Could not read procedure data from batch database for
existing procedures after upgrade, refer to the Known Problems section in the System
Release Notes New Functions and Known Problem (2PAA111899*) manual for more
details.

4.26.3 Shutdown Script


The batch_shutdown.bat script shuts down the Batch application properly and must be
installed on all Batch Servers. To install this script:
1. Click Start and type gpedit.msc in the text box and then click OK.
2. Select Computer Configuration > Windows Settings > Scripts
(Startup/Shutdown).

3. Double-click Shutdown.
4. Click Add and then Browse.
5. Select: <DRIVE>:\Program Files(x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Produce
IT\Batch\bin\batch_shutdown.bat

in the Script Name field and click Open.


6. Click OK twice to complete the installation and close the Group Policy dialog box.

2PAA111694-610 A 186
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.26 Batch Management

4.26.4 Batch Management Toolbar


Batch Management provides a Toolbar that contains buttons for the Batch Overview,
Batch History Overview, and Equipment Overview dialog boxes. If desired, refer to
System 800xA Batch Management Configuration (3BUA000146*) for information about
enabling this Toolbar.

4.26.5 Set Date and Time for Batch Servers


Batch Primary and Redundant servers require a specific time format for the service
account. All other users on the batch server and other nodes can keep the US - English
defaults.
Perform the following to verify/modify the formats for the <800xA Service Account> on
the batch servers:
1. Login to the <800xA Service Account> on the Primary/Secondary Batch server.
2. Open Windows Control Panel.
3. Double-click Region, Region dialog appears. Perform the following to set the formats
for Date and Time:
a. Click the Format tab.
b. The default value for the Short Date format is M/d/yyyy. Change the Short Date
format to MM/dd/yyyy and click Apply.
c. The default Short time format is hh:mm tt. Change the value to HH:mm and
click Apply.
4. Click Apply.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 187
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.27 Basic History Service

4.27 Basic History Service


Restore the Basic History Service data as follows. Perform this procedure on every node
where the Basic History Service is running.
1. Stop the Basic History Server from the Service Structure by the following procedure:
a. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
b. Use the Structure Browser to open the Service Structure.
c. Select the Basic History, Service > Basic, Service Group.
d. Select the Service provider object that is running on this node.
e. Select the Service Provider Definition aspect.
f. Click the Configuration tab.
g. Clear the Enabled check box and click Apply.
2. If it is necessary to keep historical data for the time since the upgraded system was
started, copy the current Basic History log files in the following directory:
...\OperateITData1\History\{provider ID}
to a temporary directory.
These files will be inserted by using the Archive Tool.
3. Delete all files under:
...\OperateITData1\History\{provider ID}
4. Restore the files from the backup of Basic History Service Data to:
...\OperateITData1\History\{provider ID}
5. Start the Basic History Service Provider from the Service Structure.
6. If Step 2. was performed:
a. Open the AdvHtArchiveTool located by default in the following directory:
C:\Program Files(x86)\ABB 800xA\Base\bin\AdvHtArchiveTool.exe
b. Use the File/Select/Open Archive command and browse to the directory
containing the history log files.
c. Open the Action/Insert Data into Logs command.
d. Accept the default values in the Time Selection dialog box.
e. Click OK to start the insertion of the saved data to the logs.

2PAA111694-610 A 188
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.28 Information Management

Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending


on the installed system.

4.28 Information Management


Perform the following post upgrade procedures for Information Management. Files only
have to be restored when a new node is being loaded from backups. The Oracle upgrade
and database conversion procedure will upgrade existing or restored files.
When creating the Oracle instance, select I am upgrading or restoring from a SV3.x
or newer database backup in the Configuration File Options dialog box to prevent
the wizard from creating a history database. This will prevent History from starting
until after the History Database is restored.
The procedures presented here are different than those in System 800xA Post
Installation (2PAA111693*). Unless otherwise noted, perform the procedures presented
here.

When creating the database, it is possible to select small, medium, or large for the
database size. If it is not known what the size of the database will be, select large.

PAS is not initialized at this point in the process, and it should not be.

4.28.1 Reconfiguring the IM Log Configuration


When the procedure is followed, the IM service group is preserved and all Log
Configurations should have a valid setting. If there is not a valid setting, a previous
step was not followed and this procedure will correct the problem.
After restoring a system containing IM logs, the Service Group for the IM log template
configuration might be missing. The IM log templates must be checked, and if the Service
Group is missing, a new Service Group must be configured.
1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Use the Structure Selector to open the Library Structure.
3. Use the Object Browser to navigate to:
History Log Templates, History Log Template Library > Default Log
Templates, History Log Template Library

4. Select a log template.


5. Select Log Template in the Aspect List Area.

2PAA111694-610 A 189
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.28 Information Management

6. Select the Log Definition tab in the Preview Area.


7. If the Service Group in the Service Group drop-down list box is missing, it must be
reconfigured. The Service Group drop-down list box contains all History servers
defined in the system. Use this list to specify the server where this log will reside.
8. Repeat this procedure for all of the log templates.

4.28.2 Information Management History Backup/Restore Utility


Select the Information Management History Backup/Restore utility from:
ABB Start Menu > ABB System 800xA > Information Mgmt > History > IM Backup
and Restore
to restore the Information Management History database and synchronize the Aspect
Directory contents with the current Information Management History database
configuration.
During the restore, the existing database is dropped, and a new one is created. Mount
points and additional table spaces are created based on the database being restored.
Oracle data is imported, and the file-based property logs are copied back into the system.
Unless a different mount point is specified, the History database will be restored to its
original location (its location prior to being backed up).
The History database can be restored from any drive, including any mapped network
drives. The restore utility will first search a specified location for zipped archives matching
a specific name and fitting the form name-drive.zip (such as histDB-C.zip, histDB-A.zip,
and histDB-D.zip), and will then restore the compressed database files contained within
the archives to their respective original locations (their locations prior to being backed
up).

Considerations
When restoring the History database, make sure the disk is ready and available on the
node on which the procedure is to occur. Also, ensure that no applications are accessing
the Oracle database. The log file should be checked after the restore operation to make
sure that the restore operation completed successfully.

Running the Information Management History Backup/Restore Utility


To restore a backed up History database:

This procedure can also be performed by using the pasgui command in the Run
dialog box.

2PAA111694-610 A 190
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.28 Information Management

1. Verify that the ABB Process Administration Service (PAS) is set to manual in the
Services Control Panel (run Services.msc from the Run dialog box). Stop the service
if it is running.
If PAS is not in the manual mode, it is possible the log configuration has been modified
and will not match the IM backup. If this is the case, the 800xA System Restore may
have to be repeated to correct the problem.
2. If it is suspected that the Inform IT History Service Provider has not stopped, it can
be stopped now by selecting the Inform IT History Service Provider for this node in
the Service Structure, selecting the Configuration tab on the Service Provider
Definition aspect, disabling Enabled, and clicking Apply.
3. Ensure that no third party applications access the Oracle database during the restore
operation.
4. Before restoring the database, it is necessary to create an Oracle database to restore
the backup.
a. Start the Oracle Instance wizard using:
ABB Start Menu > ABB System 800xA > Information Mgmt > History > IM
Oracle Instance Wizard
b. Create a database to restore by selecting I am upgrading or restoring from
a SV3.x or newer database backup. Be sure to select the correct size for the
database. If the previous system had more than four million entry message
logs, select large, for one to four million select medium, and for less than one
million select small.

If a database previously existed, drop it and create the correctly sized database.

5. Restore the database. Select:


ABB Start Menu > ABB System 800xA > Information Mgmt > History > IM Backup
and Restore.
6. Verify Restore configuration from a backup file(s) is enabled in the Welcome to
IM Historian Backup and Restore Utility dialog box.

2PAA111694-610 A 191
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.28 Information Management

7. Click Next. IM Historian Database Restore dialog box appears (Figure 4.29).

Figure 4.29: IM Historian Database Restore Dialog Box

8. Specify the location of the backup files in the Path of IM historian backup: field
(Figure 4.29).
If new mount points need to be specified for file-based logs and/or a new Oracle
tablespace definition file, click Browse. This will be required if the partition letters
where the IM data is stored have changed.
9. Click Next. The HsBAR Output Window appears.
10. Select the Automatically close upon completion check box.

2PAA111694-610 A 192
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.28 Information Management

11. Monitor the progress in the Progress Status area of the IM Historian Backup/Restore
Utility window. Ignore the error messages indicating errors deleting aspect.
Following the message indicating the import is complete, the database conversion
tool will run automatically. Feedback will be provided in the HsBAR window.
Shortly after the message indicating the database conversion is complete, the history
synchronization tool will run automatically. Again, feedback will be provided in the
HsBAR window.
The restore of the system requires an instance that matches the size of the database
being restored. When creating the instance, be sure to select Small, Medium, or
Large based on the size of the message log in the backup being restored. Select
Large if the size is not known. If the wrong size is selected, the restore operation
may fail with the Oracle Error Message 1652 - Unable to extend tmp segment in
tablespace temp. Repeat the restore with the correct instance settings if the error
occurs. This will not happen if the correct database for upgrade is selected. For
example, if the database is using a 12 million entry OPC message log, the large
option should be selected. This will insure that enough TEMP and rollback are created.
12. Click Finish when a message stating the execution is complete is displayed as
shown in Figure 4.30.

Figure 4.30: Execution is Complete Message

If the Progress Status dialog box has warning messages with possible solutions as
indicated in Figure 4.31, read the possible solutions carefully, then click Finish and
proceed with the solution that best fits your problem. Refer to the Information Management
Release Notes for further guidelines.

2PAA111694-610 A 193
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.28 Information Management

Figure 4.31: Progress Status Dialog Box

2PAA111694-610 A 194
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.28 Information Management

4.28.3 Restoring Other Information Management Related Files


There are several other files related to Information Management that need to be restored
as part of total system restore.
• History Archive Data: For each archive device, copy the appropriate folders from
the safe media to the location specified by the Device Filename. If the disk
configuration has changed from the previous system to the new system (that is,
letter designations for disks have changed such as, C, D, E), check the archive
device configurations to make sure the Archive Path specification points to the
correct disk drive and directory, as shown in Figure 4.32. Repeat for the backup
archive path if configured.

Figure 4.32: Checking the Archive Path Specification

• History Archive State Information: Stop the Industrial IT Archive service in the
Service Structure. Copy the folder that holds the last archive time and other archive
state information from the safe media to:
c:\ProgramData\ABB\IM\Archive
• Reports: Restore any report template files created in Microsoft Excel, DataDirect,
and/or Crystal Reports. Also restore report output files created as a result of running
these reports using the Scheduling Services. The function references in the old
excel report templates need to be updated after upgrading to System 800xA 6.1.
Refer to System 800xA Information Management, Data Access and Reports
(3BUF001094*) for the steps to update the function references.

2PAA111694-610 A 195
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.28 Information Management

• Desktop Trends: For each user, restore the trend display, ticker display, and tag
explorer files, if any to the following location:
C:\Users\<user>\AppData\Roaming\ABB Industrial IT\Inform IT\Desktop Trends
• Display Services: Restore the directories for custom users, as well as display and
user element definitions to the following path:
C:\ProgramData\ABB\IM\Display\Data
Display Services security has been enhanced in version 6.1. As a result it is
necessary to update the passwords for each display services user by creating a
new encoded password and updating the appropriate Preferences.svd file. Please
see the Creating User Passwords section found under System Administration,
Managing Users for Display Services in Information Management Configuration
manual (3BUF001092*) in Information Management Configuration manual
(3BUF001092*) for instructions.
• DataDirect: Restore custom text files for object, object type, and attribute menus
used on the DataDirect windows to the following path:
C:\ProgramData\ABB\IM\DataDirect\etc

After upgrade to 6.1, launch desktop trends once so that ABB Industrial IT folder is
created. Copy the old files from 5.1 system to this folder.

4.28.4 Starting PAS


1. Open the Services Control Panel (run Services.msc from the Run dialog box), set
the ABB Process Administration Service (PAS) to Automatic and start it, if not already
configured properly.
2. Open the Information Management Configuration Assistant (ABB Start Menu >
ABB System 800xA > Information Mgmt > IM Configuration Assistant) and
perform any incomplete steps.
3. Select the Basic History Service Provider object for the Information Management
node in the Service Structure in the Plant Explorer.
4. Select the Service Provider Definition aspect.
5. Select the Configuration tab.
6. Clear the Enabled option.
7. Click Apply.

2PAA111694-610 A 196
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.28 Information Management

8. Select the Enabled option.


9. Click Apply.

4.28.5 Updating Archive Logs


Absolute names are now included as part of the archive storage. Archive links now use
an absolute reference that is independent of the name of the log. Run the archive
maintenance to update the _RST log references to use the absolute log reference.

This procedure is not necessary if archives are not being used.

This procedure only needs to be performed one time no matter how many Information
Management nodes are in the system.

1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.


2. Use the Object Browser to navigate to:
IM Node > Archive Service Provider

3. Click Archive Service Aspect in the Aspect List Area.


4. Click Maintenance in the Preview Area to launch the Maintain Archive References
dialog box.
5. Click Validate Archive Logs.

During Upgrade, we need to create new archive volume under the archive device
which was configured previously so that we can successfully archive the backup.

4.28.6 Information Management Maintenance


Perform this procedure on all Information Management Server nodes.
1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Use the Structure Selector to open the Node Administration Structure.
3. Use the Object Browser to navigate to:
All Nodes, Node Group > IM Node > Inform IT History_IM Node, Service
Provider > Inform IT History Object, Inform IT History Object

4. Select Inform IT History Control in the Aspect List Area.

2PAA111694-610 A 197
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.28 Information Management

5. Expand the Maintenance tree in the Preview Area and select Synchronization.
The Inform IT History Manager shown in Figure 4.33 appears in the Preview Area.

Figure 4.33: Inform IT HIstory Manager

6. Click Check Names.


7. A blank dialog box should appear. If it does, click OK. If it does not click
Resynchronize Names.
8. Click Check Synchronization.
9. A blank dialog box should appear. If it does, click OK. If it does not click Force
Synchronization.

2PAA111694-610 A 198
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.29 Desktop Trends

4.28.7 Running hsDBMaint -stagger


It is recommended to run hsDBMaint -stagger for all IM configurations. The defaults are
adequate for most configurations. If the average request rate is near or over 1,000 per
minute, refer to System Information Management, Configuration (3BUF001092*) for
hsDBMaint -stagger recommendations.
1. Open an Administrator Windows Command Prompt and enter hsDBMaint -stagger.
2. When the operation is complete run the Process Administration Service (PAS) utility
on the Information Management Application Server node. Open:
ABB Start Menu > ABB System 800xA > PAS Management > PAS Control
This opens the Process Administration Service dialog box.
3. Click Restart All to restart all processes under PAS supervision.
4. Click Close when the dialog box indicates that all processes are restarted.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

4.29 Desktop Trends


Perform the following to solve the compatibility issue related to the migrated Desktop
Trend files from earlier versions of 800xA:
1. Open a command prompt and set your default folder as follows:
cd “C:\Program Files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Inform IT\Desktop Trends\help”
2. To update a single Desktop Trend file do the following:
UpgradeTrendFile <fileName>
3. To update a group of files in the same folder do the following:
UpgradeTrendFile –A <FolderPath>

2PAA111694-610 A 199
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.30 Calculations Service

4.30 Calculations Service


Calculations that were disabled prior to the upgrade must be enabled by selecting the
Enabled check box in the Calculations dialog box. Refer to the section on Calculations
in System 800xA Information Management Data Access and Reports (3BUF001094*).
To enable the Calculations Service:
1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Use the Structure Selector to open the Service Structure.
3. Select the Calculations Service Object.
4. Select the Service Definition aspect.
5. Click the Configuration tab.
6. Select the Enabled check box and click Apply.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

4.31 Scheduling Service (Application Scheduler)


Schedules that were disabled prior to the upgrade must be enabled by selecting the
Enabled check box in the Scheduling dialog box. Refer to the section on Scheduling in
System 800xA Information Management Data Access and Reports (3BUF001094*).
To enable the Scheduling Service:
1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Use the Structure Selector to open the Service Structure.
3. Select the Scheduling Service Object.
4. Select the Service Definition aspect.
5. Click the Configuration tab.
6. Select the Enabled check box and click Apply.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 200
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.32 800xA for AC 800M

4.32 800xA for AC 800M


Use the following procedure to restore 800xA for AC 800M information:
1. Control Builder stores its settings (systemsetup.sys) on disk in the following directory:
...\ABB Industrial IT Data\Engineer IT Data\Control Builder M
Professional

Add the file saved on the safe media to the system.


2. Copy the OPC Server configuration files from the safe media to the system. Copy
the .cfg file to the same location as noted down in the Pre-upgrade steps. The
systemsetup.sys file is located in:
...\ABB Industrial IT Data\Control IT Data\OPC Server for AC 800M

The configuration files are stored in the Files folder in the same location.
3. Restart the OPC server, once the OPC server restarts, it will automatically upgrade
and store the configuration files in PPA.

4.33 Control Builder M Projects


After upgrading a configuration containing one Engineering and one Production
system to 800xA 6.1, the Control Builder M projects in the two systems should be
made identical using the Import/Export tool, Engineering Repository, or by recreating
the Engineering System using Backup/Restore before engineering work is restarted.
Otherwise there will be a lot of false differences on the AC 800M aspects reported in
the import difference report when moving solutions between the systems.
After an upgrade to 800xA 6.1, if you may need to work with objects having VB PG
aspects, ensure to start Control Builder as an Administrator. Right-click the tool and
select Run as Administrator... from the context menu. The tasks such as copy-paste
of an object having VB PG aspects may not be possible in Control Builder if you are
not logged-in as an Administrator.
CEX units might get a new (major) version of HWLib. A replacement has to be done
manually in the project. In case of needed co-existence download for certain
controllers, the related HWLibs shall not be replaced with the new ones to not request
an upgrade of the related controllers and CEX units.
When detecting a CI871PROFINETHwLib of version < 1.10.0 then the project upgrade
will be aborted. In this case the Classic System Extension needs to be added to the
system and the project upgrade must be performed again.

2PAA111694-610 A 201
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.33 Control Builder M Projects

800xA 6.1 has introduced a new (major) version (6.1-0) of BasicHWlib. The 800xA
5.1 Feature Pack 4 version of BasicHWlib or BasicHIHWlib (5.1-1) and the 800xA
5.1 version of BasicHWlib or BasicHIHWlib (5.1-0) can coexist with the new version
(6.1-0) in the 800xA System, and must be used if any controllers are going to stay
with the firmware from 800xA 5.1 and/or 800xA 5.1 Feature Pack 4.
The Control Builder project upgrade will be started automatically the first time the project
is opened. It can also be explicitly triggered by starting an empty Control Builder and
selecting:
Tools > Maintenance > Upgrade Project
During the upgrade, a message appears asking users it they want to use the new (6.1-0)
or old (5.1-0 or 5.1-1) versions of the HWLibs for the controllers in the project. If the
intention is to upgrade controller firmware the new version should be selected. If the
intention is to not upgrade controller firmware the old version must be selected.
When a Control Upgrade contains new versions of hardware or 1131 libraries, these
may include changes that need to be deployed both to the operator graphics and the
AC 800M controllers. To make sure these are correctly presented e.g. in faceplates
and the System Status Viewer, download applications and hardware configurations
to controllers as soon as the situation permits.

4.33.1 AC 800M Fingerprint Tool


Run the AC 800M Fingerprint tool on the upgraded system to collect data about the
firmware versions, CPU load, hardware revisions, and so on. Compare the data obtained
on the upgraded system with that of the data obtained from the old system to check if
there were any changes during the upgrade process.
Refer to System 800xA Control AC 800M Configuration (3BSE035980) for more
information on the AC 800M Fingerprint tool.

4.33.2 Start Values Analyzer Tool


Run the Start Values Analyzer tool after an upgrade and collect the data regarding the
variables and the associated attribute values. Compare the results with the data collected
while performing the Pre-upgrade procedures. If certain variables are set to the initial
value during an upgrade, it can be reset to the last configured value based on the collected
data before the upgrade.
Refer to System 800xA Control AC 800M Configuration (3BSE035980) for more
information on the Start Values Analyzer tool.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 202
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.34 Engineering Studio

4.34 Engineering Studio


4.34.1 Function Designer Diagram Upgrade
The Function Diagram Upgrade can be carried out from the Engineering Workplace by
navigating to Object Type Structure > Functional Planning > Settings > Function Upgrade.
Following are the prerequisites for the Function Diagram Upgrade:
• Engineering Workplace Service should be enabled.
• Function Diagram Upgrade must be done with the 800xAInstaller account, or
using an account that is a member of IndustrialITAdmin and local administrators
group.
• Control Builder M projects should be upgraded prior to the Function Diagram
Upgrade.
The setting of the Function Diagram Upgrade in the workplace is as shown in the Figure
4.34.

Figure 4.34: Settings of Function Diagram Upgrade

2PAA111694-610 A 203
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.34 Engineering Studio

On initiating the Function Diagram Upgrade a new Engineering Workplace opens up.
Function Diagram Upgrade iterates through all the Function Diagrams under Functional
Structure and performs the upgrade.
If the Function Diagram Upgrade terminates for some reason, such as, in-sufficient
memory, then the Engineering Workplace re-starts and the upgrade resumes from the
point where it stopped last.
Following are the changes due to the library update:
• Updates of all Function Diagrams.
• Generates the Configuration Data for all the diagrams which are modified.
The Function Diagram Upgrade process may take several minutes/hours till it is
completed. Engineering Workplace may not be available for performing other
operations.
During the upgrade/update process if a message appears, user needs to intervene and
update as required. The settings dialog box shows the status bar with the current diagram
being upgraded and the progress in percentage (%), see Figure 4.35.

Figure 4.35: Function Diagram Upgrade

2PAA111694-610 A 204
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.34 Engineering Studio

A log is generated and updated during the Function Diagram Upgrade. It can be accessed
from the aspect Function Upgrade Log, or from the temp folder in the C drive. The location
for the log created in C drive is C:\ProgramData\ABB\Engineering Studio\Function
Designer\ logname.log. For more information on Function Designer Diagram Upgrade
refer Appendix B of System 800xA Engineering, Function Designer (3BDS011224*).

4.34.2 Conversion of Global Variables (Diagram Variables) into


Communication Variables
It is recommended to convert Global Variables (Diagram Variables) of existing projects
into Communication Variables. This is optional.
For more information, refer to Section: Configuration in System 800xA Engineering,
Function Designer (3BDS011224*).
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 205
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.35 Bulk Data Manager

4.35 Bulk Data Manager


A new version of Bulk Engineering Tool named Bulk Data Manager 2 has been introduced
in 800xA 6.1. This can be installed by running System Configuration Console post
upgrading the system to 800xA 6.1. By default BDM Classic (Microsoft Excel based)
gets un-installed on upgrading a system from 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1. In case user has
to work with BDM Classic, he can enable it along with Bulk Data Manager 2 from SCC
after the system upgrade as per the following procedure.
1. Launch System Configuration Console.
2. Click Edit Functions and Navigate to Engineering as shown in the figure 4.36.

Figure 4.36: Modify System Functions

3. Select 'Bulk Data Manager' feature and click OK.

In case BDM Classic is required, select 'Bulk Data Manager (Classic)' feature.
However, it is not possible to select only BDM Classic.

2PAA111694-610 A 206
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.35 Bulk Data Manager

4. Click Save Configuration to save the configuration and then click Deploy Systems
to open the 'Deploy' window as shown in figure 4.37.

Figure 4.37: Save Configuration and Deploy

2PAA111694-610 A 207
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.36 Process Engineering Tool Integration

5. Click Deploy and wait for completion of the operation. Figure 4.38 shows Bulk Data
Manager deployed.

Figure 4.38: Bulk Data Manager Deployed

4.36 Process Engineering Tool Integration


Use the following procedure after upgrading Process Engineering Tool Integration:
Restore the backed up data directory (in preparation-step prior to upgrade) to the installed
directory of Process Engineering Tool Integration. Restore the entire Xml directory
contents to:
C:\ProgramData\ABB\Process Engineering Tool Integration\XML
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 208
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.37 Add Autostart Shortcut

4.37 Add Autostart Shortcut


If it is desired to enable the autostart of the Operator Workplace on client nodes, perform
the following:
1. Login to the client using the user in which autostart needs to be configured.
2. Click ABB Start Menu on desktop.
3. Open ABB Workplace Login window as an administrator (Run as Administrator)
from: ABB System 800xA > System > Workplace
4. Select the Workplace from the list of available workplaces.
5. Click Set as Autostart.

Figure 4.39: Configuring Autostart for the Workplace

Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

4.38 Multisystem Integration


After a complete upgrade of the subscriber node running the Remote Access Client
(AfwRAC.exe) the following actions have to be performed:
1. Re-configure the connect account
2. If used, enter the password again

2PAA111694-610 A 209
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.39 Load System Extensions

After a complete upgrade of the provider node running the Remote Access Server
(AfwRAS.exe) the following action has to be performed:
1. Re-configure the connect account
2. If used, enter the password again

4.39 Load System Extensions


Do not load system Extensions manually. All the functions installed in the source
system will loaded during uprade process. Refer to System 800xA Maintenance
(3BSE046784*) to expand the 800xA 6.1 system with new functions.
System Configuration Console is not aware of system extension loaded manually.
Loading system extensions manually might lead to inconsistent system configuration.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

4.40 Changing Aspect Precedence List


Visual Basic Process Graphics (VBPG) is not supported in System 800xA beginning
System 800xA 6.0. After upgrade, Aspect Precedence list must be changed so that PG2
has the highest Precedence.

Clicking on a VBPG aspects in System 800xA 6.1 will generate a license violation
pop-up.

2PAA111694-610 A 210
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.41 System Backup

1. Open Plant Explorer Workplace.


2. Navigate to Aspect Precedence List aspect located in:
Library Structure > Preferences & Customizations > Aspect Precedence Lists
> Default Precedence List
3. In the Configuration Tab, ensure that PG2 Aspects have the highest precedence.
If not change it manually.

Figure 4.40: Aspect Precedence List

For more information on changing Aspect Precedence list, refer to Workplace


Configuration section of System 800xA Operations, Operator Workplace Configuration
(3BSE030322*).
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

4.41 System Backup


Make complete hard disk and 800xA System backups of the upgraded system.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

2PAA111694-610 A 211
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.42 800xA History

4.42 800xA History


Perform the steps described in the 800xA History Archiving sections after upgrading the
system.

4.42.1 800xA History Server / 800xA History Data Collector


Refer the Section "Appendix C: C.2 Online upgrade from System 800xA 800xA 5.1
to 800xA 6.1" in the "System 800xA
History Installation (2PAA107280*)" manual for more details on Upgrade procedure
1. Stop the RTDB Services on the respective History node and replace the Application
,RTDB Database and Backup folders to the respective database / backup drives on
800xA History Server / 800xA History Data Collector with the History data backup
taken during the pre-upgrade phase.
2. Once restore of History data backup is completed Restart the respective History
node.
3. Navigate to Service Structure and verify for the correct user credentials in the Special
Configuration tab of 800xA History SyncService, 800xA History Event Collector and
800xA History EventServer services.

4.42.2 800xA History Archiving


Refer to the Information Management section in the Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps for
Archive and PAS.
Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending
on the installed system.

4.43 Application Change Management


This section is applicable only if the system had Application Change Management
(ACM) configured before upgrade.

Log in to the ACM Server node with 800xA service account before doing the following
steps.

2PAA111694-610 A 212
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.43 Application Change Management

4.43.1 ACM Server Upgrade Procedure


Upgrade from SharePoint 2010 to SharePoint 2016 can be performed in two steps, as
there is no direct upgrade path:
• Upgrade SharePoint Foundation 2010 content to SharePoint Foundation 2013

Upgrading SharePoint Foundation 2010 content to SharePoint Foundation 2013


requires preparation of a separate node.

• Upgrade from SharePoint Foundation 2013 to Sharepoint Server 2016

2PAA111694-610 A 213
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.43 Application Change Management

Upgrade SharePoint Foundation 2010 Content Database to SharePoint Foundation


2013
Perform the following procedure to upgrade SharePoint 2010 content to SharePoint
2013:
1. Open SQL Server Management Studio navigating to the path: All Programs >
Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2.
2. Expand Databases folder and select the desired SQL Database that is linked to
ACM System (for example: WSS_Content) as shown in the Figure 4.41.

Figure 4.41: Back Up Database

3. Right-click on the database and select Back Up... from the Task menu.

2PAA111694-610 A 214
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.43 Application Change Management

4. Enter the required information in the backup dialog box.


5. Click OK and wait for the completion of the operation.

6. Copy the backup to a local machine before starting the system upgrade.

Step 1 to 6 can be skipped if already performed as part of pre-upgrade procedure.

Restore ACM Server 5.1 Content Database to Intermediate Node. Prepare a separate
node with Windows Server 2012 R2 operating system, configured in same domain
environment and perform the following steps:
1. Plan and deploy Aspect Server cum ACM server using 6.0.3 media in Existing
Domain environment.
2. Navigate to SQL Server Management Studio using the path: All Programs >
Microsoft SQL Server 2012
3. Right-click on the Databases folder and select Restore Database....
4. Enter the path of the backup file in the Restore Database. Refer the location where
the backup was saved as part of pre-upgrade procedure.
5. Click OK and wait for the completion of the operation.
6. Install SharePoint Foundation 2013 and run the SharePoint Product
Configuration Wizard. For information on installation of SharePoint 2013, refer to
System 800xA Application Change Management (2PAA108438*) manual.
7. Open SharePoint Central Administration web site from Start > SharePoint 2013
Central Administration and navigate to Application Management.
8. Navigate back to Application Management
9. Open Databases > Manage Content Database.
10. Click Database name and select the check box Remove content database.
11. Click Ok to delete the database.
12. Open SharePoint 2013 Management Shell with elevated role (Run as
Administrator).
13. Type the command: Mount-SPContentDatabase "Database Name" -DatabaseServer
"Database Server Name" -WebApplication Server URL (For Example:
Mount-SPContentDatabase "WSS_Content" -DatabaseServer "CRPCBVM2\ACM"
-WebApplication http://crpcbvm2)

2PAA111694-610 A 215
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.43 Application Change Management

14. A Message appears to confirm the action on the Shell as shown in Figure 4.42.

Figure 4.42: SharePoint 2013 Management Shell

In rare scenario, Mount operation completes with an error displayed: Upgrade


completed with error. This error can be ignored.

15. Close the SharePoint 2013 Management Shell.

2PAA111694-610 A 216
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.43 Application Change Management

16. Open SharePoint Central Administration web site from Start > SharePoint 2013
Central Administration (if not already opened) and navigate to Application
Management > Configure Quotas and Locks.
17. Uncheck Limit site storage to a maximum of as shown in Figure 4.43 and close
the window.

Figure 4.43: Site Collection Quotas and Locks

Upgrade the Experience to SharePoint 2013


By default, when upgrading content databases from SharePoint Foundation 2010 to
SharePoint Foundation 2013, site collections will continue to use the SharePoint
Foundation 2010 experience, where user interface will continue to look just like it was
in SharePoint Foundation 2010, even though the engine under the cover is all SharePoint
2013. However, before upgrading to SharePoint 2016, the user experience has to be
upgraded to the SharePoint Foundation 2013 Experience. If you try to upgrade a
SharePoint Foundation 2013 content database that contains site collections with the
SharePoint Foundation 2010 Experience to SharePoint 2016, the upgrade operation will
fail and the following error is shown in the upgrade logs:
ERROR Please upgrade sites using SharePoint Foundation 2010 Experience in database
Intranet-Content-1 to SharePoint Foundation 2013 before proceeding.

2PAA111694-610 A 217
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.43 Application Change Management

Automate the Upgrade Process. To Upgrade all sites collections experience to


SharePoint 2013, launch Windows PowerShell with elevated role (Run as Administrator)
and execute the following script:
Add-PSSnapin Microsoft.SharePoint.PowerShell -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue

$webApps = Get-SPWebApplication
foreach($webApp in $webApps)
{
$sites = $webApp.Sites
foreach($site in $sites)
{
Upgrade-SPSite $site.RootWeb.Url -VersionUpgrade -Unthrottled
$site.Dispose()
}
}

Executing this script may take a long time based on the size of ACM System.

To ensure that the Experience was properly upgraded, Open ACM Site
(http://iabbacm.com), and verify that the previous ACM System data is available and has
the SharePoint 2013 look and feel as sown in the Figure 4.44.

2PAA111694-610 A 218
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.43 Application Change Management

Figure 4.44: Upgraded SharePoint 2013 Site

Take the Database backup following the procedure mentioned in Upgrade SharePoint
Foundation 2010 Content Database to SharePoint Foundation 2013 and save it on a
safe location.

2PAA111694-610 A 219
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.43 Application Change Management

Upgrade from SharePoint Foundation 2013 to Sharepoint Server 2016


Follow below procedure to upgrade ACM System from SharePoint Foundation 2013 to
SharePoint Server 2016 :
1. Upgrade the 5.1 Feature Pack 4 latest revision ACM Server having SharePoint
Foundation 2010 to ACM Server 6.1 using System Installer. This will be performed
as part of System upgrade from 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1. Please note that this will
only install the ACM server 6.1 Sharepoint Server to be installed manually as below.
2. Navigate to SQL Server Management Studio using the path: All Programs >
Microsoft SQL Server 2016
3. Right-click on the Databases folder and select Restore Database....
4. Enter the path of the backup file in the Restore Database. Refer the location where
the SharePoint Foundation 2013 site backup was saved as part of upgrade from
SharePoint Foundation 2010 to SharePoint Foundation 2013.
5. Click OK and wait for the completion of the operation.
6. Install SharePoint Server 2016 and run the SharePoint Product Configuration
Wizard. For information on installation of SharePoint Server 2016, refer to System
800xA Application Change Management (2PAA108438*) manual.
7. Open SharePoint Central Administration web site from Start > SharePoint 2016
Central Administration and navigate to Application Management.
8. Open Databases > Manage Content Database.
9. Click Database name and select the check box Remove content database.
10. Click Ok to delete the database.
11. Open SharePoint 2016 Management Shell with elevated role (Run as
Administrator).
12. Type the command: Mount-SPContentDatabase "Database Name" -DatabaseServer
"Database Server Name" -WebApplication Server URL (For Example:
Mount-SPContentDatabase "WSS_Content" -DatabaseServer "CRPCBVM2\ACM"
-WebApplication http://crpcbvm2) and wait for operation to complete.
13. Close the SharePoint 2016 Management Shell.
14. Open Internet Explorer and enter Server URL (for example: http://crpcbvm2) to verify
previos data is available after site upgrade to SharePoint Server 2016.

2PAA111694-610 A 220
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.43 Application Change Management

4.43.2 Accessing the ACM Server


In case of on-line upgrade from 5.1 Feature Pack 4 latest revision to System 800xA
6.1 or if 800xA aspect system name is changed, perform the following steps:
1. Open Workplace application and go to Admin Structure > Administrative
Objects > Domains > System Name,Domain.
2. Right-click and select Details from the context menu and note down the id from
id field (ex: F528E71E-259F-491E-A224-7D2728351805).
3. Open ACM Server URL on Internet browser (ex: http://esl4vm03-acm) and go
to Site Contents.
4. Click on the listed ACM System sub-site and open Site Settings by clicking on
the Settings at the top right corner of the page.
5. Click on Title, Description, and Logo listed under Look and Feel group.
6. Replace the Title with "SystemName_ID" as acquired from step 2. For example:
CRPCAVM6_78fc335e-8d27-4d59-ab03-7429c5f2c1cf.
7. Similarly replace the title in "URL name" field as well and click OK.

2PAA111694-610 A 221
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.43 Application Change Management

Perform the following post upgrade procedure for ACM 6.1 latest release:
1. Double-click the ACMClient from the ABB Start Menu after the 800xA System
upgrade is complete.
2. In the Select Environment window, select the environment, and then click OK.
Following login dialog box is displayed:

Figure 4.45: Login to Access

3. On the Login page, in the Server URL text box, enter the ACM server name, for
example, http://esl4vm03-acm.
4. To login to the ACM Server, do one of the following steps:
a. Select the Windows Login check box if you are logging in with the Windows
credentials.
Or
b. Clear the Windows Login check box, type the user name and password in the
respective text boxes.

2PAA111694-610 A 222
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.44 Consistency Check

5. Click Login to login to the ACMClient.


The ACM client opens displaying the General Settings dialog box.
6. In the General Settings dialog, set the maximum number of versions, enable.xml
compression and check-in support for aspect (if required).
If General Settings are not required, click Close. This ensures that there is no limit
on the maximum number of versions.
For more information, refer to System 800xA Application Change Management
(2PAA108438*).

The first time check in of an object/entity after ACM update creates a new version of
the entity even if there are no new changes done after the last check-in.

Refer to Post-Upgrade Procedure Steps to go to the next post-upgrade step depending


on the installed system.

4.44 Consistency Check


This topic describes the consistency check performed on the 800xA System.
The following is an overview of the consistency check functionality in the 800xA System.
• Perform consistency checks both before and after the upgrade.
• The consistency check is continuously improved between releases. If a consistency
error is detected after the upgrade, it does not necessarily mean that the error was
introduced by the upgrade process. It might have been there from the beginning,
but went undetected.

2PAA111694-610 A 223
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.44 Consistency Check

• Try to correct all consistency errors before the upgrade. This will make the upgrade
process easier. Consistency errors may cause the upgrade to either fail, or continue,
but without having done exactly what was intended. Since it is very difficult to know
where the upgrade handling will do changes, it is desirable to make the system as
consistent as possible before the upgrade. It is also good to keep a system with the
old version running so it is possible to go back and do more corrections in the old
system if problems occur during the upgrade.
– However, the upgrade will often work even though there are some remaining
consistency errors. In some cases it is easiest to correct the errors after the
upgrade (because the repair functionality has been improved in the new release),
so it may be worth an attempt at continuing with the upgrade. It is recommended
to keep a list of the detected consistency errors for future reference.
During the consistency check the following error messages might come from
PROFIBUS Hardware Libraries in system version 5.1 and later:
[Error] Library key must not be used on 'ABB_TFx12_PA 1.2-0:Aspect
Category Definition'. ... : Library Version Definition [Error] Aspect
'ABB_TFx12_PA 1.2- 0:Hardware Library' contains multiple library keys.
... : Library Version Definition [Error] Library key must not be used
on 'ABB_TFx12_PA 1.2-0:Object Type Structure'. ... : Library Version
Definition 3 error(s) reported by 1 aspect(s). 1 aspect(s) can be
repaired

This will have no impact on system upgrade.


• In System 800xA 5.1 and later, perform the consistency check with the Consistency
Check tool (started by clicking the question mark icon in top right corner of Plant
Explorer Workplace).

2PAA111694-610 A 224
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.44 Consistency Check

• Perform consistency checks on the user-defined libraries in the Object Type


Structure or Library Structure, the Control Project in Control Structure, and the
Functional Structure.
• The general part of the upgrade process consists of importing new versions of
standard libraries, and propagating object type changes to user libraries and user
applications. It is only necessary to correct consistency errors regarding object type,
object type references, and similar configurations for the general part of the upgrade
process to work. Other inconsistencies such as unresolved references should
normally not lead to problems.
– However, special upgrade handling designed by the Functional Areas may also
update the references of aspects, so it is best to correct also broken references
before the upgrade.
– In the Library structure, navigate to Library Version Definition aspect present
in the user defined libraries. Select the Consistency tab and click Check
Consistency. Correct any errors that may appear during the consistency check.
In System 800xA5.1 and later, perform the consistency check with the Consistency
Check tool (started by clicking the question mark icon in top right corner of Plant Explorer
Workplace). This instruction only includes the 800xA 5.1 and later procedure. Refer to
System 800xA Tools (2PAA101888*) for more detailed information on running the 800xA
5.1 consistency check.

Perform a consistency check before performing the 800xA System backup. Failure
to do so could result in problems when restoring the system after the upgrade.

If using Asset Optimization, be sure to run the Consistency Check tool and delete
any inconsistent Asset Monitor Control Connection Properties aspects.

Perform the following to perform a consistency check:


1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Click the Consistency Check Tool icon at the top of the Plant Explorer Workplace
to launch the Consistency Check Tool.

Rather than performing Step 3. through Step 6. it is also possible to drag the desired
items to the Consistency Check Tool.

3. Click Add Item to open the Select Item dialog box.


4. Browse to the desired location.

2PAA111694-610 A 225
4 Post-Upgrade Procedures
4.44 Consistency Check

5. Select the desired items (use Ctrl+Click or Shift+Click to select multiple items). If a
subtree is selected, all objects and aspects in the subtree will be selected. If a library
or application is selected, everything in this entity will be selected.
6. Click Add and Close.
7. Click Check.
8. If errors are found, and they are marked Repairable, perform an automatic repair
by selecting Repair Aspect in the context menu.
9. If errors are found that are not automatically repairable, try to manually reconfigure
the aspects to repair the consistency errors.

2PAA111694-610 A 226
A Migrate Redundant Domain Controllers
A.1 Prerequisites

Appendix A Migrate Redundant Domain


Controllers

There may be some 800xA software on nodes (such as 800xA RNRP on the Domain
Controller node) that does not include Process Portal software. The operating system
and 800xA software on these nodes also requires an reinstallation.
These procedures are targetted for migrating from Windows Server 2008 to Windows
Server 2016. However the same procedures are also referred during Operating
System upgrade within System 800xA 6.1. Some of the steps might differ for Windows
Server 2012, use the appropriate steps relevant to Windows Server 2012.
This section covers the following:
• Migrating redundant Domain Controllers from Windows Server 2008 to Windows
Server 2016.
• Replacing server hardware without losing contact with the Active Directory (AD) and
Domain Name Service (DNS).
The order of migration described in this section must be changed when upgrading 800xA
Systems with combined Domain Controllers/Aspect Servers. Rather than upgrading both
Domain Controllers before everything else in the 800xA System, the first Domain
Controller must stay a part of the 800xA 5.1 System until the end of the upgrade, after
which it will be migrated with the upgrade with the 800xA 6.1 Primary Aspect Server.

A.1 Prerequisites
The following is required before starting the procedure to migrate the Domain Controller:
• Must be logged on to the schema master as a member of the Enterprise Admins,
Schema Admins, and Domain Admins groups in the forest root domain.
• Ensure that replication is working throughout the entire forest. Ensure that all Domain
Controllers are up and running and that the schema master has been up long enough
for a complete replication cycle to occur for the Schema partition. Check Event
Viewer for any issues.

2PAA111694-610 A 227
A Migrate Redundant Domain Controllers
A.2 Preparation

A.2 Preparation
Prepare for the migration by ensuring that the following are available:
• Windows Server 2016 Installation media.
• IP addresses planned for the new servers.
• Firewall disabled on the Windows Server 2008 Domain Controllers as well as on
the new servers. (not applicable for online upgrade)
• Backups/disk images taken on both Windows Server 2008 Domain Controllers.
Firewall must be enabled after the Migration of Domain Controllers is completed.
If IPSec is used in the system, it must be disabled during the migration of Domain
Controllers and enabled after the migration.
Changing IPSec policies during Online upgrade is not recommended as this severely
impacts the proper running of the system.

A.2.1 Preparing a Domain for Windows Server 2016


Perform the following to identify the domain infrastructure operations master (also known
as flexible single master operations or FSMO) role holder.
• This procedure must be performed on the Domain Controller that holds the schema
master role.
• Administrative credentials: An account that is a member of the Domain Admins
group is required to perform this procedure. Membership in the Enterprise Admins
group is not sufficient to perform this procedure.
Run netdom query fsmo on any Domain Controller to ensure which Domain Controller
hosts the schema master role. Additionally, make a record of the different roles
available.
If all the roles are not hosted by one Domain Controller, ensure to transfer all the
roles to one Domain Controller.
1. Login as a member of the Domain Admins group to the Domain Controller node that
holds the schema master role.
2. Open Administrative Tools > Active Directory Domains and Trusts.
3. Verify that the available Domain Functional Level is set to Windows Server 2003
at minimum. If not, raise the Domain Functional Level to Windows Server 2003
or later.

2PAA111694-610 A 228
A Migrate Redundant Domain Controllers
A.3 Removing the Redundant Domain Controller

4. Verify that the available Forest Functional Level is set to Windows Server 2003
at minimum. If not, raise the Forest Functional Level to Windows Server 2003 or
later.
5. Click OK.

A.3 Removing the Redundant Domain Controller


A redundant Windows Server 2008 Domain Controller can be removed using the Windows
interface.
Perform the following to remove the redundant Windows Server 2008 Domain Controller
by using the Windows interface.
• This procedure must be performed on the redundant Windows Server 2008 Domain
Controller.
• Administrative credentials: An account that is a member of following group is required
to perform this procedure:
– Domain Admins.
1. Verify that both the Domain Controllers are global catalog servers.
a. Start AD Sites and Services.
b. Navigate to NTDS Settings of one Domain Controller in the left pane.
c. Right-click NTDS Settings and select Properties to open the NTDS
Settings Properties dialog box.
d. Verify that the Global Catalog check box is selected under the General
tab.
e. Repeat Step b. through Step d. for the other Domain Controller.
1. Under the General tab of the NTDS Settings Properties dialog box, clear the Global
Catalog check box, of the domain controller which is been migrated. click Apply,
and then click OK to continue.
2. Type dcpromo in the Run dialog box and click OK.
3. Click Next in the Active Directory Domain Services Installation Wizard dialog box.
4. Make no selection in the Delete the Domain dialog box and click Next.
5. Type and confirm a secure password for the local Administrator account in the
Administrator Password dialog box and click Next.
6. Review the information in the Summary dialog box and click Next.

2PAA111694-610 A 229
A Migrate Redundant Domain Controllers
A.4 Installing an Additional Windows Server 2016 Domain Controller

7. Click Finish when the message stating the successful completion of the operation
is displayed.
8. Restart the machine to complete the process.
9. Open Administrative Tools on the Domain Controller that having FSMO roles.
a. Verify that the redundant Domain Controller node has been removed from Active
Directory Users and Computers. If it has not, remove it manually.
b. Verify that the redundant Domain Controller node has been removed from Active
Directory Sites and Services. If it has not, remove it manually.
c. Verify that the redundant Domain Controller node has been removed from DNS.
If it has not, clean all the traces in the Name Server Tab for both Forward Lookup
and Reverse Lookup Zones.
10. Remove the node from the Domain.

A.4 Installing an Additional Windows Server 2016


Domain Controller
Perform the following to install an additional Windows Server 2016 Domain Controller
in an existing domain using the Windows interface. .
Install the new operating system defined in System 800xA Installation, Update, and
Upgrade Getting Started (2PAA111708*) and perform all the procedures related to
the operating system settings, Windows Service Packs, miscellaneous Windows
components installation, other third-party software, network settings, time
synchronization, and Windows updates and hot fixes.

Login as a local administrator to perform the following procedure.

1. Open Windows Control Panel.


2. Double-click Administrative Tools.
3. Double-click Server Manager to launch the Server Manager.
4. Click Add Roles and Features in the Roles Summary.
5. Follow the Add Roles and Features wizard till Server Roles dialog box.
6. Select the Active Directory Domain Services check box in the Select Server Roles
dialog box. Select Add Features on the popup that is displayed, and then click Next.
7. Follow the Add Roles and Features wizard till Confirmation dialog box.

2PAA111694-610 A 230
A Migrate Redundant Domain Controllers
A.4 Installing an Additional Windows Server 2016 Domain Controller

8. Click Install in the Confirm Installation Selections dialog box.


9. In the Installation Results dialog box click Close this Wizard after installation has
succeeded.

Ensure that all networks are disabled except networks that are used for the 800xA
System (Plant Network and/or Control Network).

10. Click the Notification icon in Server Manager dialog box and click
Promote this server to a domain controller.
11. Select Add a Domain Controller to an Existing Domain. Type the Domain
Administrator credentials, select the Domain using the Select button, and then click
Next.
12. Make the following selections in the Domain Controller Options dialog box and click
Next.
• DNS Server: This option is selected by default so that the Domain Controller
can function as a Domain Name System (DNS) server.
• Global Catalog: This option is selected by default. It adds the global catalog,
read-only directory partitions to the Domain Controller, and enables global
catalog search functionality.
• Read-only Domain Controller: This option is not selected by default and should
be kept as it is.

ABB recommends disabling the IPv6 protocol.

If static IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are not assigned to the network adapters, a warning
message box might appear advising the setting of static addresses for both of these
protocols before continuing. If static IPv4 address have been assigned to the network
adapter and the organization does not use IPv6, this message can be ignored by
clicking Yes, the computer will use a dynamically assigned IP address (not
recommended).
A message box may appear that indicates that a DNS delegation for the DNS server
could not be created, and that a DNS delegation to the DNS server to ensure reliable
name resolution should be manually created may appear if the option to install a DNS
server was selected. It is not required to create the DNS delegation if the additional
Domain Controller is being installed in either the forest root domain or a tree root
domain. Click Yes and disregard the message if this is the case.

2PAA111694-610 A 231
A Migrate Redundant Domain Controllers
A.5 Transferring the FSMO Roles to the Secondary Domain Controller

13. Type and confirm the restore mode password in the Directory Services Restore
Mode Administrator Password dialog box and click Next. This password must be
used to start AD DS in Directory Service Restore Mode (DSRM) for tasks that must
be performed offline.
14. In Additional Options Window, select the Primary Domain Controller for replication
from the drop-down and click Next.
15. Type or browse to the volume and folder locations for the following in the Location
for Database, Log Files, and SYSVOL dialog box, and then click Next.
• Database folder.
• Directory service log folder.
• System volume (SYSVOL) folder.
Windows Server Backup backs up the directory service by volume. For backup and
recovery efficiency, store these files on separate volumes that do not contain
applications or other non-directory files.
16. Review the selections in the Summary dialog box. Click Previous to change any
selections. Click Next when the selections are accurate to install.
To save the selected settings to an answer file that can be used to automate
subsequent AD DS operations, click View Script, type the name for the answer file,
and click Save.
17. Click Install if All prerequisite checks passed successfully message appears.
18. Click Finish in the Completing the Active Directory Domain Services Installation
Wizard dialog box.

A.5 Transferring the FSMO Roles to the Secondary


Domain Controller
Perform the following to transfer the FSMO roles to the Secondary Domain Controller:

This procedure must be performed on the new Domain Controller for every Role
transfer.

• Transferring the Schema Master Role on page 233.


• Transferring the Domain Naming Master Role on page 235.
• Transferring the RID Master, PDC Emulator, and Infrastructure Master Roles on
page 236.

2PAA111694-610 A 232
A Migrate Redundant Domain Controllers
A.5 Transferring the FSMO Roles to the Secondary Domain Controller

A.5.1 Transferring the Schema Master Role


Perform the following to transfer the Schema Master Role.
To transfer the Schema Master Role it is necessary to:
• Register the Schmmgmt.dll.
• Run the Active Directory Schema Master snap-in.

Registering Schmmgmt.dll
Perform the following to register Schmmgmt.dll.
1. Enter regsvr32 schmmgmt.dll in the Run dialog box and click OK.
2. Click OK when the message indicating that the operation succeeded appears.

Running the Active Directory Schema Master Snap-in


Perform the following to run the Active Directory Schema Master Snap-in.
1. Enter mmc in the Run dialog box and click OK.
2. Click Add/Remove Snap-in on the File menu.
3. Click Active Directory Schema.
4. Click Add.

2PAA111694-610 A 233
A Migrate Redundant Domain Controllers
A.5 Transferring the FSMO Roles to the Secondary Domain Controller

5. Click OK.
6. Right-click Active Directory Schema in the console tree and then click Change
Active Directory Domain Controller... to launch the Change Directory Server
dialog box ().
The status of the newly added Windows Server 2016 Domain Controller in the Change
Directory Server dialog box may show as Unavailable. To change the status to
Online, for one time, enable and disable TCP/IPv6 on the client-server network.

Figure A.1: Change Directory Server

In the Change to category, select This Domain Controller or AD LDS instance.


1. From the list provided, select the new Domain Controller machine, and then click
OK.
2. A warning stating that the Active Directory Schema is not connected to the Operations
Master will appear. Click Ok to close the warning message.
3. Right-click Active Directory Schema in the console tree and then click Operations
Master....
4. In the Change Schema Master dialog box, click Change to transfer the schema
master role to the 2016 Windows Server Domain Controller.

2PAA111694-610 A 234
A Migrate Redundant Domain Controllers
A.5 Transferring the FSMO Roles to the Secondary Domain Controller

5. Click Yes to confirm the transferring of the role.


6. Click Ok on the message that appears after a successful transfer of the Operations
Master.

Run the netdom query fsmo query to ensure that the role changes are reflected.

A.5.2 Transferring the Domain Naming Master Role


Perform the following to transfer the Domain Naming Master Role.
1. Open Active Directory Domains and Trusts from Administrative Tools.
2. Right-click Active Directory Domains and Trusts [Domain Name] in the console
tree and then click Change Active Directory Domain Controller... to launch the
Change Directory Server dialog box.
3. In the Change to category, select This Domain Controller or AD LDS instance.
4. From the list provided, select the new Domain Controller machine, and then click
OK.
5. Right-click Active Directory Domains and Trusts and then click Operations
Master... (Figure A.2).

Figure A.2: Operations Master Schema

6. Review the data and click Change to transfer the Domain Naming Master role.
7. Click Yes to confirm the transferring of the role.
8. Click Ok on the message that appears after a successful transfer of the Domain
Naming Master role.

2PAA111694-610 A 235
A Migrate Redundant Domain Controllers
A.5 Transferring the FSMO Roles to the Secondary Domain Controller

A.5.3 Transferring the RID Master, PDC Emulator, and Infrastructure Master
Roles
Perform the following to transfer the RID Master, PDC Emulator, and Infrastructure
Master Roles.
1. Expand Active Directory Users and Computers from Administrative Tools.
2. Right-click the Domain name and then click Operations Masters... to launch the
Operations Masters dialog box (Figure A.3).

Figure A.3: Active Directory Users and Computers Window

2PAA111694-610 A 236
A Migrate Redundant Domain Controllers
A.6 Removing the Remaining Windows Server 2008 Domain Controller

3. Click the appropriate tab for the master role to transfer RID Master, PDC, and
Infrastructure. Review the information and click Change.

Figure A.4: Operations Master Tabbed Interface

4. Click Yes to confirm transferring of the role.


5. Click OK on the message displaying the successful completion of the role transfer.

Run the netdom query fsmo query to ensure that the changes to the roles are applied.

A.6 Removing the Remaining Windows Server 2008


Domain Controller
The remaining Windows Server 2008 Domain Controller can be removed using the
Windows interface.
Refer to Removing the Redundant Domain Controller for the procedure to remove the
remaining Windows Server 2008 Domain Controller.

2PAA111694-610 A 237
A Migrate Redundant Domain Controllers
A.7 Installing an Additional Windows Server 2016 Domain Controller

A.7 Installing an Additional Windows Server 2016


Domain Controller
Refer to Installing an Additional Windows Server 2016 Domain Controller to install an
additional Windows Server 2016 Domain Controller in an existing domain using the
Windows interface.

A.8 Required 800xA Software


The Domain controllers must be prepared using the Node Preparation Tool to install the
required 800xA software by using Generic Node option. Refer to the System 800xA
Installation, Update and Upgrade Getting Started ( 2PAA111708*) for detailed procedure.

2PAA111694-610 A 238
B Troubleshooting
B.1 Errors and Warnings during Upgrade

Appendix B Troubleshooting

This section is divided into:


• Errors and Warnings during Upgrade
• Troubleshooting during Deploy

B.1 Errors and Warnings during Upgrade


The warning and error messages that can be generated by the 800xA backup/restore
function are described in the following topics. Suggested solutions are also provided.

B.1.1 Failed to Serialize Aspect


Example
Tue Jul 01 08:41:03 2003 [Error]: Failed to serialize aspect 'Operator Messages Link
Display' on object 'Web System Workplace'
Reason
It is not possible for the Backup function to save the aspect data.
Solution
Check in the system for the behavior of this aspect.

B.1.2 ASO Object Class xxxx


did not Implement IAfwAspectSystemObject. Failed to Create ASO. Forgot to Register
dll?
Example
Tue Jun 10 19:02:17 2003 [Error]: ASO object class
{7B7A13B3-8BB4-42A3-8289-987C579797C2}did not implement IAfwAspectSystemObject
Failed to create ASO. Forgot to register dll?
Reason

2PAA111694-610 A 239
B Troubleshooting
B.1 Errors and Warnings during Upgrade

This often occurs when a system extension is used, but not installed on the node from
where the backup is taken. It can also happen if an update of a system extension has
been installed, but not added to the system.
Solution
Install all system extensions on the node from where the backup is taken. Make sure
that the correct version of the system extension is installed.

B.1.3 UnplacedObjects.afw
Example
[Warning] c:\PPABackup\MyBackup\UnplacedObjects.afw created
Reason
During backup process, the backup tool goes through all structures, if there is an object
that doesn't exist in any structure, it will be placed in UnplacedObjects.afw and write a
warning in the backup log, therefore, UnplacedObjects.afw is used for all objects which
miss the structure.
Solution
Check if there is any important object in UnplacedObjects.afw. If there is an important
object in UnplacedObjects.afw, your backup is considered to be not complete. In such
case, investigate what kind of object it is, and try to repair the system. One solution could
be to add the object into the structure it should belong to. Take another backup.

B.1.4 The System Cannot Find the Path Specified


Example
Error detected for aspect 'Empty A3P' of object 'Document Manager Templates/Document
Manager File Templates/Drawings'
Tue Jun 08 00:43:30 2004 The system cannot find the path specified.
EbServiceHandler: Object Id = {9AFACBA5-6B6A-462A-9EDF-78765740CD52}, Aspect
Id = {89F8A8C4-10F7-4874-B77D-A8E6445D5C93}
EbServiceHandler: Failed to load document into stream!
Reason
When the backup was taken, the FSD cache was set too low. All data has NOT been
backed up. There should be warnings in the System Event list about overflow in the Fsd
cache.
Solution

2PAA111694-610 A 240
B Troubleshooting
B.1 Errors and Warnings during Upgrade

Increase the Fsd Cache size (for all nodes).

B.1.5 System Extension ´xxxx´ with ID ´Guid` is not Installed on this Node
Example
System extension 'Engineering Base' with id
{B775BEA4-7859-4649-AE16-901790822886} is not installed on this node.
System extension 'AC800M Con 31SP1' with id
{6F388AEC-E4FF-4614-AF80-1D37EC3B141F} is not installed on this node.
Reason
There is a system extension, which is not available in the node where the backup is
taken, or which is not properly removed. The latter can be the case if AC800 Connect
has been upgraded and the old version is still registered in Industrial IT 800xA.
Solution
Use a backup node where all system extensions are installed.

B.1.6 Timeout by External Service


Example
Thu Mar 04 02:34:55 2004 #1: Receiving files
Thu Mar 04 02:34:56 2004 #1: Receiving files
Thu Mar 04 02:34:57 2004 #1: Receiving files
Thu Mar 04 02:34:57 2004 #1: Finishing
Thu Mar 04 02:34:58 2004
Thu Mar 04 02:35:08 2004 TimeOut by External Service
Reason
History or System Message data was backed up using the backup/restore function. This
functionality is not yet supported.
Solution
History and System Message data has to be saved manually, as described in reference
[2] Release Notes. Create a new backup, without including History or System Message
data.

2PAA111694-610 A 241
B Troubleshooting
B.1 Errors and Warnings during Upgrade

B.1.7 Graphic Aspect = xxx Cannot be Imported


Example
Mon Mar 29 19:52:32 2004 [Error]: Object = WI Mezzanine Deck, graphic aspect = Page
Prev cannot be imported. Source directory =
d:\OperateITData\Temp\ActiveGraphics\{800BA917-3D7F-44B6-B647-90C4B06A98FA}.restore.2.
Reason
Could be different reasons.
Solution
Check the source directory specified in the error message. The log file in this directory
should give some hints of what caused the problem.

B.1.8 Too Many Aspects of Category


Example
Sat Jun 05 17:04:33 2004: Too many aspects of category 'Name' on object
'{82416BDF-5464-4422-A443-35E08E1065BE}'
Sat Jun 05 17:04:34 2004: Import/Export Error: Object
{82416BDF-5464-4422-A443-35E08E1065BE}
({82416BDF-5464-4422-A443-35E08E1065BE}) - E_AFW_AD_TOO_MANY_ASPECTS
(0x8abb081b) To many aspect of a specific type.
Sat Jun 05 17:04:34 2004: Failed to restore file C:\BWSC\BWSC Full Backup; 2004-06-03;
03-00\Control Structure28.afw. The importer returned hr = 0x8abb081b
Reason
The system was inconsistent at backup time (there were more than one aspect of category
'Name' on an object). The backup does not react on this, but restore will fail. The restore
part will be fixed in a later release (it will be possible to import such an object, but a
warning will be granted).
Solution
Open the file (in this case Control Structure28.afw) with the old import/export utility
(<Install path>\bin\AfwImportExport_obsolete.exe), search for the aspect category and
manually remove one of the two aspect categories.

B.1.9 Aspect Category is Missing


Example

2PAA111694-610 A 242
B Troubleshooting
B.1 Errors and Warnings during Upgrade

Sat Jun 05 16:41:27 2004: Aspect '{506D9D24-E22A-4EDB-AFB0-0753B6DB6990}' on


object 'SoftPoint Object Types' cannot be restored because the aspect category is missing
Sat Jun 05 16:41:27 2004: ObjectId: {9574CC3B-0E5E-4B14-A83E-F483CCDE6E44}
Sat Jun 05 16:41:27 2004: AspectId: {506D9D24-E22A-4EDB-AFB0-0753B6DB6990}
Reason
One or more aspect categories have been removed, while there are aspects of that
category still in the system. This inconsistency was present in the system when the
backup was taken.
Solution
If the aspect category has been removed then these aspects may not be of interest any
more. Check if the aspects are needed. If not, ignore this message.

B.1.10 Unknown Transaction Error


Example 1
Mon Apr 19 13:39:40 2004: Unknown transaction error
Reason
If this is the only error message, there is probably a problem with some windows
resources.
Solution
Check your windows resources.
Example 2
Mon Jun 28 08:37:08 2004: Loading C:\BACKUP\Full Backup; 2004-06-23; 10-39\Aspect
System Structure0.afw ...
Mon Jun 28 08:37:09 2004: Aspect 'Batch Management Operation' on object 'Batch
Management Documents' failed to unserialize itself.
Mon Jun 28 08:37:09 2004: ObjectId: {814786F8-E6CC-44B0-9A2A-1787FADDFE6F}
Mon Jun 28 08:37:09 2004: AspectId: {2CE41978-DE94-44AC-9D38-B216FBA93C3A}
Reason
It is not possible for the Restore function to restore the aspect data.
Solution
No solution available.

2PAA111694-610 A 243
B Troubleshooting
B.1 Errors and Warnings during Upgrade

B.1.11 Import/Export Error


Description
Restore of 800xA back-up on a node with Engineering Studio installed, may result in the
following error in Configuration Wizard log:
" Importing files for ABB Engineering Base ...
Loading C:\Program Files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Engineer IT\Engineering
Studio\Engineering Base\import\10_Workplace_Structure_EngineeringStudio.afw ...
Import/Export Error: Engineering Workplace:AC 800M/C Colors - Missing color definition
Engineering Workplace:AC 800M/C Colors - Missing color definition
Import/Export Error: Aspect 'AC 800M/C Colors' reported aspect hook error
(PrepareCommit):
** Aspect Hook Error **
Reason
AC 800M/C Colors aspect definition is not yet loaded in the system.
Solution
No solution exists. Users can ignore this error.

2PAA111694-610 A 244
B Troubleshooting
B.2 Troubleshooting during Deploy

B.2 Troubleshooting during Deploy


The error messages that can be generated while deploying a node are described in the
following topics. Suggested solutions are also provided.
1. Problem: In very rare circumstances running Node Preparation Tool (NPT) will
create an error due to failure in stopping WMI Performance Adapter service.
Workaround: Stop and disable the WMI Performance Adapter service manually
from windows services and restart the node. After restart NPT will run automatically.
2. Problem: During deploy of a node in very few cases, 800xA Notification Icon on the
node will display bad status and deploy might not proceed.

Figure B.1: Notification Icon

Workaround: The node needs to be disconnected and connected back to the 800xA
System for deploy to proceed.
a. Right-click on the Notification Icon and open Configuration Wizard.
b. Select Disconnect Node and click Next. Proceed to disconnect the node.
c. After node is disconnected, select Connect Node and click Next.
d. Select Primary Aspect Server Node from drop-down and click Next.
e. Proceed to connect the node back to 800xA System.

2PAA111694-610 A 245
B Troubleshooting
B.2 Troubleshooting during Deploy

3. If due to any reasons, Deploy System fails in the SCC tool with an error on a node(s),
the user has following options available.
• Click Retry and proceed
In few cases, clicking on the Retry button can be a quick solution. If Retry
button is enabled in Deploy window, prefer this as first option before trying out
other options.

Figure B.2: Retry Option

• If the reason of failure is known, you can choose to manually resolve the issue
with that particular node function(s) and proceed with deployment of rest of the
nodes in the system.
a. On the Deploy window, expand the node where Deploy failed.
b. Right-click on the node function that failed.
c. Select Manually Resolve.
d. Click OK.
This will ensure only the node function(s) that is failed is skipped and rest
of the system deployment continues as planned.

2PAA111694-610 A 246
B Troubleshooting
B.2 Troubleshooting during Deploy

Figure B.3: Manually Resolve

2PAA111694-610 A 247
B Troubleshooting
B.2 Troubleshooting during Deploy

• If there are multiple failures on the node(s) which cannot be resolved immediately
(like Hardware failure), you can choose to skip the deployment of entire node(s)
that have failed and continue with the deployment on rest of the nodes in the
system.
a. On the Deploy window, click Abort > Abort deploy in progress.

Figure B.4: Aborting the Deploy

b. In the System Configuration Console window, use Exclusion option to


exclude the node(s) that are failed and click Deploy system.

2PAA111694-610 A 248
B Troubleshooting
B.2 Troubleshooting during Deploy

Figure B.5: Node Exclusion

This will ensure only the node(s) that is failed is skipped and rest of the
system deployment continues as planned.
Once the errors are rectified and the failed node(s) are ready for
re-deployment, do the following.
c. Open System Configuration Console Tool on the Primary aspect server.
d. Select Configure system > System nodes.

2PAA111694-610 A 249
B Troubleshooting
B.2 Troubleshooting during Deploy

e. Replace the node(s) in the plan where the deploy failed by selecting that
node and clicking Node actions... > Replace node... option.

Figure B.6: Replacing the node in the plan

f. Select the node and click Node actions... > Deploy.... This will re-deploy
the selected node and all its node functions.

2PAA111694-610 A 250
C Control Builder M Compatibility Check
C.1 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Compatibility Issues

Appendix C Control Builder M Compatibility


Check

This appendix lists the compatibility issues when upgrading from 800xA 5.1 to 800xA
6.1.

C.1 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Compatibility Issues


Table C.1 lists and describes Control Builder M compatibility issues, including solutions
to the issues, when upgrading from 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1.

Table C.1: 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Control Builder M Compatibility Issues

Component/Function Issue Solution


When upgrading from 5.1:
CI851 and CI852 are no It will no longer be They should be replaced with
longer supported possible to perform CI854 and CI860 instead.
co-existence downloads
to old controllers with
firmware that supports
CI851 and CI852. CI851
and CI852 related HWD
files will emit warnings
due to removed syntax.

2PAA111694-610 A 251
C Control Builder M Compatibility Check
C.1 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Compatibility Issues

Table C.1: 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Control Builder M Compatibility Issues
(Continued)
Component/Function Issue Solution
ABBDrvFenaCI871HwLib To solve the problem with If any workaround is configured
1.0-3 negative values like in the 61131 application e.g. to
ABBDrvRetaCI871HwLib unsupported negative survive the negative speed value
1.0-6 speed, all I/O-channels issue, these workarounds must
instead of Status and be removed when using the
Command have been updated Library versions.
changed to operate the See Product Bulletin
data to and from the drive 3BSE047421D0166 for details as
as signed instead of well.
unsigned Integer value.
ABBDrvFenaCI871HwLib These libraries have been If the intention is to continue
version 1 moved to AC 800M running with co-existence the
CI868IEC61850HwLib Classic system extension. Classic Library Extension has to
version 2 See System 800xA be installed. A message will
Release Notes New appear to inform the user during
CI871PROFINETHwLib
Functions and known upgrade.
version 1
Problems (2PAA111899*)
S900IoCI854HwLib for current versions of the
version 1 libraries.
CI871PROFINETHwLib The maximum value for Ensure that the value of "Red.
version 2 "Red. Ethernet recovery Ethernet recovery time” is set to
time” has been <= 1726 ms. Otherwise a
decreased. download might get blocked.
CI871PROFINETHwLib Some settings have Configured values will be taken
version 2 changed names. Disable from existing configuration and
diagnosis alarms -> converted to new definition
Diagnosis, Disable automatically. The configured
process alarms (SOE) -> functionality will not change.
Process alarms (SOE)

2PAA111694-610 A 252
C Control Builder M Compatibility Check
C.1 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Compatibility Issues

Table C.1: 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Control Builder M Compatibility Issues
(Continued)
Component/Function Issue Solution
SignalReal FB To prevent that the out Before an upgrade it is advisable
signal from a SignalReal to check the configured ranges
with an extremely high in for SignalReal objects so that the
value freezes, a limitation limitation of Out values does not
of the out value has been affect the application program.
implemented. The out
value can now not
exceed the signal range
with more than 10 times.
Outmax=(Max-Min)*10+Max
and
Outmin=-[(Max-Min)*10+Min].
Hidden FB types If a hidden function block Create a new function block to
type from an ABB replace the hidden block before
Standard Library has upgrading.
been used this will now
generate a compilation
error. A new function
block to replace the
hidden block must be
created before upgrading
before upgrading.
MinReached and The MinReached and User-defined control modules or
MaxReached MaxReached function blocks with Control
components of a Control Connection parameters may need
Connection are now set to be revised accordingly.
when the value goes
above/below the
respective range limit,
and not as earlier when
they were set at or
above/below the limit.

2PAA111694-610 A 253
C Control Builder M Compatibility Check
C.1 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Compatibility Issues

Table C.1: 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Control Builder M Compatibility Issues
(Continued)
Component/Function Issue Solution
Parameter name change On control modules If there was a textual connection
in PidAdvancedCC and PidAdvancedCC and to the ERF parameter it will be
PidC PidC, the parameter ERF removed during upgrade and has
has changed name to to be manually added.
EBV, External back
value.
Hardware types created During project upgrade Save the hardware units after the
with DIW from version 5.1.0 or channel name change.
earlier, variable
connections may be lost
during project upgrade.
The problem only affects
hardware types created
with DIW, and only
channels for which the
channel name has been
changed.
Hardware tree If hardware modules at Re-name the modules before
the same level do not upgrade.
have unique names a
compilation warning will
be given due to duplicate
instance name.
Update output signals The setting, Update Select the default value manually.
first output signals first, is not
allowed for AC 800M HI
controllers PM857,
PM863 and PM867. This
will lead to a compilation
error if it was selected in
the Task properties dialog
for the controller.

2PAA111694-610 A 254
C Control Builder M Compatibility Check
C.1 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Compatibility Issues

Table C.1: 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Control Builder M Compatibility Issues
(Continued)
Component/Function Issue Solution
Execution order The compiler switch for Resolve the loops.
sorting loops can no
longer be set to Allowed.
If the value is set to
Allowed, it will be
changed to warning after
upgrade.
Co-existence download Depending on the Before download check if there is
application there may be more than 50% memory available.
a peak in memory usage If not, download the applications
during coexistence one a a time.
download from 6.1 to
older versions due to a
compiler change.
Co-existence download During co-existence Remove the Protocol Handler
and TCP communication download the from the HW tree and download.
TCPServerConnect Then add it again and make a
function block shows new download.
ServerStatus code 6902. or
This is due to a format
Reset the controller.
change in the Protocol
Handler for TCP.
When upgrading from 5.1 FP4:
CI851 and CI852 are no It will no longer be They should be replaced with
longer supported. possible to perform CI854 and CI860 instead.
co-existence downloads
to old controllers with
firmware that supports
CI851 and CI852. CI851
and CI852 related HWD
files will emit warnings
due to removed syntax.

2PAA111694-610 A 255
C Control Builder M Compatibility Check
C.1 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Compatibility Issues

Table C.1: 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Control Builder M Compatibility Issues
(Continued)
Component/Function Issue Solution
Restriction to configure In previous release of This configuration is now
CV Ack Group to Access 5.1.1 it was possible to restricted with a compiler check.
Variables with direction configure Acknowledge
out groups for communication
variables used for
communication within the
same task and also for
communication variables
having direction out.
These configurations has
no effect and the
configuration is not
relevant.
Name change from ERF On control modules The function is still the same if the
to EBV PidAdvancedCC and EBV parameter is connected. If
PidC, the parameter ERF connected the EBV value is used
has changed name to instead of the backward value in
EBV, External back the Control Connection in the
value. controller output parameter.
ABBDrvFenaCI871HwLib To solve the problem with If any workaround is configured
1.0-3 negative values like in the 61131 application e.g. to
ABBDrvRetaCI871HwLib unsupported negative survive the negative speed value
1.0-6 speed, all I/O-channels issue, these workarounds must
instead of Status and be removed when using the
ABBDrvFpbaCI854HwLib
Command have been updated Library versions.
1.0-2
changed to operate the See Product Bulletin
data to and from the drive 3BSE047421D0166 for details as
as signed instead of well.
unsigned Integer value.

2PAA111694-610 A 256
C Control Builder M Compatibility Check
C.1 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Compatibility Issues

Table C.1: 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Control Builder M Compatibility Issues
(Continued)
Component/Function Issue Solution
ABBDrvFenaCI871HwLib These libraries have been If the intention is to continue
1-0-3.afw moved to AC 800M running with co-existence the
CI868IEC61850HwLib Classic system extension. Classic Library Extension has to
2-20-0.afw See System 800xA be installed. A message will
Release Notes New appear to inform the user during
CI871PROFINETHwLib
Functions and known upgrade.
1-10-10.afw
Problems (2PAA111899*)
S900IoCI854HwLib for current versions of the
1-1-2.afw libraries.
CI871PROFINETHwLib The maximum value for Ensure that the value of "Red.
version 2 "Red. Ethernet recovery Ethernet recovery time” is set to
time” has been <= 1726 ms. Otherwise a
decreased. download might get blocked.
CI871PROFINETHwLib Some settings have Configured values will be taken
version 2 changed names. Disable from existing configuration and
diagnosis alarms -> converted to new definition
Diagnosis, Disable automatically. The configured
process alarms (SOE) -> functionality will not change.
Process alarms (SOE)
SignalReal FB To prevent that the out Before an upgrade it is advisable
signal from a SignalReal to check the configured ranges
with an extremely high in for SignalReal objects so that the
value freezes, a limitation limitation of Out values does not
of the out value has been affect the application program.
implemented. The out
value can now not
exceed the signal range
with more than 10 times.
Outmax=(Max-Min)*10+Max
and
Outmin=-[(Max-Min)*10+Min].

2PAA111694-610 A 257
C Control Builder M Compatibility Check
C.1 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Compatibility Issues

Table C.1: 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Control Builder M Compatibility Issues
(Continued)
Component/Function Issue Solution
Hidden FB types If a function block, not Create a new function block to
belonging to the ABB replace the hidden block before
Standard Libraries, upgrading.
includes a hidden
function block from
standard libraries there
will be a compilation error
since the function block
has been removed.
MinReached and The MinReached and User-defined control modules or
MaxReached MaxReached function blocks with Control
components of a Control Connection parameters may need
Connection are now set to be revised accordingly.
when the value goes
above/below the
respective range limit,
and not as earlier when
they were set at or
above/below the limit.
Hardware types created During project upgrade Save the hardware units after the
with DIW from version 5.1.0 or channel name change.
earlier, variable
connections may be lost
during project upgrade.
The problem only affects
hardware types created
with DIW, and only
channels for which the
channel name has been
changed.
Hardware tree If hardware modules at Re-name the modules before
the same level do not upgrade.
have unique names a
compilation warning will
be given due to duplicate
instance name.

2PAA111694-610 A 258
C Control Builder M Compatibility Check
C.1 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Compatibility Issues

Table C.1: 800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 Control Builder M Compatibility Issues
(Continued)
Component/Function Issue Solution
Execution order The compiler switch for Resolve the loops.
sorting loops can no
longer be set to Allowed.
If the value is set to
Allowed, it will be
changed to warning after
upgrade.
Co-existence download Depending on the Before download check if there is
application there may be more than 50% memory available.
a peak in memory usage If not, download the applications
during coexistence one a a time.
download from 6.1 to
older versions due to a
compiler change.
Co-existence download During co-existence Remove the Protocol Handler
and TCP communication download the from the HW tree and download.
TCPServerConnect Then add it again and make a
function block shows new download.
ServerStatus code 6902. or
This is due to a change
Reset the controller.
in the format in the
Protocol Handler for TCP.

2PAA111694-610 A 259
2PAA111694-610 A 260
D Online Upgrade Controller Level
D.1 Online Upgrade Controller Level

Appendix D Online Upgrade Controller Level

The information in this appendix is intended only as a high level introduction to the online
upgrade of the controller level. Detailed information appears in the controller and control
software instructions.
As a preparation the AC 800M OLU Qualification tool can be used. The tool will not
impact / change any settings in the safety system but is simply used to help verifying
if an AC 800M controller should be qualified to perform an OLU.
For more information about the OLU Qualification Tool, see System 800xA Tools
(2PAA101888*).

D.1 Online Upgrade Controller Level


Redundant AC 800M controllers can be upgraded with new firmware versions online.
Online upgrade is initiated from Control Builder by a nine-step wizard. Refer to the
Maintenance and Troubleshooting section in System 800xA - AC 800M Configuration
(3BSE035980*) for more information.
In order to use online upgrade for the controller level:
• Refer to the Control and I/O, Control Software for AC 800M section of System 800xA
Release Notes New Functions and Known Problems (2PAA106188*) for the controller
versions that support online upgrade.
• AC 800M Controllers require the client and server level to be of the same or higher
800xA System version/revision. Refer to 800xA Online upgrade and Co-existence,
versions compatibility (3BSE080447) in the ABB Library and myABB/My Control
System portal for the supported upgrade paths.
• AC 800M Controllers must be redundant. A redundant controller consists of two
redundant processing units connected to I/O modules or CI modules.
• AC 800M Controller firmware and its CI modules can be upgraded independently.
– AC 800M controller firmware and the SM810, SM811, SM812 (safety)
CI modules must be upgraded simultaneously.

2PAA111694-610 A 261
D Online Upgrade Controller Level
D.2 Flowchart for Upgrading Controller Level

• Different AC 800M Controllers with different 800xA System versions/revisions can


coexist. This allows for extensions of an 800xA System with new AC 800M Controllers
or other new 800xA System functionality without having to upgrade all existing
controllers.
– Starting from 800xA 5.0, upgrading to newer versions of Control Builder and/or
OPC Server does not require a controller upgrade. Controllers with different
firmware versions can coexist in the same network, and newer versions of
Control Builder and OPC Server can connect to controllers of older versions
(not older than 800xA 5.0). Refer to the Control and I/O, Control Software for
AC 800M section of System 800xA Release Notes New Functions and Known
Problems (2PAA106188*) for the controller versions that support coexistence.
Refer to 800xA Online upgrade and Co-existence, versions compatibility
(3BSE080447) in the ABB Library and myABB/My Control System portal for
the supported upgrade paths.
– Hardware types can coexist in different 800xA System versions/revisions in the
same 800xA System.
– Controllers that need to take advantage of new functionality are the only ones
that have to be upgraded. Other controllers can remain untouched. This
backwards compatibility is typically kept for two previous system versions.
• Upgrading nonredundant AC 800M Controllers is accomplished with minimized plant
disturbance by stopping and upgrading one controller at a time. The client and server
level can still be upgraded online, as long as the conditions are met for performing
an online upgrade on the client and server level.
Hot swap is the method to be used for a nonredundant AC 800M controller with redundant
CI modules and unchanged controller firmware.

D.2 Flowchart for Upgrading Controller Level


Figure D.1 shows the upgrade flow for the controller level.

2PAA111694-610 A 262
D Online Upgrade Controller Level
D.2 Flowchart for Upgrading Controller Level

Figure D.1: Online Upgrade Flowchart for Controller Level

2PAA111694-610 A 263
D Online Upgrade Controller Level
D.3 Flowchart for Extending Controller Level

D.3 Flowchart for Extending Controller Level


Figure D.2 shows the flow for extending the controller level to add new AC 800M
Controllers with the latest 800xA System version/revision to an existing plant with or
without upgrading the existing AC 800M Controllers.

2PAA111694-610 A 264
D Online Upgrade Controller Level
D.3 Flowchart for Extending Controller Level

Figure D.2: Flowchart for Extending Plant with New Controllers

2PAA111694-610 A 265
2PAA111694-610 A 266
E 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Online Upgrade
E.1 Prerequisites

Appendix E 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony


Online Upgrade

This appendix describes the 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony online upgrade
procedures.

E.1 Prerequisites
Two additional network switches are required for network isolation when performing
an online upgrade.

When an online upgrade of an 800xA 5.1 System is performed on a system that includes
800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony, the 800xA 5.1 and 800xA 6.1 Systems must be
kept on separate network(s) until the 800xA 5.1 System is no longer required. For more
information, refer to the Upgrade Flow procedure provided in Considerations and Upgrade
Flow. An online upgrade requires redundant Aspect Servers, Harmony Connectivity
Servers, and Domain Controllers in the case of a domain.

Do not make any configuration changes on the 800xA System running the older
version during the online upgrade.

During an online upgrade the second domain controller must be promoted to a primary
domain controller, upgraded to Server Operating System, the domain roles transferred
to the node and finally moved to the isolated 800xA 6.1 network(s).

E.2 Node Order


This node order is different than what is described in Introduction.

2PAA111694-610 A 267
E 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Online Upgrade
E.3 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Upgrade Procedure

From System Version 6.1, the 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Configuration
Server is not available. Standalone Configuration Server nodes can remain in the
system as Application Server nodes or they can be removed from the system. The
combined 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Configuration and Connectivity Server
nodes will be 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Connectivity Server nodes in the
upgraded system (800xA 6.1 System).
The upgrade is a node-by-node procedure that must be performed in the following node
order:
Online Upgrade Node Order
• Redundant Domain Controller
• Redundant Aspect Server(s)
• Redundant 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Connectivity Server(s)
• Application Server(s) and Configuration Server(s) that are to be used as Application
Server(s)
• Client(s)
• Primary Connectivity Server(s) and combined Configuration and Connectivity
Server(s)
• Primary Aspect Server
• Primary Domain Controller

E.3 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Upgrade


Procedure
Perform the procedure as follows:
1. Perform the applicable pre-upgrade procedures from Pre-Upgrade Procedures for
800xA 5.1 to 800xA 6.1 upgrade.
2. Create a backup of the 800xA System from the Maintenance structure. Refer to
System 800xA Maintenance (3BSE046784*) user manual.
The 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Standalone ConfigServer Export tool must
be run before performing the 800xA System backup. Refer to 800xA for Symphony
Plus Harmony instructions in the Pre-Upgrade Procedures section for more information.
3. Prepare System 800xA for upgrade. Refer Preparing the System 800xA 5.1.

2PAA111694-610 A 268
E 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Online Upgrade
E.3 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Upgrade Procedure

4. For an online upgrade in a domain environment, prepare the node to move to the
isolated network(s) by performing the following steps:

Skip this step if System 800xA is configured in a Workgroup Environment.

a. Migrate the redundant Domain Controller as per instructions in Migrate


Redundant Domain Controllers and perform following steps.
- Preparing a Domain for Windows Server 2016.
- Remove the Redundant Domain Controller.
- Installing an Additional Windows Server 2016 Domain Controller.
- Transfer the FSMO Roles to the Secondary Domain Controller.
b. Move Redundant Domain Controller to isolated 800xA 6.1 network(s).
c. Install 800xA software on Domain Controller once the machine is on
the isolated 800xA 6.1 network(s) as per instructions in Required 800xA
Software.
When an online upgrade of an 800xA 5.1 System is performed on a system that
includes 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony, the 800xA 5.1 and 800xA 6.1 Systems
must be kept on separate network(S) until the 800xA 5.1 System is no longer required.
5. Upgrade Redundant Aspect Server, refer Redundant Aspect Server.
6. Upgrade Redundant Connectivity Servers, refer Redundant Connectivity Servers.
7. Perform the steps in Harmony API Configuration, Harmony Configuration Server
Information and Restart Connectivity Server
8. If 800xA System has 2oo3 redundancy, upgrade the other Redundant Aspect Server.
Refer Redundant Aspect Server (2oo3 Redundancy Only).
9. Upgrade some of the operator clients, refer Clients.
10. If 800xA system has Information Management Server, upgrade the server. Refer
Information Management Server.
11. Upgrade the Application Servers and Harmony Configuration Servers (If planned
to be used as other application server). Refer Application Servers.
12. Upgrade the remaining nodes except the Primary Aspect Server, refer Remaining
Nodes.

2PAA111694-610 A 269
E 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Online Upgrade
E.3 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Upgrade Procedure

13. Upgrade the Primary Aspect Server, refer Primary Aspect Server.

2PAA111694-610 A 270
E 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Online Upgrade
E.3 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Upgrade Procedure

14. Reload the remaining Domain Controller and add it to the domain.

Skip this step if System 800xA is configured in a Workgroup Environment.

a. Load the operating system of the remaining Domain Controller installing an


additional Server Operating System Domain Controller. Install the new operating
system defined in System 800xA Installation, Update, and Upgrade Getting
Started (2PAA111708*) and perform all the procedures related to the operating
system settings, Windows Service Packs, miscellaneous Windows components
installation, other third-party software, network settings, time synchronization,
and Windows updates and hot fixes.Make sure the hard drive is reformatted
during the operating system load.
b. Move remaining Domain Controller to isolated 800xA 6.1 network(s).

A message appears while installing Additional Domain Controller, check Allow domain
controller reinstall option. (see Figure E.1)

Figure E.1: Domain Controller reinstall

c. Install the remaining Domain Controller as an Additional Domain Controller.


Refer to the instructions in Installing an Additional Windows Server 2016 Domain
Controller

2PAA111694-610 A 271
E 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Online Upgrade
E.3 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony Upgrade Procedure

d. Install required 800xA software on Domain Controller once the machine is on


the isolated 800xA 6.1 network(s). Refer to the instructions in Required 800xA
Software.

2PAA111694-610 A 272
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names

Appendix F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and


Service Provider Names

To make the future updates and upgrades easier, the Service Group names and Service
Provider names must match either the default mandatory service names for 800xA Base
6.1 or the configured names for node functions with Server Groups and Providers
configured in Configure System task within SCC tool. It is mandatory to rename the
Service Group and Provider names on the Primary Aspect Server according to Table
F.1.
If the Service Group names and Service Provider names do not match in the
configuration created by the system installer, Deploy can fail or duplicate Service
Groups and Providers may be created after upgrade. In this case the duplicate Service
Groups and Providers needs to be cleaned up from 800xA 6.1 system looking at
800xA 5.1 reference System.
Table F.1 shows the mandatory service group and service provider names in 800xA
Base 6.1.

Table F.1: Mandatory Service Group and Service Provider Names in 800xA Base 6.1
Service Name Service Group Name Service Provider Name
Alarm Manager Alarm Manager Alarm Manager on node NodeName
Alarm Property Server Alarm Property Server Alarm Property Server on node NodeName
AspectDirectory AspectDirectory AspectDirectory on node NodeName
BackupService BackupService BackupService on node NodeName
Cross referencing server Cross referencing server Cross referencing server on node NodeName
Event Collector ABB 800xA Soft Alarms Event Collector_ABB 800xA Soft Alarms OPC
OPC Server Server_NodeName
Event Collector ABB 800xA System Event Collector_ABB 800xA System Message
Message Server Server_NodeName
File Set Distribution File Set Distribution File Set Distribution on node NodeName

2PAA111694-610 A 273
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names

Table F.1: Mandatory Service Group and Service Provider Names in 800xA Base 6.1
(Continued)
Service Name Service Group Name Service Provider Name
Lock Server Lock Server Lock Server on node NodeName
Soft Alarms Soft Alarms Soft Alarms on node NodeName
System Message Server System Message Server System Message Server on node NodeName
System Status System Status System Status on node NodeName
Workplace Service Workplace Service Workplace Service on node NodeName
Property Expression Property Expression Property Expression Manager on node NodeName
Manager Manager
Event Storage Event Storage Event Storage on node NodeName

Table F.2 shows the mandatory service group and service provider names in 800xA
Base 6.1.

Table F.2: Default Service Group and Service Provider Names in 800xA 6.1
Service Name Service Group Name Service Provider Name
Alarm Analysis Alarm Analysis Alarm Analysis on NodeName
Alarm Logger Alarm Logger Alarm Logger on NodeName
Basic History Basic History Basic History on NodeName
Note: If there is more than one service group in
the system, the service group name must be
unique. The relationship between the nodes and
service groups must be recorded, so the matching
service providers and groups are properly
renamed.
Basic History Service Group and providers names
on IM servers or 800xA History Archive servers
do not need to be renamed. These names are not
set by the System Installer.
External Alarm External Alarm External Alarm on NodeName
Property Transfer Property Transfer Property Transfer on NodeName
Batch Service Batch Primary
Secondary

2PAA111694-610 A 274
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names

Table F.2: Default Service Group and Service Provider Names in 800xA 6.1
(Continued)
Service Name Service Group Name Service Provider Name
Event Collector Batch Primary
Secondary
Calculation Server Calculation Group Calculations_nodename
Note: If there is more than one service group in
the system, the service group name must be
unique. The relationship between nodes and
service groups must be recorded, so the matching
service providers and groups are properly
renamed.
In System 800xA latest release, only the service
group and provider name on the aspect server
needs to be modified. All Service group and
provider names is corrected during the deploy of
the other nodes.
Scheduler Scheduler Group Scheduler_nodename
For system with more than one Scheduler group,
it is recommended that the scheduler service group
names be configured in the system installer to
match the names in the system being restored. If
the name does not match, All action aspects that
reference a specific scheduler group will have to
be reconfigured to point to the correct scheduler
group when the upgrade is done. Without this, all
actions will run from the default group.
Note: If there is more than one service group in
the system, the service group name must be
unique. The relationship between nodes and
service groups must be recorded, so the matching
service providers and groups are properly
renamed.
In System 800xA latest release, only the service
group and provider name on the aspect server
needs to be modified. All Service group and
provider names will be corrected during the deploy
of the other nodes.

2PAA111694-610 A 275
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names

Table F.2: Default Service Group and Service Provider Names in 800xA 6.1
(Continued)
Service Name Service Group Name Service Provider Name
Harmony Executive Basic Systems having Separate Aspect Server and
Harmony CS:
• After restoring the 800xA Backup on the
Aspect Server, delete all Harmony Executive
Service Provider(s).
• New Service Provider(s) will be created
automatically during deploy of the Connectivity
Server(s).
Systems having Combined Aspect Server and
Harmony CS:
• After restoring the 800xA Backup on the
Aspect Server, the Service Provider for the
first Aspect Server\Connectivity Server must
be renamed as it is the first node in the
System 800xA 6.1. The format is as follows:
HarmonyExec_nodename
• Any remaining Harmony Executive Service
Provider(s), including ones associated with
other combined Aspect Server\Connectivity
Server should be deleted. New Harmony
Executive Service Provider(s) will be created
automatically during Deploy of the
Connectivity Server(s).

2PAA111694-610 A 276
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names

Table F.2: Default Service Group and Service Provider Names in 800xA 6.1
(Continued)
Service Name Service Group Name Service Provider Name
Event Collector ABB 800xA Harmony Systems having Separate Aspect Server and
AE_PrimaryCSnodename Harmony CS:
• After restoring the 800xA Backup on the
Aspect Server, delete all Harmony Event
Collector Service Provider(s).
• New Service Provider(s) will be created
automatically during deploy of the Connectivity
Server(s).
Systems having Combined Aspect Server and
Harmony CS:
• After restoring the 800xA Backup on the
Aspect Server, the Service Provider for the
first Aspect Server\Connectivity Server must
be renamed as it is the first node in the
System 800xA 6.1. The format is as follows:
Event Collector_ABB 800xA Harmony
AE_nodename
• Any remaining Harmony Event Collector
Service Provider(s), including ones associated
with other combined Aspect
Server\Connectivity Server must be deleted.
New Harmony Event Collector Service
Provider(s) will be created automatically
during Deploy of the Connectivity Server(s).
AssetMonitoring AssetMonitoring SG_1 AssetMonitoring SP_1
Refer ABB Asset Optimizationfor additional Steps.
Messenger Server Messenger SG_1 Messenger SP_1
OpcDA_Connector SG_IT OPCDA_Provider_nodename
Server_nodename
IT SNMP Trap Service SG_PNSM_Trap SP_PNSM_Trap_nodename
Server_nodename Refer ABB PC, Network and Software
Monitoringfor additional Steps.
800xA History Event HistoryEventCollector HSEventCol_nodename
Collector

2PAA111694-610 A 277
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names
F.1 ABB 800xA for MOD 300

Table F.2: Default Service Group and Service Provider Names in 800xA 6.1
(Continued)
Service Name Service Group Name Service Provider Name
800xA History HistoryEventServer HSEventServ_nodename
EventServer
800xA History HistorySyncService HSSyncServ_nodename
SyncService

F.1 ABB 800xA for MOD 300


This procedure is applicable only if the system consists of 800xA for MOD 300.
After the 800xA 5.x backup is restored on 800xA 6.1 Primary Aspect Server, follow the
instructions in this section before deploying other nodes.
800xA for MOD 300 Event Collector service group(s) require separate workflow to
be followed. Before deploying MOD 300 Connectivity servers, check if the existing
MOD Event Collector Service Group(s) name is in different format than
MOD_AE_SG_%GroupName% else rename it to a different format.

2PAA111694-610 A 278
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names
F.1 ABB 800xA for MOD 300

1. Make a note of the Service Group name that is given while configuring 800xA 6.1
System using SCC tool.

Figure F.1: Service Group Name for MOD 300

This Group name is to be provided in place of %GroupName% in Table F.3.

2PAA111694-610 A 279
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names
F.1 ABB 800xA for MOD 300

2. Modify OPC DA Service Group and Service Providers.

Table F.3: Default OPC DA Service Group and Service Provider Names for MOD 300
Service Name Service Group Name Service Provider Name
OPCDA_Connector MOD_DA_SG_%GroupName% Systems having Separate Aspect
Server and MOD CS:
• After restoring the 800xA Backup
on the Aspect Server, delete all
MOD OPC DA Service Provider(s).
• New Service Provider(s) will be
created automatically during
deploy of the Connectivity
Server(s).
Systems having Combined Aspect
Server and MOD CS:
• After restoring the 800xA Backup
on the Aspect Server, the Service
Provider for the first Aspect
Server\Connectivity Server must
be renamed as it is the first node
in the System 800xA 6.1. The
format is as follows:
MOD_DA_nodename
• Any remaining MOD OPC DA
Service Provider(s), including ones
associated with other combined
Aspect Server\Connectivity Server
should be deleted. New MOD OPC
DA Service Provider(s) will be
created automatically during
Deploy of the Connectivity
Server(s).

2PAA111694-610 A 280
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names
F.1 ABB 800xA for MOD 300

3. Modify the MOD OPC Server Network Object:


a. Open Plant Explorer Workplace.
b. Navigate to Control Structure > Root > MOD Control Network name, MOD
OPC Server Network.
c. Ensure that the existing MOD OPC Server Network as per default nomenclature
for 800xA 6.1: MOD_SG_%GroupName%
If not, rename it accordingly.

Figure F.2: Renaming MOD Control Network

F.1.1 800xA for MOD 300 Batch


If 800xA for MOD 300 system uses Batch Management, perform the following before
proceeding to next step.

2PAA111694-610 A 281
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names
F.1 ABB 800xA for MOD 300

Table F.4: Default OPC DA Service Group and Service Provider Names for MOD 300 with Batch
Management
Service Name Service Group Name Service Provider Name
OPCDA_Connector MOD_Batch_DA_ Systems having Separate Aspect
SG_%GroupName% Server and MOD 300 Batch Server:
• After restoring the 800xA Backup
on the Aspect Server, delete all
MOD Batch DA Service
Provider(s).
• New Service Provider(s) will be
created automatically during
deploy of the Connectivity
Server(s).
Systems having Combined Aspect
Server and MOD 300 Batch Server:
• After restoring the 800xA Backup
on the Aspect Server, the Service
Provider for the first Aspect
Server\Connectivity Server must
be renamed as it is the first node
in the System 800xA 6.1. The
format is as follows:
MOD_Batch_DA_nodename
• Any remaining MOD Batch DA
Service Provider(s), including ones
associated with other combined
Aspect Server\Connectivity Server
should be deleted. New MOD
Batch DA Service Provider(s) will
be created automatically during
Deploy of the Connectivity
Server(s).

2PAA111694-610 A 282
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names
F.1 ABB 800xA for MOD 300

1. Modify the MOD Batch OPC Server Network Object:


a. Open Plant Explorer Workplace.
b. Navigate to Control Structure > Root > MOD Batch Control Network name,
MOD Batch OPC Server Network.
c. Ensure that the existing MOD Batch OPC Server Network as per default
nomenclature for 800xA 6.1: MOD_Batch_SG_%GroupName%
If not, rename it accordingly.
2. Continue with deploy of the nodes as per the upgrade workflow.

F.1.2 Renaming MOD 300 AE Service Group and Service Provider Names

Perform this procedure after deploying all System 800xA 6.1 nodes.

1. Deployment of MOD 300 Connectivity server creates additional MOD Event Collector
Service Group(s) and Service Providers.
2. After all System 800xA 6.1 nodes are deployed, the newly created MOD Event
Collector (AE) service group(s) must be deleted from the service structure. This
newly created service group(s) can be identified by checking the Enabled state. AE
service groups created during the deployment of System 800xA 6.1 are disabled
(Enabled option is unchecked) by default.
3. The existing AE service group(s) and service providers must be renamed to match
the default System 800xA 6.1 nomenclature.

Table F.5: Default AE Service Group and Service Provider Names for MOD 300
Service Name Service Group Name Service Provider Name
Event Collector MOD_AE_SG_%GroupName% MOD_AE_nodename

2PAA111694-610 A 283
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names
F.2 ABB 800xA for DCI

F.2 ABB 800xA for DCI


This procedure is applicable only if the system contains ABB 800xA for DCI.
After the 800xA 5.x backup is restored on 800xA 6.1 Primary Aspect Server, workflow
is as follows:
1. Make a note of the OPC DA ID that is given while configuring 800xA 6.1 System
using SCC tool.

Figure F.3: DCI OPC ID

This OPC ID is to be provided in place of %DciOpcDaID% in Table F.6.

2PAA111694-610 A 284
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names
F.2 ABB 800xA for DCI

2. Modify all OPC DA Service Group(s) and Service Provider(s) as in Table F.6.

Table F.6: Default OPC DA Service Group and Service Provider Names for DCI
Service Name Service Group Name Service Provider Name
OPCDA_Connector SG_DCI%DciOpcDaID%_DA Systems having Separate Aspect
Server and DCI CS:
• After restoring the 800xA Backup
on the Aspect Server, delete all
DCI OPC DA Service Provider(s).
• New Service Provider(s) will be
created automatically during
deploy of the Connectivity
Server(s).
Systems having Combined Aspect
Server and DCI CS:
• After restoring the 800xA Backup
on the Aspect Server, the Service
Provider(s) for the first Aspect
Server\Connectivity Server must
be renamed as it is the first node
in the System 800xA 6.1. The
format is as follows:
SG_DCI%DciOpcDaID%_DA_
nodename
• Any remaining DCI OPC DA
Service Provider(s), including ones
associated with other combined
Aspect Server\Connectivity Server
should be deleted. New DCI OPC
DA Service Provider(s) will be
created automatically during
Deploy of the Connectivity
Server(s).

2PAA111694-610 A 285
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names
F.2 ABB 800xA for DCI

3. As in Step 1., if DCI for Batch is used, make a note of the OPC Batch ID for DCI
Batch that is given while configuring 800xA 6.1 System using SCC tool. This OPC
Batch ID is to be provided in place of %DciOpcBaID% in Table F.7.

Table F.7: Default Service Group and Service Provider Names for DCI Batch
Service Name Service Group Name Service Provider Name
OPCDA_Connector SG_DCI%DciOpcBaID%_Batch_DA Systems having Separate Aspect Server
and DCI CS:
• After restoring the 800xA Backup on
the Aspect Server, delete all DCI Batch
DA Service Provider(s).
• New Service Provider(s) will be created
automatically during deploy of the
Connectivity Server(s).
Systems having Combined Aspect Server
and DCI CS:
• After restoring the 800xA Backup on
the Aspect Server, the Service Provider
for the first Aspect Server\Connectivity
Server must be renamed as it is the
first node in the System 800xA 6.1. The
format is as follows:
SG_DCI%DciOpcBaID%_
Batch_DA_nodename
• Any remaining DCI Batch DA Service
Provider(s), including ones associated
with other combined Aspect
Server\Connectivity Server(s) should
be deleted. New DCI Batch DA Service
Provider(s) will be created automatically
during Deploy of the Connectivity
Server(s).

2PAA111694-610 A 286
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names
F.2 ABB 800xA for DCI

4. As in Step 1. make a note of the OPC AE ID that is given while configuring 800xA
6.1 System using SCC tool. This OPC ID is to be provided in place of %DciOpcAeID%
in Table F.8.

2PAA111694-610 A 287
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names
F.2 ABB 800xA for DCI

Table F.8: Default OPC AE Service Group and Service Provider Names for DCI
Service Name Service Group Name Service Provider Name
Event Collector Systems with separate Aspect Server Systems with separate Aspect Server
and DCI CS: and DCI CS:
• After restoring the 800xA Backup on • After restoring the 800xA Backup on
the Aspect Server, delete all existing the Aspect Server, verify all DCI Event
DCI OPC AE Service Group(s) along Collector Service Provider(s) are
with their Service Provider(s) before deleted.
Deploy of DCI Connectivity • New Service Provider(s) will be
Server(s). created automatically during deploy of
• Service Group(s), along with their the Connectivity Server(s).
Service Provider(s) will be created • Enable the DCI OPC AE Service
automatically during Deploy of the Group from Service Structure >
Connectivity Server(s). Event Collector, Service.
Event Collector Systems with combined Aspect Server Systems with combined Aspect Server
(Continued) and DCI CS: and DCI CS:
After restoring the 800xA Backup on the After restoring the 800xA Backup on the
Aspect Server, delete all DCI OPC AE Aspect Server, verify all DCI Event
Service Group(s) along with their Service Collector Service Provider(s) are deleted
Provider(s) before Deploy of remaining before Deploy of remaining DCI
DCI Connectivity Server(s). Connectivity Server(s).
On the Primary Aspect Server + DCI On the Primary Aspect Server + DCI CS:
CS: • Run the AbbDciPostInstall.exe task to
For creation of Service Group, along with create the DCI AE Service Group and
the Service Provider of Primary AS\DCI Service Provider. AbbDciPostInstall is
CS follow the steps mentioned in Service located in the C:\Program Files
Provider column. (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\800xA\DCI
On the Redundant Aspect Server + DCI Library\DciConnect\bin folder.
CS and Other DCI CS(s): • Enable the DCI OPC AE Service
The DCI AE Service Group along with Group from Service Structure >
Service Provider will be handled Event Collector, Service.
automatically with the deploy of the On the Redundant Aspect Server + DCI
redundant AS+CS and other DCI CS(s). CS and Other DCI CS(s):
The DCI AE Service Provider will be
created automatically with the deploy of the
redundant AS+CS and other DCI CS(s).

2PAA111694-610 A 288
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names
F.2 ABB 800xA for DCI

5. Enable all the Service Groups if not already enabled.


6. Continue with deploy of the nodes as per the upgrade workflow.

2PAA111694-610 A 289
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names
F.3 800xA for AC 800M

F.3 800xA for AC 800M


This procedure is applicable only if the system consists of 800xA for AC 800M.
After the 800xA 5.x backup is restored on 800xA 6.1 Primary Aspect Server, follow the
instructions in this section before deploying other nodes.
1. Make a note of the group properties and node specific properties of all AC 800M
connectivity servers that is given while configuring 800xA 6.1 System using SCC
tool.

Figure F.4: Properties for OPC Server for AC 800M

2PAA111694-610 A 290
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names
F.3 800xA for AC 800M

2. Modify OPC DA Service Group and Service Providers.

Table F.9: Default OPC DA Service Group and Service Provider Names for AC 800M
Service Name Service Group Name Service Provider Name
OPCDA_Connector AC 800M service group name AC 800M service provider on
name: can be any logical name to differentiate nodename
multiple AC 800M service groups
Event Collector AC 800M service group name AC 800M service provider on
name: can be any logical name to differentiate nodename
multiple AC 800M service groups

3. Modify the Control Network Object:


a. Open Plant Explorer Workplace.
b. Navigate to Control Structure > Root > Control Network name , Control
Network.
c. Ensure that the existing Control Network name matches with the name
mentioned in the Properties for OPC Server for AC 800M in SCC.
If not, rename it accordingly.

Figure F.5: Renaming Control Network

Figure F.6: Properties for OPC Server for AC 800M

2PAA111694-610 A 291
F 800xA 6.1 Service Group and Service Provider Names
F.4 ABB Asset Optimization

F.4 ABB Asset Optimization


This procedure is applicable only if the system consists of ABB Asset Optimization.
After upgrade to System 800xA 6.1, refer to 800xA 5.x reference note and do the following.
• Delete additional AO Server object created in the Control Structure under the Asset
Optimization object.
• Delete additional Asset Monitoring Service Group and related Service Provider in
the Service Structure.

F.5 ABB PC, Network and Software Monitoring


This procedure is applicable only if the system consists of ABB PC, Network and Software
Monitoring.
After upgrade to System 800xA 6.1, refer to 800xA 5.x reference note and do the following.
• Delete additional IT OPC Server Network object created in the Control Structure.
• Delete additional IT Server Service Group and related Service Provider in the Service
Structure.

2PAA111694-610 A 292
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.1 Collecting Data from Existing System 800xA 5.1

Appendix G Identifying Node Functions and


System Functions

G.1 Collecting Data from Existing System 800xA 5.1


This topic describes the workflow for collecting existing System 800xA 5.1 information
using Diagnostics Collection Tool. This data can be used while planning system and
node functions of the System 800xA 6.1.
1. On any 800xA node, open ABB Diagnostics Collection Tool from desktop or from
Start menu.
2. Select Collect Data and click OK.

2PAA111694-610 A 293
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.1 Collecting Data from Existing System 800xA 5.1

3. Expand the node in Collection Tool window and select System Report and Click
Collect.

Figure G.1: ABB Diagnostics Collection Tool

4. Click OK and wait for the tool to collect all required data. The tool collects the data
and saves it in C:\ABBResults\
5. Extract the contents of CAB file from Step 4. (Right-click > Explore). Make sure the
extracted files consists of a file systemReport.ini.

2PAA111694-610 A 294
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.1 Collecting Data from Existing System 800xA 5.1

6. Open the Excel file SystemCheckHelper from below location:


For 32-bit: C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Diagnostics Collection Tool\Plugins\
For 64-bit: C:\Program Files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Diagnostics Collection
Tool\Plugins\
7. Click Convert Checker Report, and Navigate to the systemReport.ini file from Step
5.. Click OPEN. This step extracts all the required system information onto multiple
tabs in the SystemCheckHelper excel file.
For more information, refer to the Diagnostics Collection Tool section in System
800xA Tools (2PAA101888*).
The Summary tab in this Excel sheet can be used to retrieve information from the
System 800xA 5.1. This data can be used while planning the System 800xA 6.1.
• To create the list of all services in service structure, Click Create Node-Service
Relation.
• To create a list of installed software on all 800xA nodes, Click Create
Node-Application Relation, select All software and click OK.
• To retrieve basic node type information, click Advanced and Select Fetch Node
Type Information.

Figure G.2: Advanced - Node Application Relation

2PAA111694-610 A 295
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.2 Node Functions and System Functions

G.2 Node Functions and System Functions


The 800xA System functionality is divided into a Base System and a set of options. The
options represent functions that can be added to the system based on the needs of the
process that should be controlled. The system functionality is grouped in a set of functional
areas for an easier overview of the complete system functionality.
The System 800xA structure is summarized as follows:
• Base System is the system base software. It consists of:
– DCS Base System Functionality.
– Integration of ABB Controllers as well as other PLCs / RTUs.
– System Options (for example, OLE-DB Real Time Data Client Connection, Audit
Trail (Security Events and Configuration Changes), Advanced Access Control,
SMS and e-mail Messaging, and so on).
• System 800xA consists of the following Functional areas:
– Operations.
– Batch Management.
– Information Management.
– Control and I/O, including SIL (Safety Integrity Level) 3 Safety Control.
– Engineering.
– Asset Optimization.
– Device Management.
– Multisystem Integration.
• Additional supporting hardware and software components are:
– AC 800M Hardware.
– S800 I/O.
– PROFIBUS Network Components.
– FOUNDATION Fieldbus Network Components.
– HART Multiplexer Network Components.
– IEC 61850 Network Components

2PAA111694-610 A 296
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.3 Definitions

G.3 Definitions
Below procedures are applicable to both 800xA 5.0 SP2 and 800xA 5.1 systems,
which will be referred to as 800xA 5.x systems.

Before upgrading an existing 800xA 5.x System to 800xA 6.1, it is important to understand
how the System and node functions are configured in the existing 800xA 5.x System.
800xA 6.1 system should be planned similar to 800xA 5.x system.
The following definitions helps in understanding the node and system functions in 800xA
6.1 Systems.

G.3.1 System Functions


System Functionality consists of number of selectable functions which are intended to
be part of the installed System 800xA.

G.3.2 Node Types


The node type determines the main use of an 800xA system node as a client node, or
as a server node, or as a combined client and server node. This is used to determine
which software media folders need to be copied locally to the node during installation.

G.3.3 Node Functions


System 800xA functionality consists of a number of selectable functions. System Installer
installs and activates relevant software components on relevant system nodes to support
the selected functions.

G.3.4 Options
System functions may have selectable options to determine functional characteristics
or behavior. The System Installer activates options on relevant nodes to reflect the
selections.
For more information on the Node Functions and System Functions, refer to System
800xA System Guide Technical Data and Configuration (3BSE041434*) and System
800xA System Guide Functional Description (3BSE038018*).

2PAA111694-610 A 297
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.4 Identifying System Functions

G.4 Identifying System Functions


System Functionality consists of number of selectable functions which are intended to
be part of the installed System 800xA.
System Functions in current 800xA 5.x system can be identified as follows:

2PAA111694-610 A 298
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.4 Identifying System Functions

1. Analyzing the Installed software on the nodes - Following System Functions can be
identified by analyzing the installed software on nodes in 800xA 5.x System. Refer
to Collecting Data from Existing System 800xA 5.1, on how to collect installed
software information using Diagnostics Collection Tool.

Table G.1: Identifying System Functions using Installed Software

Check for the following in 800xA 5.x System Function to be selected while
System planning 800xA 6.1 System
Installed software: "ABB Inform IT - Data Direct Services
DataDirect
Installed software: "ABB Inform IT - Information Management - IM Desktop
Display Services" and "ABB Inform IT - Tools
Desktop Trends"
Note: On Client nodes and non-IM
History Services Servers.
Installed software: "ABB Device Library Device Library Wizard
Wizard - Server " or "ABB Device Library
Wizard - Client"
Installed software: " ABB Inform IT - PDL Information Management - IM Services:
Browser Light" PDL Browser
Note: This is only installed on IM
Servers.
Installed software: " ABB Inform IT - If this software is installed on IM Servers,
Profile Client" select: Information Management - IM
Services: Profile Client
If this software is installed on non-IM
Servers, select: Information Management
- IM Profile Client
Installed software: "ABB HART Device Management PROFIBUS and
Multiplexer Connect Package" HART: HART Multiplexer Connect
Installed software: "ABB Base Software AC 800M SoftController
for SoftControl"

2PAA111694-610 A 299
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.4 Identifying System Functions

2. Analyzing the loaded 800xA system extensions - Following System Functions can
be identified by analyzing the system extensions loaded in the 800xA 5.x System.
To check the list of loaded system Extensions,
a. Open Plant Explorer Workplace
b. In the Admin Structure, Navigate to Administrative Objects > Domains >
System Name, Domain
c. Select System Extensions aspect.
d. Refer to the below table to identify the system functions on an existing 800xA
5.x system.

2PAA111694-610 A 300
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.4 Identifying System Functions

Table G.2: Identifying System Functions using Loaded System Extensions

Check for the following in 800xA 5.x System Function to be selected


System while planning 800xA 6.1 System
System Extension Name = "Snapshot Snapshot Reports
Reports for 800xA"
System Extension Name = "ABB Inform Calculations Services
IT Calculations"
System Extension Name = "ABB Inform Application Scheduler Services
IT Scheduler"
System Extension Name = "ABB SMS SMS and E-Mail Messaging
and Email Messaging"
System Extension Name = "ABB SoftPoint SoftPointServer
Server"
System Extension Name = "ABB 800xA Information Management - 800xA
History Connectivity" History
System Extension Name = "ABB Industrial Information Management - 800xA
IT Archival” History Archive
System Extension Name = "ABB Asset Asset Optimization
Optimizer Server"
System Extension Name = "ABB Maximo Asset Optimization: Maximo
Connectivity" Integratiion
System Extension Name = "ABB SAP Asset Optimization: SAP
Connect System Extension" Integration
System Extension Name = "ABB Batch" Batch Management
System Extension Name = "ABB Device Device Management
Management FOUNDATION Fieldbus" FOUNDATION Fieldbus
System Extension Name = "ABB Inform Information Management - IM
IT History" Services
System Extension Name = "ABB PC, PC, Network and Software
Network and Software Monitoring" Monitoring
System Extension Name = "ABB Device Management PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS Device Integration Library - and HART
Basics"
System Extension Name = "ABB HART

2PAA111694-610 A 301
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.4 Identifying System Functions

Table G.2: Identifying System Functions using Loaded System Extensions


(Continued)
Check for the following in 800xA 5.x System Function to be selected
System while planning 800xA 6.1 System
Device Integration Library - Basics"
System Extension Name = "ABB DCI 800xA for DCI
Extension"
System Extension Name = "ABB DCI 800xA for DCI: Batch for DCI
Batch Extension"
System Extension Name = "Harmony 800xA for Symphony Plus Harmony
Connect"
System Extension Name = "Advanced 800xA for Symphony Plus
Harmony Control System Monitoring" Harmony: CNAM
System Extension Name = "Harmony 800xA for Symphony Plus
Batch Connect" Harmony: Batch for Harmony
System Extension Name = "MOD300 800xA for MOD 300
Connect"
System Extension Name = "MOD300 800xA for MOD 300: Batch for
Batch Connect" MOD 300
System Extension Name = "ABB 800xA for IEC 61850
IEC61850 Connect System Extension"
System Extension Name = "ABB 800xA for IEC 61850: IEC61850
IEC61850 Operation Library for Operation Library for Substation
Substation Equipment" Equipemnt
System Extension Name = "AC800M 800xA for AC 800M
Connect"
System Extension Name = "AC800M High 800xA for AC 800M: AC800M HI
Integrity" Extension
System Extension Name = "ABB AC800M AC 800M Status Monitoring
Status Monitoring" Services
System Extension Name = "ABB 800xA 800xA for Advant Master
for Advant Master"
System Extension Name = "ABB 800xA 800xA for Advant Master: 800xA
for Safeguard" for Safeguard

2PAA111694-610 A 302
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.4 Identifying System Functions

Table G.2: Identifying System Functions using Loaded System Extensions


(Continued)
Check for the following in 800xA 5.x System Function to be selected
System while planning 800xA 6.1 System
System Extension Name = "ABB 800xA 800xA for AC 870P/Melody
for AC870P / Melody"
System Extension Name = "ABB PLC PLC Connect
Connect"
System Extension Name = "TRIO" TRIO Connect
System Extension Name = "ABB 800xA 800xA for AC 100
for AC100"
System Extension Name = "Process Process Engineering Tool
Engineering Tool Integration" Integration
System Extension Name = "ABB Engineering Workplace
Engineering Base"
System Extension Name = "ABB ACM" Engineering Workplace: Application
Change Management
System Extension Name = "ABB Reuse Engineering Workplace: Reuse
Assistant" Assistant for Engineering Studio
System Extension Name = "ABB Script Engineering Workplace: Script
Manager" Manager for Engineering Studio
System Extension Name = "ABB Topology Engineering Workplace: Topology
Designer" Designer for Engineering Studio
System Extension Name = "ABB SFC Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
Viewer" Viewer
System Extension Name = "ABB EOW" Extended Operator Workplace
(EOW)
System Extension Name = "ABB Multisystem Integration
Multisystem Integration"
System Extension Name = "ABB Video Surveillance
VideONet Connect"

2PAA111694-610 A 303
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.4 Identifying System Functions

Following are the System Functions that are configured on all 800xA 6.1 Systems by
default:
• Base System
• Central Licensing System
• Diagnostics Collection Tool
System Function: Symbol Factory Controls needs to be selected only if the Symbol
Factory Controls are used in VBPG graphics of existing 800xA 5.x System. For more
information, contact ABB Technical Support.

Figure G.3: Symbol Factory Graphic Elements

G.4.1 Planning System Functions


The information collected from an existing 800xA 5.x system must be used to plan the
system functions in System 800xA 6.1 using System Configuration Console (SCC) Tool.
SCC tool > System Setup > Configure System > System Functions tab > Edit
Functions...

2PAA111694-610 A 304
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.4 Identifying System Functions

Figure G.4: Planning System Function using SCC tool

For more information on planning System Functions, refer to System 800xA System
Guide Technical Data and Configuration (3BSE041434*).

2PAA111694-610 A 305
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.5 Identifying Node Functions

G.5 Identifying Node Functions


It is important to identify different node function(s) in current 800xA 5.x System and the
nodes they are configured on, so as to plan similar 800xA 6.1 system.
Configuration of Node Functions in current 800xA 5.x system can be identified as follows:
1. Analyzing the Installed software on the nodes - It is possible to identify where a
Node Function(s) is configured by analyzing some installed software on nodes in
800xA 5.x System. Refer to Collecting Data from Existing System 800xA 5.1, on
how to collect installed software information using Diagnostics Collection Tool.

Table G.3: Identifying Node Functions using Installed Software

Node Function to be
selected in 800xA 6.1 Where it was configured in 800xA 5.x System
System
Profibus and HART Check for node with installed Software: "ABB
Connectivity Services Profibus Device Integration Library"
AC100 Connectivity Services Check for node with installed Software: "ABB AC
100 OPC Server"
AC 800M SoftController Check for node with installed Software: "ABB Base
Software for SoftControl"

2PAA111694-610 A 306
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.5 Identifying Node Functions

2. Fetch Node Type Information using DCT - Diagnostics Collection Tool has the
functionality to identify the Node Type information of an 800xA 5.x system. Refer to
Collecting Data from Existing System 800xA 5.1, on how to collect Node Type
information using Diagnostics Collection Tool.
Following Node functions can be identified automatically using DCT functionality.

Table G.4: Identifying Node Types using DCT

Node Function to be selected in Where it was configured in 800xA 5.x


800xA 6.1 System System
Asset Optimization Services Node Identified: AO
Asset Optimization Services Node Identified: AO
Additional
Batch Management Primary Node Identified: Batch
Services
Batch Management Secondary Node Identified: Batch
Services
Information Manager - IM Services Node Identified: IM

To identify if a Batch Server identified by DCT is Primary or Secondary, check the


Value of the following registry entry on the batch servers:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\ABB\Produce IT\Batch\ BatchNodetype.
For 5.1 Systems on 64 bit OS, the path is:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\WoW6432Node\ABB\Produce IT\Batch\
BatchNodetype

2PAA111694-610 A 307
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.5 Identifying Node Functions

3. Analyzing the 800xA Service Structure - Service Structure of existing 800xA 5.x
system can be analyzed to find where specific node function(s) are configured.
a. Open Plant Explorer Workplace.
b. Navigate to Service Structure >Services > ServiceName, Service >
ServiceGroup Name, Service Group > Service Provider Name, Service
Provider.
c. Select Service Provider Definition aspect.
d. The Node field in Configuration Tab gives the node where a node function is
configured.

Figure G.5: Service Provider Configuration

2PAA111694-610 A 308
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.5 Identifying Node Functions

Table G.5: Identifying Node Functions using Service Structure

Node Function to be selected Where it was configured in 800xA 5.x


in 800xA 6.1 System System
Alarm Analysis Services Check the configuration of Service: "Alarm
Analysis"
Alarm Logger Services Check the configuration of Service: "Alarm
Logger"
Basic History Services Check the configuration of Service: "Basic
History"
Note: On nodes with Information
Management - IM History Services or
Information Management - 800xA History
Archive, Basic history is automatically
configured. There is no need to add the Basic
History node function or record/modify the
Basic History Service provider and group
names for nodes with either the Information
Management - IM History Services or
Information Management - 800xA History
Archive node function.
External Alarm Services Check the configuration of Service: "External
Alarm"
Property Transfer Services Check the configuration of Service: "Property
Transfer"
Calculation Services Check the configuration of Service:
"Calculation Server"
NOTE: If more than one service group exists,
identify the service group names, the service
provider names for each service group and
the nodes the service provider are running on.
Application Scheduler Services Check the configuration of Service:
"Scheduler"
NOTE: If more than one service group exists,
identify the service group names, the service
provider names for each service group and
the nodes the service provider are running on.

2PAA111694-610 A 309
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.5 Identifying Node Functions

Table G.5: Identifying Node Functions using Service Structure


(Continued)
Node Function to be selected Where it was configured in 800xA 5.x
in 800xA 6.1 System System
Advant Master Connectivity Check the configuration of Service: MasterBus
Services 300 RTA Management

2PAA111694-610 A 310
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.5 Identifying Node Functions

4. Analyzing the 800xA Control Structure - Configuration of Control Structure of existing


800xA 5.x system can be analyzed to find where specific node function(s) are
configured.
a. Open Plant Explorer Workplace
b. Navigate to the OPC data source aspect as mentioned in Table G.6.
c. Click View.
d. Select any one of the providers, click View.
e. The Node field in Configuration Tab gives the node where a node function is
configured.

Figure G.6: OPC Source Configuration

2PAA111694-610 A 311
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.5 Identifying Node Functions

Table G.6: Identifying Node Functions using Control Structure

Node Function to be
selected in 800xA 6.1 Where it was configured in 800xA 5.x System
System
SoftPoint Services a) Navigate to Control Structure > Soft Point
Server, Soft Point Generic Control Netwrok.
b) Check the configuration of aspect: Adapter Data
Source Definition
Foundation Fieldbus a) Navigate to Control Structure > Subnet name,
Connectivity Services HSE Subnet
b) Check the configuration of aspect: OPC Data
Source Definition
PC, Network and Software a) Navigate to Control Structure > IT Server, IT
Monitoring services OPC Sever Network
b) Check the configuration of aspect: OPC Data
Source Definition
PC, Network and Software a) Navigate to Control Structure > IT Server, IT
Monitoring services OPC Sever Network
Additional b) Check the configuration of aspect: OPC Data
Source Definition
DCI Connectivity Services a) Navigate to Control Structure > Symphony DCI
OPC Server Network.
b) Check the configuration of aspect: OPC Data
Source Definition
800xA for Symphony Plus a) Navigate to Control Structure > Harmony,
Harmony Connectivity Harmony OPC Server work.
Services b) Check the configuration of aspect: OPC Data
Source Definition
800xA for MOD 300 a) Navigate to Control Structure > MOD OPC
Connectivity Services Server Network
b) Check the configuration of aspect: MOD OPC
Data Source Definition
IEC 61850 Connectivity a) Navigate to Control Structure > IEC OPC Server
Services Instance name, IEC61850 OPC Server
b) Check the configuration of aspect: OPC Data
Source Definition
OPC Server AC 800M a) Navigate to Control Structure > Control Network

2PAA111694-610 A 312
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.5 Identifying Node Functions

Table G.6: Identifying Node Functions using Control Structure


(Continued)
Node Function to be
selected in 800xA 6.1 Where it was configured in 800xA 5.x System
System
Name, Control Network
b) Check the configuration of aspect: OPC Data
Source Definition
800xA for AC870P/Melody a) Navigate to Control Structure > Melody system,
Connectivity Services Melody System > Melody Network Name, Melody
Network
b) Check the configuration of aspect: OPC Data
Source Definition
PLC Connectivity Services a) Navigate to Control Structure > PLC
Controlnetwork name , PLC Generic Control
Network
b) Check the configuration of aspect: Adapter Data
Source Definition

Following node functions are configured on Primary Aspect Server node by default.
• Aspect Services
• Event Storage Services
• Central Licensing System
• Device Library Wizard Services

Node Function: OPC Client Connection Services, need to be selected manually if


the node is hosting third party OPC Clients.

Following node functions were installed on all nodes by default in 800xA 5.x systems
but in 800xA 6.1, you can choose where to install them.
• Information Manager Desktop Tools
• Bulk Data Manager
In 800xA 5.x systems, the node having the folder configserver in 800xA Installation
drive (default is C:\configserver) is to be planned as Melody configuration server with
Node function: 800xA for AC870P/Melody Configuration Services.

2PAA111694-610 A 313
G Identifying Node Functions and System Functions
G.5 Identifying Node Functions

Harmony Configuration Server is not required anymore in 800xA 6.1 system.

G.5.1 Planning Node Functions


The information collected from an existing 800xA 5.x system must be used to plan the
node functions in System 800xA 6.1 using System Configuration Console (SCC) Tool.
The node functions in System 800xA 6.1 depends on the system functions selected while
configuring the system.
SCC tool > System Setup > Configure System > System Nodes tab > Allocate
functions...

Figure G.7: Planning Node Function using SCC tool

For more information on planning Node Functions, refer to System 800xA System Guide
Technical Data and Configuration (3BSE041434*).

2PAA111694-610 A 314
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.1 Introduction

Appendix H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade

H.1 Introduction
System 800xA makes better use of hardware than older system versions. The introduction
of the Node Function concept allows more functionality per node.
This appendix describes the workflow and procedure to take advantage of the smaller
footprint in System 800xA during upgrade from previous system versions. The procedure
enables the reduction of number of nodes in the upgraded system.
The footprint reduction is achieved by identifying the node functions to be moved and
combined with other node functions in a node. Through this consolidation of 800xA
functionality the number of nodes can be reduced during the upgrade while keeping the
same overall functionality of the System 800xA.

H.2 Example
The example illustration below demonstrates a simple example of moving the node
functions from the connectivity server to the aspect server during the upgrade to reduce
the footprint of the 800xA System.

Figure H.1: Example

2PAA111694-610 A 315
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.3 Considerations

H.3 Considerations
The considerations to be taken before planning for an upgrade with footprint reduction:
• Footprint reductions is performed only during offline upgrade.
• Footprint Reduction of 800xA for AC 800M Connectivity Servers located in different
Control Network Areas is not supported.
• The following services are supported from one node to another during upgrade:
– OPC Server for AC 800M.
– PROFIBUS and HART Connectivity Services.
– PC, Network and Software Monitoring Services.
– Asset Optimization Services.
– IEC 61850 Connectivity Services.
– PLC Connect Services, SoftPoint Services.
– FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connectivity services
– Basic History Services.
– Advant Master Connectivity Services
Performing Footprint Reduction for Advant Master Connectivity Services will result
in loss of any user defined aspect created for MB300 RTA Board Object and RTA
Load Object
• The intended reduction by combining the node functions must be as per the
constraints and specifications specified in the System 800xA System Guide Technical
Data and Configuration (3BSE041434*).

H.4 Source System Workflow


The preparation and planning for upgrade of System 800xA must be started in enough
time before the actual upgrade. The source system must be analyzed and respective
node functions needs to be moved must be identified and the final system must be
according the specification of the System 800xA 6.1.

2PAA111694-610 A 316
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.4 Source System Workflow

Figure H.2: Source System Workflow

H.4.1 Preparing the 800xA 5.1 System


System 800xA 5.1 must be prepared in order to be upgraded to System 800xA 6.1:
1. Migrate all the existing Visual Basic Process Graphics (VBPG) aspects to the
corresponding Process Graphics aspects. Refer to System 800xA Engineering
Process Graphics Migration Tool (3BSE049231*) available in ABB Library and
myABB/My Control System portal.
Visual Basic Process Graphics (VBPG) is not supported in System 800xA 6.1. It is
mandatory to migrate all VBPG to PG2 graphics before upgrading to System 800xA
6.1.
The System 800xA VBPG Search Tool is used to find VBPG aspects in 800xA system
that need to be migrated prior to a system upgrade to System 800xA 6.1. The tool
can also identify PG2 aspects that have references to VBPG aspects. For more
information on the tool, refer to System 800xA VBPG migration and System 800xA
VBPG Search Tool (3BSE081093).
All VBPG aspects Main View in System 800xA 6.1 will show a message: This aspect
is not supported and will not be available for operator actions.

2. Document following Windows settings:


a. Domain related information
b. DNS Settings
c. Users, groups and memberships
d. Other custom Windows settings.

2PAA111694-610 A 317
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.5 Target System Workflow

The same settings must be use in the 6.1 System.


1. Collect the information about the System Functions, Node Functions and their
configurations from existing System 800xA 5.1. This information can be obtained
from existing plant documentation.
The information about existing System 800xA 5.1 can be used while planning a
similar System 800xA 6.1.
Diagnostics Collection Tool can also provide some information about existing System
800xA 5.1. For more details, refer to Appendix G.
2. The 800xA System and software require preparatory procedures before performing
the upgrade. Perform the applicable procedures in the order presented in
Pre-Upgrade Procedures section before proceeding.
Symbol Factory Controls are no longer installed with the standard ABB 800xA
installation. A separate installation (ABB 800xA Symbol Factory) is needed to use
the Symbol Factory Controls. The ABB 800xA Symbol Factory installation package
is available on the media. A separate license is required to use the ABB 800xA Symbol
Factory Controls.

H.5 Target System Workflow


The target system must be prepared with the similar workflow as described in the
Considerations and Upgrade Flow. The modification to the workflow described in
Considerations and Upgrade Flow are listed in Figure H.3.

Figure H.3: Target System Workflow

2PAA111694-610 A 318
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.5 Target System Workflow

Prepare the following to prepare an 800xA 6.1 System for an upgrade:


1. Order the System 800xA licenses required for the 800xA 6.1 System. Refer to
System 800xA Licensing Information (2PAA111691*) for more information. Order
new hardware and third-party software required for the 800xA 6.1 System. Refer to
System 800xA Installation, Update and Upgrade Getting Started (2PAA111708*)
for more information.
2. Migrate the redundant Domain Controllers. Refer to the Migrate Redundant Domain
Controllers appendix for more information. If it is a workgroup system, ignore this
step.
3. If the IPsec is configured in the source system (800xA 5.1) then after the domain
controller is upgraded, perform the following steps on the domain controller before
upgrading other nodes:
• Disable the existing group policy from the domain group policy object.
a. Go to Group Policy Management and choose Group Policy Objects.
b. Right-click the existing group policy.
c. Select GPO Status.
d. Select All Settings disabled.
• Disable the link of the existing group policy.
Right-click the existing group policy and clear the Link Enabled option.
• Delete the existing group policy.
Right-click the existing group policy in the Group Policy Objects and click Delete.
• Follow the procedure mentioned in System 800xA Post Installation
(2PAA111693*) to configure the rules
4. If IPsec is not configured in the source system and if IPSec is required after upgrade,
then follow the procedure mentioned in System 800xA Post Installation
(2PAA111693*) to configure the rules.
5. Install the new operating system defined for the 800xA 6.1 System. Refer to
Prerequisite Section of System 800xA Installation, Update, and Upgrade Getting
Started (2PAA111708*) and perform all procedures relating to operating system
settings and pre-requisites.

2PAA111694-610 A 319
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.5 Target System Workflow

6. Run the Node Preparation Tool (NPT) on all 800xA nodes.


a. Launch the Node Preparation Tool (NPT) by starting the Setup.exe from the
root level of the installation media to prepare the node.
The NPT copies the installation files to the local drive on the computer and
installs the 800xA Base Software. Thus preparing the node for deployment of
an 800xA System.
b. The Installation Type options are to be selected while running NPT, based on
the node functions selected on that node.
For Example: SQL Server 2012 option needs to be selected while running NPT
on a Batch Management Server or Melody Server. Information Manager - IM
(Oracle) needs to be selected while running NPT on an Information Management
Server.
c. The User Account that is used for 800xA System installation must be a member
of the following groups:
IndustrialITUser
IndustrialITAdmin
Local Administrators
d. Click Start. The NPT prepares the node by installing the core products. Click
Close.
7. Perform the following to Create System on the node designated to be Primary Aspect
Server of the upgraded 800xA 6.1 system:
a. Launch System Configuration Console tool (SCC) as the 800xA Installing User
from ABB Start Menu > ABB System 800xA > System > System
Configuration Console.
b. Go to Create System task to create a System on the Primary Aspect Server
node and making the node ready for System deploy.

New System is created temporarily to create and export the system configuration
information that will be imported later on the upgraded system.

2PAA111694-610 A 320
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.5 Target System Workflow

8. The System Configuration as intended in System 800xA 6.1 with consolidation must
be planned to capture the System Configuration information.
The consolidated plan must be include all the System functions and node functions
part of the source system, the consolidation is achieved to move functions from one
node to another node to reduce the number of servers. The system restore will fail if
any of the functions are missed in the plan.
Perform the following to plan the System 800xA 6.1 using System Configuration
Console.
a. Go to System Setup > Configure System task in SCC, plan the 800xA 6.1
System identical to 800xA 5.1 system. Refer to System 800xA Installation,
Update, and Upgrade Getting Started (2PAA111708*) on how to plan the system.
b. Select the System Functions tab and select all the System functions part of the
source system
c. Select the node functions tab and add all the nodes as intended in the 6.1 (do
not the add the nodes which are intended to be removed in 6.1). Select the
node functions for each node based on the intended configuration as per footprint
reduction.
During planning 800xA 6.1 system, few node functions require service group name
and service provider name to be entered. For standard nomenclature of service group
names and service provider names, refer to Appendix F.
For Batch Redundancy, a server node in the system needs to be configured and
designated as the Batch Witness Server. Refer to System 800xA Batch Management
Configuration (3BUA000146*) for more information.
For Advant Master Connectivity Server node function, it is mandatory to configure
Network Group Number, Network 1, Network 2, and Node Number. These numbers
are documented in the Pre-Upgrade Procedures.

2PAA111694-610 A 321
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.5 Target System Workflow

9. The new plan created must be deployed only on the Primary Aspect Server to import
the System Configuration Aspects. All other nodes must be excluded from the
deployment. Perform the following to exclude all nodes except Primary Aspect Server
from deploy:
a. In the System Configuration Console Tool, under System Setup > Configure
System > System nodes,
b. Select and exclude all other nodes apart from Primary Aspect Server node
using Node actions... > Exclusion... option.

Figure H.4: System Configuration Console - Exclusion

2PAA111694-610 A 322
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.5 Target System Workflow

10. Deploy system with only Primary Aspect Server by clicking on the Deploy System.

Figure H.5: System Configuration Console - Deploy System

2PAA111694-610 A 323
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.5 Target System Workflow

11. After successful deployment, export and save the System Configuration and System
Configuration State aspects from: Admin Structure > Administrative Objects >
Domains > <System Name>,Domain.

Figure H.6: System Configuration and System Configuration State Aspect

2PAA111694-610 A 324
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.5 Target System Workflow

12. Delete the newly created 800xA system (see Step 7.).
a. Go to the Configuration Wizard and select System Administration, and click
Next.
b. Mark the system you want to delete. Click Next.
c. Select Systems and click Next.
d. Select Stop and click Next.
e. Select <system name> and click Next.
f. Select Delete, click Next.
g. Select <system name> and click Next.
h. Click Finish in the Apply Settings dialog box.
i. Wait a few minutes and when the Configuration Wizard appears again with the
System dialog box the deletion of the system is completed.
j. Click Exit.
k. Restart the Primary Aspect Server node.

2PAA111694-610 A 325
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.5 Target System Workflow

13. Restore the 800xA 5.1 System backup on the Primary Aspect Server using
configuration Wizard. The User Account that is used for 800xA System restore using
the Configuration Wizard must be a member of the following groups:
• IndustrialITUser
• IndustrialITAdmin
• Local Administrators
Perform the following to restore the system using Configuration Wizard:
a. Open the Configuration wizard.
b. In the Select Type of Configuration dialog box, Select Restore System
and click Next.
c. In the Restore Selection dialog box, navigate to the path of 800xA 5.1
System Backup and click Next.
d. In the System Directories Selection dialog box, accept the default selections
and click the Next.
e. In the Node Configuration dialog box, check node name in the backup,
original node name and click Next.
f. In the Apply Settings dialog box, check summary info of selection and click
Finish.
g. Restart the node when advised during the restore procedure.
14. Check for messages in the log file (select the View Log check box in the Configuration
Wizard). Refer to Errors and Warnings during Upgrade to resolve any received
warning or error messages. Restart the node when advised during the restore
procedure.
15. Import the System Configuration and System Configuration State aspects. The
aspects are to be imported to the below path: Admin Structure > Administrative
Objects > Domains > System Name,Domain

2PAA111694-610 A 326
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.5 Target System Workflow

16. To make the future updates and upgrades easier, the Service Group names and
Service Provider names must match either the default names for System 800xA 6.1
or the configured names for node functions with Server Groups and Providers
configured. It is mandatory to rename the Service Group and Provider names on
the Primary Aspect Server as per the default format before we proceed.

For Advant Master: Delete the Old MB300 RTA Board object (s) under Control
Structure > Root, Domain > MB300 Network object.

For more information about the correct names for service groups and providers,
refer to Appendix F.
If the Service Group names and Service Provider names do not match in the
configuration created by the system installer and imported in Step 15., Deploy can
fail or duplicate Service Groups and Providers may be created after upgrade. In this
case the duplicate Service Groups and Providers needs to be cleaned up from 800xA
6.1 system looking at 800xA 5.1 reference System.
17. Refer to Compare the Number of Aspects and Objects and record the number of
aspects and objects in the system. Compare these values to those recorded when
the system was backed up.
18. Verify the affinity settings to ensure best system performance. Refer to System
800xA Post Installation (2PAA111693*) for more information on how to configure
affinity.

2PAA111694-610 A 327
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.5 Target System Workflow

19. Verify the Aspect Directory Services to ensure that Aspect Servers are in correct
order.
a. Open the Plant Explorer Workplace.
b. Navigate to Service Structure > Services >Aspect Directory > Basic, Service
Group.
c. In the Service Group Definition aspect, click the Configuration tab.
d. Verify if the Primary Aspect Server node deployed is first in the list followed by
other Aspect Servers. If necessary, correct the order.

Figure H.7: Order of Aspect Directory Services

20. In the System Configuration Console Tool, under System Setup > Configure
System > System Nodes, select the node to be deployed and enable for deployment
using Node actions... > Exclusion... > Include in deployment option. Perform this
action to include all remaining nodes.
21. If system has ABB 800xA for AC 100 then copy the saved BCD file folder to the
planned AC 100 Connectivity Server node on 800xA 6.1 system.
22. From Primary Aspect Server, deploy all the remaining nodes. Refer to System 800xA
Installation, Update, and Upgrade Getting Started (2PAA111708*), for more
information.

2PAA111694-610 A 328
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.6 Node Function Configuration

H.6 Node Function Configuration


This procedure must be performed after deploying all nodes in System 800xA.

H.6.1 OPC Server for AC 800M


The OPC server must be configured in the new target node.

Service Provider Configurations

Service Name Service Provider Configuration


OpcDA_Connector Node function OPC Server for AC 800M if included in
Basic History Primary Aspect Server:
• The service providers of the following services
configured for the old node must be configured to use
the new target node.
Node function OPC Server for AC 800M if included
other than Primary Aspect Server:
• The service providers of the following services
targeting the old node must be deleted, as a new
service provider will be created after deploy.

Time Service, if there is already a time service on the new target node then delete the
old service provider.
Perform the following procedure to configure the History Source:
1. Open Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Use the Structure Selector to open the Control Structure.
3. Navigate to the path using the Object Browser: Root, Domain > Control Network
object
4. Click History Source aspect and verify the Service Group.
5. Change the Service Group, if required.

2PAA111694-610 A 329
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.6 Node Function Configuration

H.6.2 PLC Connect and Softpoint


Perform the following to move PLC Connectivity Service:
1. Perform the following procedure to configure Server settings and Alarm and Event
settings:
a. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
b. Use the Structure Selector to open the Control Structure.
c. Use the Object Browser to navigate to: Root, Domain > PLC Generic Control
Network Object
d. Click on Generic Control Network Configuration aspect.
e. Re-Configure Server Settings and Alarm and Event Settings.
2. Service Provider Configurations

Service Name Service Provider Configuration


Basic History Node function PLC Connect Services if included in Primary
Aspect Server:
• The service providers of the following services configured
for the old node must be configured to use the new target
node.
Node function PLC Connect Services if included other than
Primary Aspect Server:
• The service providers of the following services targeting the
old node must be deleted, as a new service provider will be
created after deploy.

3. Perform the following procedure to configure History source:


a. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
b. Use the Structure Selector to open the Control Structure.
c. Use the Object Browser to navigate to: Root, Domain > PLC Generic Control
Network object
d. Click History Source Aspect and verify the Service Group.
e. Change the Service Group if required.

2PAA111694-610 A 330
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.6 Node Function Configuration

H.6.3 PROFIBUS and HART


The service providers of the following services configured for the source node must be
configured to use the new target node.
• OpcDA_Connector

H.6.4 Asset Optimization


Perform the following procedure to assign the Asset Optimization service group:
1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Use the Structure Selector to open the Control Structure.
3. Use the Object Browser to navigate to: Root, Domain > Asset Optimization, Asset
Optimization > AO Server Object.
4. Click on Asset Optimization Server aspect and assign the Service Group.
For post upgrade steps, refer to the Asset Optimization in Post-Upgrade Procedure
Steps.

Asset Tree Service Provider Node


If the Asset Tree service was running on the replaced AO node then perform the following
steps to set the new Asset Tree Service Provider Node:
1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Use the Structure Selector to open the Service Structure.
3. Use the Object Browser to navigate to: Services > AssetTree, Service > AssetTree
SG_1, Service Group > AssetTree SP_1, Service Provider
4. Select Service Provider Definition in the Aspect List Area.
5. Clear the Enabled check box and click Apply.
6. Set the Asset Tree Service Provider node to the new node designated to run the
Asset Tree Service in the Node: drop-down list box.
7. Select the Enabled check box and click Apply. This will set the Service Provider
hostname.
8. Verify that Service Status is Service.

2PAA111694-610 A 331
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.6 Node Function Configuration

AoWebServerNode
If the replaced AO Server node was designated as the AO Web Server then perform the
following steps to set the new AO Web Server Node.
1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Use the Structure Selector to open the Control Structure.
3. Use the Object Browser to navigate to: Root, Domain > Asset Optimization, Asset
Optimization
4. Select Asset Optimization Configuration Properties in the Aspect List Area.
5. In the Preview Area, set the AOWebServerNode property to the new AO server
node.

H.6.5 PC, Network and Software Monitoring


Perform the following to move PC, Network and Software Monitoring Service:

IT OPC Server Service Provider Node


Perform the following steps to set the new PC, Network and Software Monitoring Service
Provider Node:
1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Use the Structure Selector to open the Service Structure.
3. Use the Object Browser to navigate to: Services > OpcDA_Connector > SG_IT
Server, Service Group > OPCDA_Provider_Nodename, Service Provider
4. Select Service Provider Definition in the Aspect List Area.
5. Change the service provider node name to the new target node and click apply.

IT SNMP Trap Service Provider Node


If the IT SNMP Trap service was running on the replaced PNSM node then perform the
following steps to set the new SNMP Trap Service Provider Node:
1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Use the Structure Selector to open the Service Structure.
3. Use the Object Browser to navigate to: Services > IT SNMP Trap Service >
SNMP_Trap_Server, Service Group > SNMP_Trap_Server, Service Provider
4. Select Service Provider Definition in the Aspect List Area.

2PAA111694-610 A 332
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.6 Node Function Configuration

5. Clear the Enabled check box and click Apply.


6. Set the IT SNMP Trap Service Provider node to the node designated to run the Trap
Service in the Node: drop-down list box.
7. Select the Enabled check box and click Apply. This will set the Service Provider
hostname.
8. All the devices must be configured to point to the new trap server.

Basic Computer Monitoring Configuration Tool


Perform the following procedure to start the configuration tool.
1. Open ABB Start Menu > ABB System 800xA > Asset Optimization > PC, Network
and Software Monitoring.
2. Start Basic Computer Monitoring Configuration Tool.

H.6.6 IEC 61850 Connect


The service providers of the following services configured for the source node must be
configured to use the new target node.
• Event Collector
• OpcDA_Connector

Service Name Service Provider Configuration


Basic History Node function IEC61850 Connectivity Services if included in
Primary Aspect Server:
– The service providers of the following services configured
for the old node must be configured to use the new target
node.
Node function IEC61850 Connectivity Services if included
other than Primary Aspect Server:
– The service providers of the following services targeting the
old node must be deleted, as a new service provider will be
created after deploy.

Perform the following procedure to configure the IEC 61850 History Source:
1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Use the Structure Selector to open the Control Structure.

2PAA111694-610 A 333
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.6 Node Function Configuration

3. Use the Object Browser to navigate to: Root, Domain > IEC61850 OPC Server
object
4. Click History Source Aspect and verify the Service Group.
5. Change the Service Group if required.

H.6.7 FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connectivity services


1. Perform FFUpload from Object Type Structure > FFLibraries, Object Type Group.
2. Open Project from Control Structure > Root, Domain > HSE Subnet Object > FF
Management aspect.
3. Perform Check if required.
4. In the Fieldbus Builder, navigate to FF Network > Network Configuration (Context
Menu).
5. Change the IP address of OPCServerFF for Client/Server Network and HSE Subnet
IP if required.
6. Save the Project and Reconcile the OPCServerFF.

Service Provider Configurations

Service Name Service Provider Configuration


Basic History Node function FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connectivity services if
included in Primary Aspect Server:
• The service providers of the following services configured for
the old node must be configured to use the new target node.
Node function FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connectivity services if
included other than Primary Aspect Server:
• The service providers of the following services targeting the old
node must be deleted, as a new service provider will be created
after deploy.

H.6.8 Advant Master Connectivity Services


Node function Advant Master Connectivity Services if included in Primary Aspect
Server:
1. Go to Configuration Wizard > System Administration.
2. Select the System> Add RTA

2PAA111694-610 A 334
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.6 Node Function Configuration

3. Edit the Properties, same as provided for Node function Advant Master
Connectivity Services in Primary Aspect Server while planning in System
Configuration Console.
4. Click Next and Finish.
5. Select MB 300 RTA Settings
6. Edit the Properties, same as provided for Node function Advant Master
Connectivity Services in Primary Aspect Server while planning in System
Configuration Console.
7. Click Next and Finish.

Service Provider Configurations

Service
Service Provider Configuration
Name
Basic History Node function Advant Master Connectivity Services if included in
Primary Aspect Server:
• The service providers of the following services configured for the
old node must be configured to use the new target node.
Node function Advant Master Connectivity Services if included
other than Primary Aspect Server:
• The service providers of the following services targeting the old
node must be deleted, as a new service provider will be created
after deploy.

H.6.9 SMS and E-mail Messaging


If the Messenger service was running on the replaced node then perform the following
steps to set the new SMS and E-mail Messaging Service Provider Node:
1. Open a Plant Explorer Workplace.
2. Use the Structure Selector to open the Service Structure.
3. Use the Object Browser to navigate to: Services > Messenger Server, Service >
Messenger SG_1, Service Group > Messenger SP_1, Service Provider
4. Select Service Provider Definition in the Aspect List Area.
5. Clear the Enabled check box and click Apply.

2PAA111694-610 A 335
H Footprint Reduction during Upgrade
H.7 Remove Nodes

6. Set the SMS and e-mail Messaging Service Provider node to the node designated
to run the Messenger Service in the Node: dropdown list box.
7. Select the Enabled check box and click Apply. This will set the Service Provider
hostname for SMS and e-mail Messaging.

H.7 Remove Nodes


The following procedure to be performed to remove the node from System after all the
node functions associated to that node are moved to other node.
Verify that there are no services associated to the node to be removed by Navigating
the Node Administration Structure > Node Administration > All Nodes> Node to be
removed.
1. Open the Configuration wizard.
2. Select System Administration, Click Next.
3. Select the <System Name>, Click Next.
4. Select Nodes, Click Next.
5. Select Remove Server, Click Next.
6. Select the server intended to remove.
7. Clear the update remote node check box.
8. Click Next and then click Finish.

Verify the affinity settings to ensure best system performance. Refer to System 800xA
Post Installation (2PAA111693*) for more information on how to configure affinity.

H.8 Post Upgrade Procedures


Perform the post upgrade procedures for different node types as described in
Post-Upgrade Procedures.

For the functions moved to the new target node the post upgrade procedures must
be performed on the new target node.

2PAA111694-610 A 336
Revision History
Updates in Revision Index A

Revision History

The revision index of this User Manual is not related to the 800xA 6.1 System Revision.

The following table lists the revision history of this User Manual.

Revision
Description Date
Index
A Published for 800xA 6.1 release December 2018

Updates in Revision Index A


The following table shows the updates made in this User Manual for Revision Index A.

Updated Section/Sub-section Description of Update


All Sections Updated for the 6.1 System release.

2PAA111694-610 A 337
2PAA111694-610 A 338
Index

Index
Numerics Calculation service
800xA for AC 870P/Melody Preparation, 102
Preparation, 90 Consistency check
800xA for MOD 300 Pre-upgrade, 44, 73, 225
Preparation, 90 Control Builder M, 201
800xA system backup Controller online upgrade, 261
Pre-upgrade, 108
E
A Engineering studio
About this book, 13 Function designer system extensions
AC 800M Preparation, 81
Post upgrade, 201 Event collector service, 184
Advant master
Post upgrade, 156 F
Pre-upgrade, 83, 85, 155 FOUNDATION fieldbus
Alarm priority mapping aspects Post upgrade, 152
Post upgrade, 137 Pre-upgrade, 83
Pre-upgrade, 79
Asset optimization I
Post upgrade, 177 Information management
Preparation, 93 Post upgrade, 189
Autostart shortcut, 209 Preparation, 99, 116
Information management maintenance, 197
B
Basic history service M
Post upgrade, 188 Melody
Basic history service data Post upgrade, 172
Preparation, 122 Minimum hardware requirements, 19
Batch management
Preparation, 78 O
Batch Management Online upgrade controller level, 261
Shutdown script, 186
Toolbar, 187 P
Planning, 18
C PLC connect
Calculations Post upgrade, 174
Post upgrade, 200 PreTreat2.dll, 92

2PAA111694-610 A 339
Index

Post upgrade Post upgrade, 156


AC 800M, 201 Pre-upgrade, 83, 85, 155
Advant master, 156 Scheduler service
Alarm priority mapping aspects, 137 Preparation, 102
Asset optimization, 177 Scheduling
Basic history service, 188 Post upgrade, 200
Calculations, 200 Shutdown script, 186
FOUNDATION fieldbus, 152 SMS and e-mail messaging
Information management, 189 Post upgrade, 185
Melody, 172 Preparation, 98
PLC connect, 174 Restarting event collector service, 184
Process engineering tool integration, 208 System backup, 211
Reconfiguring group displays, 137 System language package, 21
RTA board, 156 System preparation
Safeguard, 156 800xA for AC 870P/Melody, 90
Scheduling, 200 800xA for MOD, 90
SMS and e-mail messaging, 185 Asset optimization, 92
PreTreat2.dll, 92 Basic history service data, 122
Pre-upgrade, 69, 125 Batch management, 78
800xA system backup, 108 Calculation service, 102
Alarm priority mapping aspects, 79 Information management, 99, 116
Consistency check, 44, 73, 225 Process engineering tool integration, 105
Engineering studio Scheduler service, 102
Function designer system extensions, 81 SMS and e-mail messaging, 98
FOUNDATION fieldbus, 83 System restore, 64
Process engineering tool integration
Post upgrade, 208 T
Preparation, 105 Toolbar, 187

R U
Reconfiguring group displays, 137 Upgrade Control Builder M projects, 201
Restarting event collector service, 184 Upgrade order, 28, 53
RTA board
Post upgrade, 156 W
Warning and error messages, 239
S
Safeguard

2PAA111694-610 A 340
www.abb.com/800xA 800xA is a registered or pending trademark We reserve all rights to this document
of ABB. All rights to other trademarks reside and the items and images it contains.
www.abb.com/controlsystems with their respective owners. The reproduction, disclosure to third parties
or the use of the content of this document
We reserve the right to make technical – including parts thereof – are prohibited
changes to the products or modify the without ABB’s prior written permission.
2PAA111694-610 A

contents of this document without prior


notice. With regard to purchase orders, Copyright © 2019 ABB.
the agreed particulars shall prevail. All rights reserved.
ABB does not assume any responsibility
for any errors or incomplete information in
this document.

S-ar putea să vă placă și